Owner’s Manual
ELB-02
EN
Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4-5.
For information on assembling the instrument, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
3
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the
following:
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators.
Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy
objects on it.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument
or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses)
containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as
water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall
over and cause a fire.
• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power
switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device
inspected by Yamaha service personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used
for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.
Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in
damage to the instrument or even injury.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
• When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or more people.
Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may damage your back, result in
other injury, or cause damage to the instrument itself.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage
to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Power supply/Power cord
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/Power cord
Assembly
Location
DMI-5 1/2
5
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,
set all volume levels to minimum.
• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and
gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the
desired listening level.
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel
or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the
instrument or other property, or operational failure.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
• Do not rest your legs or feet on the Expression Pedal or Pedal Box from the back
of the instrument, or climb on the instrument, or put excessive weight on it.
• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall
over.
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or
stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them
periodically using the specified tool in order to prevent the possibility of
accident or injury.
• Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off the rear of
the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest, unsupervised use may
result in accident or injury.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.
When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Connections
Handling caution
Using the bench (If included)
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be
found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You
should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain
this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification
in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
The name plate is
located on the bottom
of the unit.
(bottom_en_01)
DMI-5 2/2
6
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property,
follow the notices below.
Handling
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.
Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on
your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid
noise caused by communication.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a
heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or
unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or
chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
• During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of
the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off
immediately with a soft cloth.
Saving data
• Save your important Registration data onto the USB flash drive (page 116) since the Registration data memorized to the
instrument will be overwritten by certain operations, such as Song playback, etc. Before using a USB flash drive, make
sure to refer to page 132.
•A “” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not
turn the power off while the Registration is being saved, otherwise the data will be lost.
The Registration Shift settings and Keyboard Percussion settings will be automatically saved to the Registration data
when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, “” appears at the top left of the display indicating that
the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off without switching to another display or while
“” is shown in the display, otherwise the data will be lost.
• To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto a
spare USB flash drive as backup data.
Information
About copyrights
• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly
prohibited except for your personal use.
• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has
license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute
media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the
product.
* The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score,
score data, etc.
* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of
Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases.
7
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
About functions/data bundled with the instrument
• This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data
for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or
composers originally intended.
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
About this manual
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
Compatible Format
“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard
specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased
polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing.
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically
to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and
to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.
GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major
enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well
as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.
8
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Included Accessories
Owner’s Manual (this book)
Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook
Online Member Product Registration
The “PRODUCT ID” on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
Music Rest
Dust Cover
Power Cord
Bench
Congratulations!
Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Electone!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage
of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that
you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
Insert the music rest into the slots as shown.
Dust Cover
9
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
About the Manuals
This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.
Included Documents
Owner’s Manual (this book)
Provides overall explanations of the Electone functions.
Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook
This useful book helps you familiarize yourself with the Electone, giving you basic information on
playing the instrument, including the proper playing posture, and providing helpful music scores
which get you started playing the Electone using the preset Registration menu. This book also includes
information on how to record your performance to the USB flash drive, and listen back to your
recorded performances.
Online Materials (PDF)
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
Explains how to connect this instrument to the iPhone/iPad.
MIDI Reference
Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.
To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads website, select your country, enter “ELB-02” in the
Model Name box, then click [Search].
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Contents
PRECAUTIONS.................................................................... 4
NOTICE ................................................................................ 6
Information............................................................................ 6
Congratulations! ................................................................... 8
Included Accessories............................................................ 8
About the Manuals................................................................ 9
Main Features..................................................................... 12
Panel Controls and Terminals 13
Overview............................................................................. 13
Front Panel ......................................................................... 14
Quick Introductory Guide 16
Power Supply ..................................................................... 16
Turning On/Off the Power................................................... 16
Adjusting the Volume ......................................................... 17
Adjusting the Contrast of the Display................................. 18
Using Headphones ............................................................ 19
1 Basic Operation 20
Registration Menu .............................................................. 20
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu.. 20
Registration Menu List ............................................... 22
Using the LCD display ....................................................... 25
Selecting from a list in the display ............................. 25
Selecting an item and changing its value.................. 25
Changing the Display Page ....................................... 26
Basic Operation.................................................................. 27
Selecting the Display Language................................ 27
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)......................... 27
Confirming the Version of Your Electone ................... 28
2 Voices 29
Voices for Each Keyboard.................................................. 29
Voice Display...................................................................... 31
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons ............................ 33
Selecting Voices for Voice section 1.......................... 33
Adjusting the Voice volume ....................................... 34
Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2................................. 36
Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice
section 2 .................................................................. 36
Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 ......................... 37
Selecting Voices from the User buttons ............................. 39
Voice List............................................................................ 42
3 Voice Controls and Effects 52
Selecting from the Voice Condition display ....................... 53
Rotary Speaker .......................................................... 60
Selecting from the panel .................................................... 61
Reverb........................................................................ 61
Sustain ....................................................................... 63
Effect List............................................................................ 64
4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 68
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons ...................... 68
To select and play a rhythm...................................... 68
Operating the rhythm from the panel........................ 71
Adjusting the tempo .................................................. 73
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb......................... 74
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons .......................... 75
Rhythm List ........................................................................ 77
Accompaniment ................................................................ 79
Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) .. 82
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ............................................... 85
Keyboard Percussion ........................................................ 88
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion .................... 88
Preset Keyboard Percussion List .............................. 90
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
.............................................................................. 101
Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion ............... 104
Kit Assign List.......................................................... 105
5 Registration Memory 111
Storing Registrations ....................................................... 111
Selecting Registrations.................................................... 113
Storing Registrations to Another Bank............................. 116
Deleting Banks ................................................................ 117
Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive............ 118
Initializing Registration Memory....................................... 120
Registration Shift.............................................................. 121
6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 127
Calling Up the MDR Display............................................ 127
Using the MDR Display ................................................... 128
Song icons .............................................................. 130
Connecting a USB Device............................................... 132
Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal ................................................................. 132
Using USB Flash Drives .......................................... 132
Formatting a USB Flash Drive ......................................... 133
Selecting a Song ............................................................. 134
Recording ........................................................................ 138
Recording................................................................ 138
Re-recording (Retry) ............................................... 140
Recording Each Part Separately............................. 140
Punch-in Recording ................................................ 143
Changing the Song/Folder Name.................................... 144
Saving Registrations........................................................ 147
Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song
.............................................................................. 149
Overwriting Registration data to a Unit ................... 151
Deleting Registrations ............................................. 152
Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations
in one performance) ............................................. 153
Recalling Recorded Registrations................................... 154
Loading Registrations ............................................. 154
Playing Back a Song ....................................................... 155
Playing Back Selected Parts ................................... 157
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause ........................... 157
11
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Changing the Tempo ............................................... 158
Repeat Playback...................................................... 159
Playing Back XG Songs ........................................... 160
Other Operations — Copy, Delete, etc. ........................... 161
Copy......................................................................... 161
Song Delete/Folder Delete....................................... 164
Creating folders ....................................................... 165
Converting to XG format .......................................... 166
Checking the Remaining Memory............................ 168
7 Audio 169
Recording Your Performance as Audio............................ 169
Playing Back Audio Files.................................................. 172
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause ............................ 173
Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch ................. 174
Deleting the File / Changing the File Name ............. 176
8 Footswitches 177
Right Footswitch ............................................................... 177
Left Footswitch ................................................................. 177
9 Transpose and Pitch Controls 181
10 Connections 182
Accessory Jacks and Controls......................................... 182
Connection Examples — External Devices...................... 184
Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through
an External Audio System...................................... 184
Outputting the sound of an external device through
the built-in speakers of the Electone ..................... 184
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
............................................................................... 185
Controlling the Electone from an External Device ... 185
Connection with Computer............................................... 186
Using the [USB TO HOST] terminal ......................... 186
MIDI .................................................................................. 187
What is MIDI? ........................................................... 187
MIDI Messages of the Electone ............................... 188
MIDI Channels ......................................................... 189
MIDI Control ..................................................................... 190
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad.......................................... 192
Wireless LAN settings .............................................. 192
Wireless LAN Detailed Settings ............................... 198
Initialize the wireless LAN settings........................... 200
Glossary of Terms .................................................... 201
11 Appendix 202
Assembly Instructions ...................................................... 202
Troubleshooting................................................................ 206
Specifications ................................................................... 209
Index................................................................................. 211
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Quick Introductory
Guide
Basic Operation
Voices
Voice Controls
and Effects
Rhythm/Keyboard
Percussion
Registration
Memory
Music Data
Recorder (MDR)
Audio
Footswitches
Transpose and
Pitch Controls
Connections
Appendix
12
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Main Features
The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 601 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the
Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six
basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit
your own performance needs.
The ELB-02 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices—540 altogether—created with the
AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system, including special Super Articulation Voices, which
realistically recreate characteristic instrument sounds. With highly playable keyboards featuring authentic
touch response—with Initial Touch and After Touch functions—you can play these Voices with all the
expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there is a wide variety of effect types
that you can apply to each Voice section—letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the
Voic es.
The exceptionally wide selection of various rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your
performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) —such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and
Break—that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and
professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing
basic backing as well as embellishments.
This powerful feature allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the keyboard. A wide range of
sounds and drum/percussion kits are available, for performing rhythms in real time. Each sound is assigned to
its own key, and the sounds include everything from conventional kicks and snares to a wide variety of ethnic
and Latin instruments, as well as special sound effects, such as thunder, laughing, animal cries and more.
The Electone also features a Music Data Recorder (MDR) for recording your Registrations and performances
to a USB flash drive, and playing back those performances using the sounds of the Electone. In addition, the
MDR allows you to copy a Song from one USB flash drive to another, letting you archive your important
recordings and Registration data.
You can record your performances as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive. Since the data is saved in stereo
WAV format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and played on portable
music players by using a computer, allowing you to share your recordings with your friends, and make your
own CDs to enjoy as well.
Wide Variety of Registration Menus
page 20
Richly textured, AWM Voices, Touch functions and High Quality
Digital Effects
pages 29, 52
Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment
page 68
Keyboard Percussion
page 88
Versatile Functions of the Music Data Recorder
page 127
Audio Recording
page 169
13
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
Overview
Music Rest
page 8
Front Panel
[AUX IN] jack
page 182
AUX OUT [L/L+R]/
[R] jack
page 182
[PHONES] jack
page 182
Speaker
Upper Keyboard
page 29
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
page 183
Lower Keyboard
page 29
MIDI terminals
page 183
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
page 183
[USB TO HOST] terminal
page 183
[AC IN] jack
For connecting a power
cord. page 16
Right Footswitch
page 121
Left Footswitch
page 177
Expression Pedal
page 17
Pedalboard
page 29
14
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Front Panel
Panel Setup (Panel Settings)
By using the controls on the panel, you can make various settings such as selecting a Voice or Style, tuning the pitch, and so on. These settings
of the instrument are together referred to as “panel setup” or “panel settings” in this manual.
C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3
C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3
MUSIC DATA RECORDER (MDR)
Allows recording and playback of
your keyboard performances, and
lets you store Registration data for
future recall (page 127).
[VOICE SECTION 2]
button
Switches between Voice
sections 1 and 2 (page 33).
UPPER KEYBOARD
VOICE
Selects the Voices
for Upper Keyboard
(page 29).
LEAD VOICE
Selects the Lead Voices for Upper Keyboard
(page 29). Also available on the Lower
Keyboard while “To Lower” function is on.
REGISTRATION MENU
Selects convenient Registrations,
which let you instantly reconfigure
all relevant settings, allowing you
to start playing with all appropriate
sounds pre-selected (page 20).
LCD display
Shows the current
settings of the
Electone (page 25).
SUSTAIN buttons
(page 63)
REVERB buttons
(page 61)
TEMPO buttons
Adjusts the speed
of the rhythm
(page 73).
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
Turns Keyboard
Percussion On or
Off (page 88).
RHYTHM
Sets the rhythm
(page 68).
RHYTHM CONTROL
Starts and stops the
rhythm, and adds
changes to the
rhythm (page 71).
Tempo, Bar/Beat
display
Shows the current
tempo or position in the
measure (page 73).
LOWER
KEYBOARD VOICE
Selects the Voices
for Lower Keyboard
(page 30).
PEDAL VOICE
Selects the Voices for Pedalboard
(page 30). Also available on the
Lower Keyboard while “To Lower”
function is on.
15
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5
D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6
Display Select
[VOICE DISPLAY] button
(page 31)
[A.B.C./M.O.C.] button
(page 82)
[FOOTSWITCH] button
(page 177)
[MDR] button (page 127)
[AUDIO] button
(page 169)
[UTILITY] button
(page 27)
Page buttons
Selects the Page
of the display
(page 26).
DATA CONTROL dial
Selects the setting or
value in the display
(page 25).
Data Control [A] –
[D] buttons
Selects items and
changes the values/
settings in the
display (page 25).
[9-16] button
(page 112)
[MEMORY] button
(page 111)
REGISTRATION
MEMORY buttons
For registering and
recalling panel
setups (page 111).
[DISABLE] button
(page 114)
MASTER VOLUME
dial
Adjusts the overall
volume (page 17).
[USB TO DEVICE]
terminal
For connecting a
USB flash drive
(page 183).
[] (Standby/On)
switch
Turns the
instrument’s power
on or sets it to
standby (page 16).
16
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Quick Introductory Guide
Connect the plugs of the power cord in the order shown in the illustration.
1
Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial counter-clockwise.
2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
1
Power Supply
1
2
[AC IN] jack
(page 13)
AC Outlet
The shape of the
plug and outlet
differs depending
on your locale.
WARNING
Use only the supplied
power cord.
CAUTION
When setting up the
product, make sure that
the AC outlet you are using
is easily accessible. If
some trouble or
malfunction occurs,
immediately turn off the
power switch and
disconnect the plug from
the outlet.
NOTE
When disconnecting the
power cord, first turn off the
power, then follow this
procedure in reverse order.
2
Turning On/Off the Power
NOTICE
Do not press any keys or
buttons while turning the
power on. Doing so may
cause the Electone to
malfunction or data loss.
17
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Quick Introductory Guide
When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one after the
other on the LCD display:
This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned voice settings
for each Voice section (page 31).
3 Press and hold the [] (Standby/On) switch for about a second to
turn the power off.
1
Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of
the entire instrument.
2 Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.
Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level, you can
use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot as you play.
CAUTION
Even when the []
(Standby/On) switch is in
standby status, electricity
is still flowing to the
instrument at the minimum
level. Remove the electric
plug from the outlet when
the instrument is not to be
used for extended periods
of time, or during electrical
storms.
3
Adjusting the Volume
CAUTION
Do not use the instrument
for a long period of time at
a high or uncomfortable
volume level, since this
can cause permanent
hearing loss.
Decreases the volume Increases the volume
Maximum volume Minimum volume
18
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Quick Introductory Guide
You can adjust the contrast of the display.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility display.
Since the contrast setting is set in Utility display Page 1, select Page 1 with the
page buttons if another page is shown.
2 Press the [C] button corresponding to “LCD CONTRAST.”
“LCD CONTRAST” is selected and highlighted.
3 Adjust the LCD contrast with the DATA CONTROL dial or by
successively pressing the corresponding button.
You can set the value between -5 – +5.
4
Adjusting the Contrast of the Display
NOTICE
The LCD contrast setting is
automatically saved when
another display is called
up. Make sure to switch to
another display before
turning the power off.
19
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Quick Introductory Guide
To use headphones, connect them to the PHONES jack (standard stereo phone jack).
5
Using Headphones
CAUTION
Do not use the
headphones for a long
period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume
level, since this can cause
permanent hearing loss.
Standard stereo phone plug
20
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
The Registration Menu is a simple, highly convenient way to instantly change all the
Electone settings for playing in specific music styles. A Registration consists of panel
settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices,
Pedal Voices, the assigned rhythm and so on. Registration Menu button [0] includes
a variety of basic Registrations, especially for practicing, and the other buttons [1] –
[5] include Registrations in various music genres for playing your favorite types of
music. These give you a wide palette of Registrations to choose from, both for
practice purposes and for freely playing in virtually any music style or genre.
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu
1 Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons.
Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example,
if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration
Menu, see page 22.
2 From this main category, select the specific Registration you want
to use.
Each Registration Menu button actually contains many Registrations. Select the
desired Registrations in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. You
can also select Registration by using the [A] and [D] buttons located at the
immediate right side of the LCD.
1
Registration Menu
NOTE
Additional basic
Registrations are preset on
the Registration Memory
locations from 1 to 16. See
page 116 for details.
Basic
Page 01 Kids
Page 02 Simple
Pages 01, 02 Pops & Rock
Pages 01, 02 Dance & Ballad
Pages 01, 02 Jazz & Latin
Pages 01, 02 Symphony & World
1
1
21
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
3 Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.
Changing Pages
REGISTRATION MENU buttons [1] – [5] contain two display pages: “01” and
“02,” each of which contain two different sets of Registrations. Page 01 features the
same Registration Menu as that of the ELB-01, while Page 02 features new
Registration Menus for the ELB-02. From each of the 01 and 02 pages, select the
desired Registration.
Page buttons
1
22
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
Registration Menu List
[ 0 ] BASIC
01
Simple 1 St/St
02
Simple 2 St/Hr
03
Simple 3 Cl/St
04
Simple 4 Cl/Hr
05
Simple 5 Tp/St
06
Simple 6 Tp/Hr
07
Simple 7 Ob/St
08
Simple 8 Ob/Bsn
09
Simple 9 Fl/St
10
Simple 10 Fl/Cl
11
Simple 11 Cl/Cl
12
Simple 12 Pf/Pf
13
Simple 13 Cl/Bsn
14
Sound Effect 1
15
Sound Effect 2
16
Sound Effect 3
17
Sound Effect 4
18
Sound Effect 5
19
Sound Effect 6
20
Sound Effect 7
21
Sound Effect 8
22
Sound Effect 9
23
Sound Effect 10
24
Sound Effect 11
25
Sound Effect 12
26
Sound Effect 13
27
Sound Effect 14
28
Sound Effect 15
29
Sound Effect 16
30
StCombi 1 St/St
31
StCombi 2 St/Hr
32
StCombi 3 St/Br
33
StCombi 4 St/CB
34
StCombi 5 Oct Hi
35
StCombi 6 Oct Lo
36
StCombi 7 Soft
37
StCombi 8 SftOct
38
StCombi 9 Hard
39
StCombi 10HrdOct
40
StCombi 11 St+WW
41
StCombi 12 St+Br
42
StCombi 13 Pizz
43
StCombi 14 Trem
44
StCombi 15 Vn/Vc
45
StCombi 16 Vn/Pz
46
BrCombi 1 Tp/St
47
BrCombi 2 Tp/Hr
48
BrCombi 3 Tp/Tb
49
BrCombi 4 Br/Hr
50
BrCombi 5 Br/Br
51
BrCombi 6 Oct
52
BrCombi 7 Br/CB
53
BrCombi 8Br/Timp
54
BrCombi 9 Br+Xyl
55
WWCombi 1 Fl/St
56
WWCombi 2 Fl/Cl
57
WWCombi 3 Fl/Hp
58
WWCombi 4 Ob/St
59
WWCombi 5 Ob/Bsn
60
WWCombi 6 Ob/Piz
61
WWCombi 7 Cl/St
62
WWCombi 8 Cl/Hr
63
WWCombi 9 Cl/Piz
64
WWCombi 10Sax/Pf
65
Woodwind Ens 1
66
Woodwind Ens 2
67
Woodwind Ens 3
68
Woodwind Ens 4
69
Woodwind Ens 5
70
Woodwind Ens 6
71
Woodwind Ens 7
72
Decay 1 Piano
73
Decay 2 Harpsi
74
Decay 3 E.Piano
75
Decay 4 Guitar
76
Decay 5 E.Guitar
77
Decay 6 Xylophne
78
Decay 7 Glocken
79
Decay 8 Harp
80
Hold 1 PipeOrgan
81
Hold 2 JazzOrgan
82
Hold 3 Accordion
83
Hold 4 Recorder
84
Synth 1
85
Synth 2
86
Synth 3
87
Synth 4
88
Synth 5
89
Comping Rock
90
Comping Jazz 1
91
Comping Jazz 2
92
Comping Classic1
93
Comping Classic2
94
Comping Classic3
95
Comping Classic4
[ 1 ] KIDS, SIMPLE
Page 01 KIDS
01
Simple 8Beat 1
02
Simple 8Beat 2
03
Light Step
04
Sunny Pop
05
Kids March 1
06
Kids March 2
07
Kids March 3
08
Synth Rock
09
SymphonicMarch 1
10
SymphonicMarch 2
11
Bluegrass
12
Sea Carnival
13
Basic Waltz
14
Brass Ensemble
15
Pure Waltz
16
Rococo Ensemble
17
Pop Cha Cha
18
Comical Rumba
19
Comical Samba
20
Toy Orchestra
21
Charleston
22
Winter Swing
23
Snow Waltz 1
24
Snow Waltz 2
25
Alpine Polka *A
26
Alpine Polka *B
27
Alpine Polka *C
28
Alpine Polka *D
29
Dream Ballad *A
30
Dream Ballad *B
31
Dream Ballad *C
32
Dream Ballad *D
33
Pops Orchestra*A
34
Pops Orchestra*B
35
Pops Orchestra*C
36
Pops Orchestra*D
37
Kids On Stage *A
38
Kids On Stage *B
39
Kids On Stage *C
40
Kids On Stage *D
41
Galaxy March *A
42
Galaxy March *B
43
Galaxy March *C
44
Galaxy March *D
45
SE *A
46
SE *B
47
SE *C
48
SE *D
Page 02 SIMPLE
01
SimpleReg Strs 1
02
SimpleReg Strs 2
03
SimpleReg Orch 1
04
SimpleReg Orch 2
05
SimpleReg Orch 3
06
SimpleReg Pops 1
07
SimpleReg Pops 2
08
SimpleReg Latin
09
SimpleReg Jazz 1
10
SimpleReg Jazz 2
11
SimpleReg Jazz 3
12
SimpleReg Organ
13
BrassBandMarch*A
14
BrassBandMarch*B
15
Orchestra March
16
6/8 MarchingBand
17
6/8 MarchingKids
18
Light Waltz
19
OrchestraWaltz*A
20
OrchestraWaltz*B
21
OrchestraWaltz*C
22
OrchestraWaltz*D
23
8Beat Synth Pop
24
8Beat Pop
25
Pop Shuffle
26
R&B Shuffle
27
Rock
28
Rock Shuffle
29
Rock Pop Ballad
30
Funk
31
Dance Pop
32
Disco Pop
33
R&B E.Piano Bld
34
R&B Piano Ballad
35
8Beat Ballad
36
8Beat OrchBallad
37
3/4 Pop Ballad
38
6/8 Pop Ballad
39
Big Band King *A
40
Big Band King *B
41
Big Band King *C
42
Big Band Swing
43
Jazz Session
44
Fusion Samba
45
Pop Samba
46
Simple BossaNova
47
Mambo
48
Rumba
49
Cls Organ Chapel
50
Cls Organ Hall
51
RockOrgan Ballad
52
R&B Rock Organ
53
Organ Combo
54
6/8 Organ Ballad
55
Soul Jazz Organ
56
Pop Organ 60s
57
Toy Or g a n
58
Theatre Organ NY
59
Nostalgic Organ
1
23
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
[ 2 ] POPS&ROCK
Page 01
01
Dynamic 8Beat
02
NY Ballad
03
British Pop
04
8Beat Modern
05
Rock Band
06
Detroit Pop
07
Techno Pop
08
Sheriff Reggae
09
Rock & Roll
10
Power Rock
11
60s Guitar Rock
12
Unplugged
13
Motor City
14
Lovely Shuffle
15
Gospel Shuffle
16
Joyful Gospel
17
Frankly Soul
18
Soul
19
Gospel
20
6/8 Soul
21
Hit Pop
22
New Country
23
Eternal Pop
24
Ground Beat
25
Bounce Pop *A
26
Bounce Pop *B
27
Bounce Pop *C
28
Bounce Pop *D
29
Blues Jam *A
30
Blues Jam *B
31
Blues Jam *C
32
Blues Jam *D
33
EvergreenWaltz*A
34
EvergreenWaltz*B
35
EvergreenWaltz*C
36
EvergreenWaltz*D
37
16Beat Pop *A
38
16Beat Pop *B
39
16Beat Pop *C
40
16Beat Pop *D
41
Top Gear Rock *A
42
Top Gear Rock *B
43
Top Gear Rock *C
44
Top Gear Rock *D
45
Southern Pop *A
46
Southern Pop *B
47
Southern Pop *C
48
Southern Pop *D
Page 02
01
70s Easy Pop
02
BoysGuitarBallad
03
Soul Pop
04
70s Top Duo
05
Daydream Shuffle
06
Oldies Pop
07
EuroPop Folklore
08
Discotheque Rock
09
Slow Hand Ballad
10
Sweet AC Ballad
11
70s PrimeTime TV
12
Crossover Funk
13
Joyful Gospel #2
14
Gospel Groove
15
Worship Shuffle
16
Worship 16beat
17
Soulful Wonder
18
Lovely & Soulful
19
Danceable Funk
20
Bright Pop Rock
21
AmericanHardRock
22
Power Rock 80s
23
USA RockStandard
24
Seaside Rock
25
70s Folk Rock
26
Alternative Rock
27
Alternative6/8Rk
28
Highway Rock
29
Funky Rock&Roll
30
Synth Pop Rock
31
Power Synth Rock
32
RockGuitarBallad
33
Pop Rock & Roll
34
Back To The 60s
35
Dancing Boogie
36
6/8 Shuffle Rock
37
Shuffle BoysRock
38
Shuffle Pop Rock
39
Shfl Rock Ballad
40
Pop Rock Band
41
Shuffle PopPiano
42
Contemp Country
43
Smooth Country
44
Xmas Shuffle
45
Snowy Christmas
46
Pretty Rock
47
Ultra Rock
48
Rock Graffiti
49
Casual Rock
50
Rookie Rock
51
Happy Rock
52
J-Pop Idol Rock
53
J-Pop Band Rock
54
Spirit Pop
55
Sweet Love Pop
56
Summer Pop
57
Shaky Dance
58
J-Pop Piano Band
59
J-Pop Boys
60
J-PopShuffleBeat
61
J-Pop BandBallad
62
Breezy Ballad
63
HeroRanger Theme
64
Sunset Pop
65
Funky Punch *A
66
Funky Punch *B
67
GlxyBattleship*A
68
GlxyBattleship*B
69
J-Pop Anime *A
70
J-Pop Anime *B
71
70s Honey
72
70s Hero
73
DBZ *A
74
DBZ *B
75
DBZ *C
76
DBZ *D
[ 3 ]
DANCE&BALLAD
Page 01
01
Organ Ballad
02
Dramatic Ballad
03
Love Ballad
04
Smooth Lead
05
Pop Ballad
06
Guitar Ballad
07
Acoustic Ballad
08
Healing Guitar
09
Chillout
10
Sweetheart 1
11
Sweetheart 2
12
Slow & Easy
13
Euro Trance
14
6/8 Trance
15
Cool Hip Hop
16
Latin House
17
Dance Beat
18
Euro Dance Pop
19
UK Pop
20
Jive
21
Disco Queen
22
Disco Soul
23
Pop Disco
24
Hot Disco
25
Ibiza *A
26
Ibiza *B
27
Ibiza *C
28
Ibiza *D
29
Power House *A
30
Power House *B
31
Power House *C
32
Power House *D
33
Dance Latino *A
34
Dance Latino *B
35
Dance Latino *C
36
Dance Latino *D
37
Twilight Disco*A
38
Twilight Disco*B
39
Twilight Disco*C
40
Twilight Disco*D
41
Love Song *A
42
Love Song *B
43
Love Song *C
44
Love Song *D
45
Movie Ballad *A
46
Movie Ballad *B
47
Movie Ballad *C
48
Movie Ballad *D
Page 02
01
R&B Pop Ballad
02
R&B Soul Ballad
03
R&B Cool Ballad
04
Cool AC
05
Sweet Chart Hits
06
Sweet SlowBallad
07
YourPiano Ballad
08
Sweet EP Ballad
09
J-Pop EasyBallad
10
Sweet Sax Ballad
11
Sweet R&B Ballad
12
Lovers R&B
13
Sentimental Bld
14
Tears Ballad
15
Glory Ballad
16
Unplugged Ballad
17
SentimentalMovie
18
BeautyCinema Bld
19
CinemaSympho Bld
20
Enka Ballad
21
6/8 Enka Shuffle
22
Christmas Ballad
23
Disco Hits 70s
24
70s Disco Night
25
Euro Pop Disco
26
Synth Disco
27
Ballroom Disco
28
Syn DancePop 80s
29
Dirty Dance Beat
30
Fortune Disco
31
Girls Pop 48 *A
32
Girls Pop 48 *B
33
Shiny Girls Pop
34
Share The Peace
35
DanceAndRhythm*A
36
DanceAndRhythm*B
37
DanceAndRhythm*C
38
DanceAndRhythm*D
39
Girls Techno
40
Candy Pop Techno
41
Dancing Platform
42
Dance Beat EX.
43
Club Beat
44
Electronica Beat
45
Kool Garage
46
Electronic Dance
47
New Age Chillout
48
Eurobeat Party
49
Ibiza Trance
50
Casual Trance
51
Trance Party
52
WonderTranceShfl
1
24
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
[ 4 ] JAZZ&LATIN
Page 01
01
Blow On Sax
02
Sax Ensemble
03
Moonlight
04
Big Band
05
Clarinet Swing
06
Jazz Combo
07
Medium Jazz
08
Organ Session
09
Guitar Combo
10
Tender Ballad
11
Jazz Waltz
12
Five-Four
13
Big Band Samba
14
Mambo Brass
15
Mambo Tenor
16
Montuno
17
Bossa Nova
18
Pop Bossa
19
Sweet Rumba
20
Beguine
21
Cha Cha Cha
22
Mellow Groove
23
Modern R&B
24
Dixieland Jazz
25
Jungle Drum *A
26
Jungle Drum *B
27
Jungle Drum *C
28
Jungle Drum *D
29
Jazz Club *A
30
Jazz Club *B
31
Jazz Club *C
32
Jazz Club *D
33
Afro Session *A
34
Afro Session *B
35
Afro Session *C
36
Afro Session *D
37
ChaCha Grandee*A
38
ChaCha Grandee*B
39
ChaCha Grandee*C
40
ChaCha Grandee*D
41
3/4 Fast Jazz *A
42
3/4 Fast Jazz *B
43
3/4 Fast Jazz *C
44
3/4 Fast Jazz *D
45
Twilight Sax *A
46
Twilight Sax *B
47
Twilight Sax *C
48
Twilight Sax *D
Page 02
01
Big Band Tutti
02
Alto Sax Combo
03
Jazz Combo Fast
04
Jazz Combo 66
05
The Big Band *A
06
The Big Band *B
07
Guitar JazzCombo
08
The Swing Jazz
09
New Orleans Jazz
10
Ragtime Band
11
Funky Cat Groove
12
Afro Cuban Jazz
13
Guitar JazzWaltz
14
Sax Jazz Waltz
15
Swing Steps
16
Swing Chorus
17
Relax Swing
18
Urban Lounge
19
Broadway Tap
20
Brazilian Bossa
21
Lounge BossaNova
22
8Beat Bossa Nova
23
Pop Bossa Nova
24
Tiny Bossa Nova
25
Cafe Samba
26
BitterSweetLatin
27
Latin Rock
28
DanceBeatLatin*A
29
DanceBeatLatin*B
30
Pop Accordion
31
Sweet Bomba
32
Orquesta Salsa
33
New Flamenco
34
Jummin' Reggae
35
RumbaAndTheCity
36
French Caribbean
37
Caribbean Sea
[ 5 ]
SYMPHONY&WORLD
Page 01
01
Fanfare
02
String Orchestra
03
Romantic Violin
04
Baroque
05
Flute & Harp
06
Serenade
07
Fast March
08
Wild West
09
Vienna Waltz
10
Polka
11
Chanson Club
12
Theatre Organ
13
Flamenco
14
Pop Flamenco
15
Mexican Dance
16
Mariachi
17
Celtic Dance
18
Folk Step
19
Italiano
20
Musette
21
Country
22
Hawaiian
23
Chinese Nocturne
24
Japanese Sound
25
OrchestraMarch*A
26
OrchestraMarch*B
27
OrchestraMarch*C
28
OrchestraMarch*D
29
Pasodoble *A
30
Pasodoble *B
31
Pasodoble *C
32
Pasodoble *D
33
Tango *A
34
Tango *B
35
Tango *C
36
Tango *D
37
Show Time *A
38
Show Time *B
39
Show Time *C
40
Show Time *D
41
Majestic Sound*A
42
Majestic Sound*B
43
Majestic Sound*C
44
Majestic Sound*D
45
OrchestraSwing*A
46
OrchestraSwing*B
47
OrchestraSwing*C
48
OrchestraSwing*D
Page 02
01
Orch Full Unit
02
String Classic
03
Sweet Pizzicato
04
Baroque Symphony
05
Nostalgic Green
06
New Year March
07
Wind Orchestra
08
BrassBand Parade
09
Choral No.9
10
Angel Voices
11
Beat Classic
12
Can Can Pop
13
Elegant Waltz
14
Chorus Waltz
15
Love Waltz
16
Fantasy World
17
Movie Pirates
18
Chorus Symphony
19
Hollywood Sound
20
Super Showtune
21
TV DramaTrack *A
22
TV DramaTrack *B
23
Movie Symphonic
24
Movie Soundtrack
25
Yoo-Hoo Polka
26
Pop Polka
27
Funny Polka
28
Casual Polka
29
Country Town
30
Tango Band
31
Tur ki s h Pops
32
Oriental Dance
33
Celtic Beat
34
Celtic Waltz
35
Trad Irish Pipe
36
Irish Ballad
37
ChinaSweetBallad
38
ChinaRomanticBld
39
China Dance Beat
40
China Kung Fu
41
China Trad Song
42
China Trad Dance
1
25
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
Many of the Electone’s operations are done from the LCD display. Pressing a button
on the panel automatically calls up the relevant function for the corresponding
button in the display. Depending on the display that appears, you can conveniently
perform various functions and change values/settings by using the [A] – [D] buttons
(located at the immediate right side of the LCD) and the DATA CONTROL dial (at
the right of the [A] – [D] buttons).
Selecting from a list in the display
In general (for example, for Voices and Rhythms), there are too many selectable
items and menus to all be shown in the display. In such a list display, scroll bar will
be shown at the right side of the display. When the scroll bar is shown in the display,
you can scroll through the display vertically by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial
and select the desired menu.
When the marks [ ] and [ ] are shown at the right side of the scroll bar in the
display, you can scroll the display and select the desired one by using the [A] or [D]
buttons.
Selecting an item and changing its value
In many displays (other than lists), items or parameters, such as Volume and Reverb,
are shown in vertical order, with the corresponding values/settings at the immediate
right of the items. In this type of display, you can select (highlight) the item by
pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] button (in the example above, the [B] button,
which corresponding to the Reverb setting), letting you change the value/setting
with the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the corresponding
button (in this case, the [B] button).
2
Using the LCD display
Scroll bar
1. Select the item 2. Change the value/setting
1
26
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
Changing the Display Page
Page buttons are used to select the various ‘pages’ of the display (when available),
with the currently selected page number appearing at the top right of the LCD. Use
the [ ] button to select the next page, and [ ] to select the previous page.
Simultaneously pressing both buttons selects Page 1.
Display name Page
Page buttons
Shows the number of pages and the current
page. The current page is shown with a long
bar (_), while other available pages are shown
as dots (.).
Page 1 Page 2 Page 3
1
27
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
Selecting the Display Language
The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default
setting is English.
1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel.
The Utility display appears. Since the language is set in Utility display Page 1,
select Page 1 with the page buttons if another page is shown.
2 Press the [A] button to select the corresponding language then
successively press the same button to switch the value between
Japanese and English.
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)
All current settings including Registration Memory (in all banks), Display language
and display contrast settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be
careful when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save
your important data to a USB flash drive.
Note that the operation here does not affect the settings of the wireless LAN settings,
which can be initialized on page 200.
1 Turn off the power.
3
Basic Operation
NOTICE
The language setting is
automatically saved when
another display is called
up. Make sure to switch to
another display before
turning the power off.
Reference Page
Saving the Registration Data
to USB Flash Drive
(page 118)
Reference Page
Initializing Registration
Memory (page 120)
1
28
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
2 While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back
on.
3 Release the ENDING [1] button after the Voice Display appears.
Confirming the Version of Your Electone
You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure.
1 Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
2 Select Page 8 by using the Page buttons.
The Version appears in the display.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
29
Voices
This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the
Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the
Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each
have two Voice sections.
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing
together : Upp er Ke y board Voice 1, Upp er Ke y b oard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and L e ad
Voice 2. Upp er Key b oard Voice 1 and Upper Keyboard Voice 2 can be selected from
the panel’s “UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2” section, while the Lead Voice 1 and
Lead Voice 2 can be selected from the “LEAD VOICE 1/2” section.
The Lead Voice sounds only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more
keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for solo instruments such
as Trumpet and Saxophone—instruments that play the “leading” or most prominent
part in an orchestra or band.
As the default, only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 sounds when you play the Upper
Keyboard.
Voices for the Upper
Keyboard
Voices for the Lower
Keyboard
Voices for
Pedalboard
1
Voices for Each Keyboard
Reference Page
• Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 36)
• User buttons (page 39)
•[TO LOWER /SOLO]
button (pages 38, 39)
Voices for the Upper Keyboard 1 and Upper
Keyboard 2
Voices for the Lead Voice 1
and Lead Voice 2
2
2
30
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
Voices for the Lower Keyboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing
together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each
section can be selected from the panel’s “LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2” section.
Voices for Pedalboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing
together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected
from the panel’s “PEDAL VOICE 1/2” section. The Pedal Voice sounds one note at a
time; when you simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will
sound.
Voices for the Lower Keyboard 1 and Lower Keyboard 2
Reference Page
[TO LOWER ] button
(page 38)
Voices for the Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
31
Voices
The Voice Display allows you to easily check which Voices are being used for each
keyboard. It also allows you to set whether the Voice for each section sounds or not
by changing the On/Off status in the display.
How to call up the Voice Display:
Pressing the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section selects the
Voice Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on.)
The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pressing
the Page buttons at the top right of the display.
The Voice Display shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section and
their On/Off status.
On/Off status of the Voices
You can set whether the Voice sounds or not by setting the on/off status in the Voice
display. Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the Voice section you want to
change to alternate between on and off.
Page 1 and page 2
Each of the keyboards and Pedalboard have two basic Voice sections: Voice section 1
and Voice section 2. To select a Voice, you need to first select the desired Voice
section. For this reason, the Voice Display actually has two separate displays: one for
checking the Voice selected in Voice section 1, and the other for Voice section 2.
Successive presses of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button at the top left on the panel
switch between the Voice sections, and the corresponding display will be shown.
2
Voice Display
Voice Display [Page 1] Voice Display [Page 2]
Voice name On/Off status Voice name On/Off status
Reference Page
Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 36)
NOTE
Selecting Page 1 or 2 turns
the [VOICE SECTION 2]
button off or on.
2
32
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
When Voice section 1 is selected
([VOICE SECTION 2] button is off)
From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 1
on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lead Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1
and Pedal Voice 1).
When Voice section 2 is selected
([VOICE SECTION 2] button lights up)
From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 2
on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2
and Pedal Voice 2).
For selecting the desired Bank to which you can store the Registration, or from
which you can recall the Registration. For details, refer to page 116.
Voice Display [Page 3]
Upper Keyboard Voice 1
Lead Voice 1
Lower Keyboard Voice 1
Pedal Voice 1
Upper Keyboard Voice 2
Lead Voice 2
Lower Keyboard Voice 2
Pedal Voice 2
Reference Page
Registration Memory
(page 111)
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
33
Voices
Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections,
instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 of the Voice section 1 are given
here. For details on how to select a Voice of Voice section 2, see page 37.
Selecting Voices for Voice section 1
1 Make sure that the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is off.
If the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is lit, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button
to turn the lamp off, and select Voice section 1.
When the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off, you can select a Voice for Voice
section 1 (in this case, the Upper Keyboard Voice 1), from the panel’s UPPER
KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section.
2 Press one of the Voice buttons in the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/
2 section.
For example, if you have pressed the [ORGAN] button, the following display
(Voice Menu) will appear.
The Voice menu contains many Organ Voices, and they will be shown in the
display.
3
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons
Reference Page
Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 36)
Lamp is off, indicating that you can select
a Voice for Voice section 1.
2
34
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
3 Select the Voice in the Voice menu display by rotating the DATA
CONTROL dial.
You can also select by pressing the [A]/[D] buttons.
Now go on to select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did for the
Upper keyboard above.
Adjusting the Voice volume
There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the Volume buttons on the panel
and setting the volume in the display. The Volume buttons let you make coarse
adjustments to the volume while the setting in the display gives you fine control.
Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)
Press one of the Volume buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired
level for each Voice. The controls have five volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or
no sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Setting the Volume in the display (fine)
Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again after selecting the Voice calls up
the Voice Condition display.
The Volume is displayed in the top of the Voice Condition display Page 1. Press the
[A] button to select the “VOLUME” item, then adjust the volume by using the DATA
CONTROL dial. The range of the Fine volume control is 0 – 24.
Increasing the volume
Decreasing the volume
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set in the Voice
Condition display), two
adjacent Volume button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
NOTE
Although setting the on/off
status of the Voice section to
off in the Voice Display
results in a Volume value of 0
in the Voice Condition
display, it will change to on
when you increase the
Volume value in the Voice
Condition display or by
using the panel Volume
buttons, even if you have set
it to off.
Voice Condition Display [Page 1]
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
35
Voices
Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected button.
Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses
alternate between the two displays.
From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as Pan,
Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition display, see
page 53.
Voice Menu Display Voice Condition Display
2
36
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
This feature lets you blend two Voices together—Voice section 1 with a different
Voice in Voice section 2. This is useful for creating rich textures in the sound,
playing the two Voices in a layer. For details on how to select a Voice for Voice
section 1, see page 33. The instructions below explain how to selecting a Voice
(Upper Keyboard Voice 2) for Voice section 2.
S
witching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2
To switch between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2, press the [VOICE SECTION
2] button on the panel.
For the Voice section which is indicated as “1/2” on the panel, you can select the
Voice from each section by switching between sections 1 and 2 by pressing the
[VOICE SECTION 2] button.
Each press of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button alternates between the available Voice
sections 1 and 2. When the button lamp is off, Voice section 1 is available. When the
button lamp is lit, Voice section 2 is available.
4
Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2
NOTE
Switching between Voice
sections 1 and 2 has no
effect on which Voice is
sounded by the keyboard.
Since Voice section 1 is selected, you
can select the Upper Keyboard Voice
1, Lead Voice 1, Lower Keyboard
Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1.
Since Voice section 2 is selected, you
can select the Upper Keyboard Voice
2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard
Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2.
Voice Section 1
([VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off)
Voice Section 2
([VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is lit)
Upper Keyboard
Voice 1
Lead
Voice 1
Lower Keyboard
Voice 1
Pedal
Voice 1
Upper Keyboard
Voice 2
Lead
Voice 2
Lower Keyboard
Voice 2
Pedal
Voice 2
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
37
Voices
Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2
Since selection of Voices for Voice section 2 follows the same procedure throughout
all Keyboard sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard, Upper Keyboard
Voice 2, are given here.
1 M
ake sure that the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit.
If the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button
to turn the lamp on, and select Voice section 2.
Now, you can select a Voice for Upper Keyboard Voice 2 from the panel’s
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section.
2 Press one of the Voice buttons in the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE
1/2 section.
3 Select the Voice you want to play by using the DATA CONTROL
dial.
Lamp is lit, indicating that you can select
a Voice for Voice section 2.
Indicates Upper Keyboard
Voice 2 is selected.
2
38
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
4 Press one of the Volume buttons of the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE
1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level for the Upper
Keyboard Voice 2.
Since the default Volume level for Voice section 2 is set to minimum, the Upper
Ke y board Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, L ower Ke yboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2
will produce no sound even after you select the Voices for Voice section 2. To
play the Voices for Voice section 2, make sure to press the Volume buttons of
the selected Voice 1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level. When
the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit, the Volume buttons of the
Voice sections can be used to set the Volume level specifically for Voice section
2.
Now set the Voices for Lead Voice 2, Lower keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 as you
did for Upper keyboard Voice 2 above.
If you want to turn off the Voices of Voice section 2, set the volume level to
minimum by using the Volume buttons of the selected Voice sections on the panel
while the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit, or set the status to Off in the
Voice Display [Page 2].
Reference Page
On/Off status of the Voices
(page 31)
About the To Lower function
Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be
played on the Lower Keyboard when the TO LOWER button in each section is on.
The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section.
When this function is on, the Lead Voice 1 and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the
Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively.
NOTE
Even when the To Lower
function is on, the Pedal
Voices 1, 2 played on the
Lower Keyboard will be
controlled by the Sustain
settings for the Pedal Voices.
(page 63)
NOTE
Even when the To Lower
function is on, the Pedal
Voices 1, 2 played on the
Lower Keyboard will sound
monophonic.
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
39
Voices
This Electone has a variety of Voices from which you can choose—greater than what
is immediately apparent from the front panel controls. You’ve already learned (in
“Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” above) how to select different Voices that
are available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice.
The Electone also has User buttons in each voice section, giving you access to even
more voices. These User buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu selectors; any
internal voices can be selected from these buttons.
The User buttons have two basic uses:
For playing any Voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or Pedalboard. You
can play on the Upper Keyboard, for example, Voices from any of the other Voice Menu
pages, and not be limited to only the twelve buttons (twelve Voice Menu pages) that make
up the Upper Voice section.
For having two different Voices from the same Voice Menu page available for selection in
the same song. For example, you can assign one of the Voices to a User button in the Upper
Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, the second Voice to the other User button in the same section.
About the Solo function
The ELS series Electone features an exclusive Solo function letting you instantly switch to
a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all other Upper Keyboard
Voices. This Electone can playback Songs containing the Solo function by using the
MDR function. After playing back such a Song, [TO LOWER /SOLO] button may
light. In this status, Lead Voice 2 will not sound, so turn off the [TO LOWER /SOLO]
button.
NOTE
The [TO LOWER /SOLO]
button functions as Solo
when the [VOICE SECTION
2] button lights up, and
function as TO LOWER when
the [VOICE SECTION 2] is
off.
5
Selecting Voices from the User buttons
NOTE
The Voices S-Violin, S-Flute,
S-Alto Sax and S-Irish Pipe
can be used only for Voice
sections Lead Voices 1/2
and Pedal Voices 1/2. These
four Voices cannot be
selected for Voice sections
Upper Keyboard Voices 1/2
and Lower Keyboard Voices
1/2, and are not shown in the
display.
User buttons
2
40
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
For example, select Pedal Voice “5: Contrabass 5” for User button [1] in Upper
Keyboard Voice 1.
1 Make sure that the lamp of [Voice section 2] is off.
If the [Voice section 2] lamp is lit, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button to
turn the lamp off, and select Voice section 1.
2 Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections (in this
case, User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section).
The name of the selected category is displayed.
3 Select one of the Pages (categories) with the Page buttons (in this
case, “CONTRABASS”).
Lamp is off, indicating that you can
select a Voice for Voice section 1.
Voice category
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
41
Voices
4 Select “5: CONTRABASS 5” by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
Now you’ve assigned Contrabass 5 to be called up by User button [1] in Upper
Keyboard Voice 1. You can set voices to the User buttons in any other Voice sections
just as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 1 above.
Directly selecting the category
To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and
simultaneously press the desired Voice button.
1. While holding down the User button...
2. Press the Voice button.
2
42
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
This list describes the preset Voices.
• Super Articulation Voices
Voices having the prefix “S-” at the beginning of the name. For details on the effects that are produced by
playing the Super Articulation Voices, refer to the Description column.
“AEM” is the trademark of Yamaha’s leading-edge tone generation technology.
• Auto Articulation Voices
Voices which produce effects by playing the keyboard when setting AUTO ARTICULATION
(page 59) to ON in page 6 of the Voice Condition display. For details on the effects that are produced by
playing the Auto Articulation Voices, refer to the Description column.
Portamento or glissando effect will be produced only when you play intervals of minor 7th, Major 7th or
octave in legato with the Voice “S-Violin” or “S-Alto Sax.”
6
Voice List
Category No. Voice Name Description
STRINGS/
VIOLIN
01 Strings 1 These Voices feature string ensemble sounds, with accurate simulation of all string instruments,
including contrabass, cello, viola and violin. Variations include light plucking sounds, bow scratching
noises and deep resonant sounds.
02 Strings 2
03 Strings 3
04 Strings 4
05 Strings 5
06 Strings 6
07 Strings 7
08 Strings 8
09 Strings 9
10 Strings 10
11 Strings 11
12 Slow Strings This string sound features a gentle initial attack.
13 Chamber Strs 1 These string ensembles are for chamber music.
14 Chamber Strs 2
15 Chamber Strs 3
16 Chamber Strs 4
17 Pizzicato Strs 1 These are sounds of stringed instruments being plucked by finger instead of being bowed.
18 Pizzicato Strs 2
19 Pizzicato Strs 3
20 Pizzicato Strs 4
21 Tremolo Strings This is the sound of tremolo strings on a single note.
22 Spiccato Strings This is the sound of lightly bouncing a bow on the strings of a stringed instrument.
23 Strings1 & 6 This is a combination of Strings 1 and Strings 6.
24 Strings2 & Viola This is a combination of Strings 2 and Viola.
25 Strings3 & 4 This is a combination of Strings 3 and Strings 4.
26 Strings6&Violin4 This is a combination of Strings 6 and Violin 4.
27 Violin4 & Cello This is a combination of Violin 4 and Cello.
28 Octave Strings 1 These are string ensemble sounds played in octaves.
29 Octave Strings 2
30 Octave Strings 3
31 Violin 1 These deeply expressive sounds are suitable not only for classical music but, also jazz and country &
western. Tonal variations include bright Voices and soft ones.
32 Violin 2
33 Violin 3
34 Violin 4
35 Violin 5
36 Violin 6
37 Pizzicato Violin This is the sound of a violin being plucked by finger.
38 Viola This instrument is slightly larger (and deeper) than a violin. It is used for mid-range parts.
39 Cello 1 These are warm and deep sounds.
40 Cello 2
41 S-Violin *1
*2
This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release
sounds. Natural-sounding portamento is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and playing legato
octaves.
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
43
Voices
CONTRABASS 01 Contrabass 1 These sounds are used for the lowest pitched parts. Variations range from deep to solo-type sounds.
02 Contrabass 2
03 Contrabass 3
04 Contrabass 4
05 Contrabass 5
06 Contrabass 6
07 Pizzicato Bass 1 These are the sounds of contrabass being plucked by finger.
08 Pizzicato Bass 2
09 Acoustic Bass 1 These acoustic bass sounds are ideal for jazz. This instrument is also known as “standup bass” and
“upright bass.”
10 Acoustic Bass 2
11 Bass & Cymbal This is a combination of acoustic bass and ride cymbal.
BRASS/
TRUMPET
01 Brass Section 1 These are trumpet-based brass section sounds. Variations include sounds for classical, big band and
other music.
02 Brass Section 2
03 Brass Section 3
04 Brass Section 4
05 Brass Section 5
06 Brass Section 6
07 Power Brass This is a crisp and powerful brass section sound.
08 Soft Brass This is a soft and sustained brass section sound.
09 Trombone Sec 1 These are trombone brass section sounds. Variations include a deep sound for classical music and a
sweet, smooth sound for jazz ballads.
10 Trombone Sec 2
11 Trombone Sec 3
12 Trombone Sec 4
13 Trombone Sec 5
14 Trombone Sec 6
15 Brass1&Trumpet6 This is a combination of Brass Section 1 and Trumpet 6.
16 Brass2&Trumpet6 This is a combination of Brass Section 2 and Trumpet 6.
17 Horn 1 & 3 This is a combination of Horn 1 and Horn 3.
18 Octave Brass 1 These are octave brass sounds with variations. They feature rich variations from strong, dynamic impact
Voices with quick attack, to soft, warm Voices for enriching the overall sound.
19 Octave Brass 2
20 Octave Brass 3
21 Octave Brass 4
22 Octave Brass 5
23 Octave Brass 6
24 Octave Brass 7
25 Octave Brass 8
26 Trumpet 1 These are bright, multi-purpose trumpet sounds.
27 Trumpet 2
28 Trumpet 3
29 Trumpet 4
30 Trumpet 5
31 Trumpet 6
32 Trumpet 7
33 Trumpet 8
34 Trumpet 9
35 Muted Trumpet 1 These sounds recreate the distinctive tone that results when a mute is inserted in the bell of trumpet. The
normal “blasting” sound of the trumpet is suppressed, and the resulting sound is thin and metallic.
36 Muted Trumpet 2
37 Muted Trumpet 3
38 Muted Trumpet 4
39 Flugel Horn 1 This is a brass instrument with a characteristically warm and soft sound.
40 Flugel Horn 2
41 Trombone 1 The slide trombone has distinctive “stretching” and “shrinking” characteristics and features a wide range
of expressive power, from brilliant and strong to soft and sweet.
42 Trombone 2
43 Trombone 3
44 Muted Trombone 1 A mute effect makes the volume softer and alters the characteristics of this trombone Voice.
45 Muted Trombone 2
46 Horn 1 These Voices are all recreations of horns with coiled tubing, and feature a soft, mellow sound. The
Voices are indispensable for orchestra and brass band since they blend well with virtually any
instrument sound, woodwind or brass.
47 Horn 2
48 Horn 3
49 Horn 4
50 Horn 5
51 Horn 6
52 Muted Horn This horn has a sound that is made sharp and metallic by using a mute, and is even capable of
mimicking the sound of a human Voice.
Category No. Voice Name Description
2
44
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
BRASS/
TRUMPET
53 Tuba 1 This instrument is meant to be played in the lower octaves and has a rich, stable sound that supports
brass band and orchestra. It has a wide expressive range, and is often used in playing humorous
phrases.
54 Tuba 2
55 Euphonium This instrument features a characteristically broad and deep — even noble — sound, and is frequently
used as a solo instrument.
56 Brass Bass 1 These are brass ensembles for playing in the lower octaves. They also have a timpani sound in unison.
57 Brass Bass 2
58 Brass Bass 3
WOODWIND/
FLUTE
01 Flute 1 This light and transparent instrument Voice sounds like a bird singing. This instrument is equally good
for both fast, quickly executed passages and smooth melodies.
02 Flute 2
03 Flute 3
04 Flute 4
05 Flute 5
06 Piccolo This instrument is one octave higher than flute and is meant to be played in the higher octaves.
07 Recorder 1 This basic flute instrument is used in grade school music classes, and can be heard in some medieval
and baroque music. It has a relatively hard and round sound.
08 Recorder 2
09 Ocarina This instrument has a long history and features a simple, warm sound. The pitch and the sound quality
are changed by the strength of the breath.
10 Whistle This sound is a reproduction of a human whistling.
11 Clarinet 1 This instrument has a wide sound range and distinctive character — with rich sound in the low end and
crisp, bright tones in the high. It is used extensively in a variety of music styles including classical
chamber music and swing jazz.
12 Clarinet 2
13 Clarinet 3
14 Clarinet 4
15 Bass Clarinet This instrument has a thick, deep sound and is played one octave lower than the normal clarinet.
16 Oboe 1 An instrument of the woodwind double reed family, this has a high, reedy, sometimes nasal tone — yet it
is also rich and warm, and can handle a wide range of expression and emotion.
17 Oboe 2
18 Oboe 3
19 English Horn Also known as “cor anglais,” this instrument is larger than the oboe, and its timbre is well-suited for the
performance of expressive, melancholic solos in slow orchestral pieces.
20 Bassoon 1 This instrument belongs to the double reed family and is used in the lower range. It is known for its
humorous, expressive character as well as its wide range and agility, and can also be used as a solo
instrument.
21 Bassoon 2
22 Bassoon 3
23 Alto Sax 1 Among the woodwind instruments, this instrument is capable of the loudest sound, and plays a highly
prominent role. Its wide expressive power makes it ideal for both classical music and jazz.
24 Alto Sax 2
25 Tenor Sax 1 This instrument is active in a wide range of genres, including classical and jazz. It is often used in soul
and R&B music, or in slow, moody pieces.
26 Tenor Sax 2
27 Tenor Sax 3
28 Soprano Sax This instrument features a characteristic high, “stretching” sound, perfect for legato phrasing and sweet,
emotional passages.
29 Baritone Sax This is a soft and low baritone sax sound, also used in R&B music.
30 Sax Ensemble 1 These are saxophone ensemble sounds with variations, such as mellow sounds for classical music and
a sax section for big band.
31 Sax Ensemble 2
32 Sax Ensemble 3
33 Sax Ensemble 4
34 Sax Ensemble 5
35 Sax Ensemble 6
36 Woodwind Ens 1 These are woodwind ensemble sounds that change the instrument depending on the particular register
played.
37 Woodwind Ens 2
38 Woodwind Ens 3
39 Woodwind Ens 4
40 Clarinet&Flutes This is a clarinet and flute ensemble.
41 Clarinet & Oboe This is a clarinet and oboe ensemble.
42 Flutes & Oboes This is a flute and oboe ensemble.
43 Woodwind&Glocken This is a combination of woodwind ensemble and glockenspiel.
44 S-Flute *1
*2
This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release
sounds.
45 S-Alto Sax *1
*2
This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release
sounds. Natural-sounding glissando is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and playing legato
octaves.
TUTTI 01 Strings & Winds This is a strings and woodwind ensemble.
02 Strings&Brass 1 This is a strings and brass section ensemble.
03 Strings&Brass 2
04 Strings&Brass 3
05 Strings & Horn This is a strings and horn ensemble.
06 Trumpets & Winds This is a trumpet, brass section, and woodwind ensemble.
07 Horns & Winds This is a horn and woodwind ensemble.
08 Orchestra Bass This is a tuba, contrabass, and timpani ensemble.
Category No. Voice Name Description
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
45
Voices
TUTTI 09 Brass & Sax 1 This is a brass section and sax ensemble.
10 Brass & Sax 2
11 Brass & Sax 3
12 Brass & Winds This is a brass section and woodwind ensemble.
13 Orchestra Hit 1 These are popular, widely used sampled sounds in which the many instruments of the orchestra play
together on one chord or note. They are used for dramatic hits and accents.
14 Orchestra Hit 2
CHOIR 01 Choir 1 These are vocal chorus sounds. Variations include a male “ooh” sound, female “ahh,” and mixed choirs.
02 Choir 2
03 Choir 3
04 Choir 4
05 Choir 5
06 Choir 6
07 Choir 7
08 Choir 8
09 Choir 9
10 Vocal This is a solo human Voice singing “ahh.”
11 Gospel Choir This is a vocal chorus sound singing “whoo.”
12 Pop Vocals Bee These Voices include “bee,” “daa,” and “mmh” sounds that are divided between male and female
Voices based on range.
13 Pop Vocals Daa
14 Pop Vocals Mmh
PAD 01 Smooth Pad 1 These continuous, sustained synth sounds feature a smooth, warm character that help support the other
Voices in a passage, and often serve as transition sounds.
02 Smooth Pad 2
03 Smooth Pad 3
04 Smooth Pad 4
05 Smooth Pad 5
06 Smooth Pad 6
07 Smooth Pad 7
08 Resonance Pad 1 These Voices have more of unique character and distinctiveness than the other synth pads, and feature
sweeping filter effects and other dynamic sound variations when held.
09 Resonance Pad 2
10 Resonance Pad 3
11 Resonance Pad 4
12 Resonance Pad 5
13 Resonance Pad 6
14 Resonance Pad 7
15 Resonance Pad 8
16 Bell Pad 1 These continuous pad Voices feature gentle, bell sounds. There are several types of Voices here —
including an initial bell sound, as well as a bright bell that pulses softly and continuously.
17 Bell Pad 2
18 Bell Pad 3
19 Bell Pad 4
20 Bell Pad 5
21 Bell Pad 6
22 Bell Pad 7
23 Bell Pad 8
24 Bell Pad 9
25 Space Pad 1 This pad features a mysterious, spacey sound.
26 Space Pad 2
27 Space Pad 3
28 Space Pad 4
29 Space Pad 5
30 Space Pad 6
31 Space Pad 7
32 Bright Pad This pad features a bright unison sound.
33 Noisy Pad 1 This pad features a bright, buzzy sound.
34 Noisy Pad 2
35 Noisy Pad 3
36 Noisy Pad 4
37 Warm Pad This pad features a wide, spatial sound.
38 Dark Pad This pad features a calm, “floating” attack.
39 Sweep Pad 1 This pad features sounds that change over time.
40 Sweep Pad 2
41 Sweep Pad 3
42 Sweep Phase This pad features sounds that are processed with a phaser and that change over time.
43 Sweep Flanger 1 This pad features sounds that are processed with a flanger and that change over time.
44 Sweep Flanger 2
Category No. Voice Name Description
2
46
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
SYNTH 01 Synth Lead 1 These special synth sounds are designed for solo parts and lead lines. Included is a synth Voice that
has a strong layered fourth interval below the main pitch.
02 Synth Lead 2
03 Synth Lead 3
04 Synth Lead 4
05 Synth Lead 5
06 Synth Lead 6
07 Synth Lead 7
08 Fat Saw Lead 1 These are fat and bright synth lead sounds.
09 Fat Saw Lead 2
10 Fat Saw Lead 3
11 Filter Lead This synth lead sound features an attack that simulates an analog synthesizer, with a strong touch
response.
12 Soft Lead 1 These synth lead sounds simulate an analog synthesizer with a soft tone.
13 Soft Lead 2
14 Soft Lead 3
15 Soft Lead 4
16 Chorus Saw Lead This is a bright synth lead sound processed with chorus.
17 Vintage Lead 1 These strong synth lead sounds simulate a popular analog synthesizer.
18 Vintage Lead 2
19 Vintage Lead 3
20 Vintage Lead 4
21 Dance Chords 1 These bright, octave unison synth lead sounds are suitable for dance music.
22 Dance Chords 2
23 Dance Chords 3
24 Club Lead 1 These detuned synth lead sounds are suitable for dance music.
25 Club Lead 2
26 Pop Lead 1 These light and round synth sounds are appropriate for solos and leads.
27 Pop Lead 2
28 Pop Lead 3
29 Pop Lead 4
30 Pop Lead 5
31 Pop Lead 6
32 Synth Cla 1 These bright, round and fresh synth sounds are reminiscent of the clarinet.
33 Synth Cla 2
34 Synth Cla 3
35 Synth Cla 4
36 Synth Cla 5
37 Synth Cla 6
38 Synth Cla 7
39 Synth Sax This is a wind synth sound.
40 Synth Trumpet This is a bright analog synth sound with tension.
41 Synth Brass 1 This is an abundant variety of synth brass Voices, from conventional sounds and octave unisons to
unique, comical sounds.
42 Synth Brass 2
43 Synth Brass 3
44 Synth Brass 4
45 Synth Brass 5
46 Synth Brass 6
47 Synth Brass 7
48 Synth Brass 8
49 Synth Brass 9
50 Synth Brass 10
51 Synth Brass 11
52 Fat Synth Brass This is a fat synth brass sound.
53 DetunedSawBrass1 These are powerful, detuned synth brass sounds.
54 DetunedSawBrass2
55 DetunedSawBrass3
56 Soft Synth Brass This is a soft synth brass sound.
57 PWM Brass Slow This is a synth brass sound that features tonal changes that are controlled by aftertouch. (PWM = Pulse
Width Modulation)
58 PWM Brass Fast This is a synth brass sound with fast tonal changes. (PWM = Pulse Width Modulation)
59 Funky Analog This is a synth brass sound that features a characteristic initial attack.
Category No. Voice Name Description
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
47
Voices
SYNTH 60 Synth Strs 1 These are spacious synth strings sounds.
61 Synth Strs 2
62 Synth Strs 3
63 Synth Strs 4
64 Synth Strs 5
65 Synth Strs 6
66 Synth Strs 7
67 Synth Strs 8
68 Synth Strs 9
69 Synth Strs 10
70 Light SynStrings This is a useful synth strings sound.
71 FatSynStrings This is a fat synth strings sound.
72 Oct SynStrings 1 These are synth strings played in octaves.
73 Oct SynStrings 2
74 Synth Bell 1 These are synth sounds with variations including crisp, clangorous bright bell and soft, glassy sounds.
75 Synth Bell 2
76 Synth Bell 3
77 Synth Bell 4
78 Synth Bell 5
79 Vox Bell This is a combination of Voice Pad and Synth Bell.
80 Pop Synth Bell This is a bright synth bell sound.
81 Synth Decay 1 These are unique decaying synth sounds.
82 Synth Decay 2
83 Synth Decay 3
84 Synth Decay 4
85 Synth Sequence This synth sound is suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios.
86 TranceSequence 1 These synth sounds are suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios used in dance music.
87 TranceSequence 2
88 Percussive Seq 1 These percussive synth sounds are suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios.
89 Percussive Seq 2
ORGAN 01 Pipe Organ 1 The pipe organ has its roots in churches and cathedrals, and features a solemn, rich, majestic sound.
The Voices here range from soft to powerful.
02 Pipe Organ 2
03 Pipe Organ 3
04 Pipe Organ 4
05 Pipe Organ 5
06 Theatre Organ 1 This instrument evokes feelings of nostalgia, having been used extensively in silent movie theaters,
skating rinks, restaurants (especially pizzerias) and baseball stadiums.
07 Theatre Organ 2
08 Theatre Organ 3
09 Theatre Organ 4
10 Theatre Organ 5
11 Theatre Organ 6
12 Theatre Organ 7
13 Theatre Organ 8
14 TheatreTp&Kinura
15 Theatre Tp 16&8
16 Harmonica 1 This instrument has a wide expressive range, and can be used for emotional, soft ballads and solos.
17 Harmonica 2
18 Harmonica 3
19 Reed Organ This is a small organ without pipes and features a warm sound.
20 Bandoneon 1 This musical instrument is often used for tango, and features a characteristic initial attack.
21 Bandoneon 2
22 Accordion 1 A versatile, multi-purpose instrument that has a home in a wide variety of genres, including French
chanson, Argentinian tango, polka and Tex-Mex music.
23 Accordion 2
24 Accordion 3
25 Accordion 4
26 AccordionMuset. This is a musette tone accordion with a bright and unique tuning.
27 Jazz Organ 1 These electric organ sounds — great for jazz and R&B — are designed to be used with the rich rotary
speaker effect.
28 Jazz Organ 2
29 Jazz Organ 3
30 Jazz Organ 4
31 Jazz Organ 5
32 Jazz Organ 6
33 Jazz Organ 7
34 Vintage Organ This is a vintage organ sound.
Category No. Voice Name Description
2
48
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
ORGAN 35 Vin Organ Slow 1 These vintage organ sounds feature a rotary speaker at slow speed.
36 Vin Organ Slow 2
37 VintageOrganFast This vintage organ sound features a rotary speaker at fast speed.
38 Pop Organ 1 These are multi-purpose organ sounds.
39 Pop Organ 2
40 Pop Organ 3
41 Pop Organ 4
42 Pop Organ 5
43 Pop Organ 6
44 Rock Organ 1 These are hard, overdriven, distorted organ sounds, ideal for rock.
45 Rock Organ 2
46 Rock Organ 3
47 RockOrgan Slow 1 These rock organ sounds feature a rotary speaker at slow speed.
48 RockOrgan Slow 2
49 RockOrgan Slow 3
50 RockOrgan Slow 4
51 Rock Organ Fast This rock organ sound features a rotary speaker at fast speed.
52 Organ Bass 1 These pipe organ bass and jazz organ bass sounds are for lower register parts.
53 Organ Bass 2
54 Organ Bass 3
55 Organ Bass 4
PIANO 01 Piano 1 These are multi-purpose piano sounds.
02 Piano 2
03 Piano 3
04 Honkytonk Piano This purposely out-of-tune piano sound is used in ragtime, older jazz and blues, and country rock music.
05 Octave Piano 1 These are piano sounds played in octaves, including Voices that are an octave lower or two octaves
higher.
06 Octave Piano 2
07 Octave Piano 3
08 Harpsichord 1 This is the definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no
touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released.
09 Harpsichord 2
10 Harpsichord 3
11 Clavichord This is a soft keyboard instrument for classical music, with a unique sound when the keys are released.
12 DX E.Piano 1 These electric piano sounds are from the popular DX7 synthesizer.
13 DX E.Piano 2
14 DX E.Piano 3
15 DX E.Piano 4
16 DX E.Piano 5
17 DX E.Piano&Pad 1 These sounds combine the popular DX7 synthesizer with pads.
18 DX E.Piano&Pad 2
19 Galaxy E.Piano This is a bright sound with a strong touch response.
20 Stage E.Piano 1 These electric piano Voices feature the characteristic hammer and tine sound, with a bright yet warm
feel. They also have tremolo effects.
21 Stage E.Piano 2
22 Stage E.Piano 3
23 Stage E.Piano 4
24 Stage E.Piano 5
25 Stage E.Piano 6
26 Stack E.Piano 1 These bright electric pianos are characterized by their sharp attack sound.
27 Stack E.Piano 2
28 Clavi 1 These are funky sounds of a popular 1960’s era keyboard.
29 Clavi 2
30 Clavi 3
GUITAR 01 Nylon Guitar 1 These sounds are of an acoustic guitar with nylon strings.
02 Nylon Guitar 2
03 Nylon Guitar 3
04 S-Nylon Guitar 1 *2 This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato
note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the
noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated
through legato playing.
05 S-Nylon Guitar 2 *2 This sound is the same as S-Nylon Guitar 1, but without the legato effect or the noise caused by fingers
touching strings.
06 Flamenco Guitar This guitar sound is suitable for flamenco music.
07 S-FlamencoGuitar *2 This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato
note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the
noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated
through legato playing.
Category No. Voice Name Description
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
49
Voices
GUITAR 08 Steel Guitar 1 These sounds are acoustic guitar with steel strings.
09 Steel Guitar 2
10 S-Steel Guitar 1 *2 This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato
note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the
noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated
through legato playing.
11 S-Steel Guitar 2 *2 This sound is the same as S-Steel Guitar 1, but without the legato effect or the noise caused by fingers
touching strings.
12 12Str Guitar This is a 12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds.
13 Jazz Guitar 1 These soft electric guitars are good for jazz solo passages.
14 Jazz Guitar 2
15 Jazz Guitar Oct This electric guitar is mixed with a Voice one octave higher, and is good for jazz solo passages.
16 S-Jazz Guitar *2 This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato
note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the
noise caused by fingers muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato
playing.
17 E.Guitar 1 These electric guitar sounds include distortion and overdrive effects, as well a clean electric guitar.
18 E.Guitar 2
19 E.Guitar 3
20 Clean Guitar 1 These electric guitar sounds are suitable for accompaniment and arpeggios.
21 Clean Guitar 2
22 Clean Guitar 3
23 Clean Guitar 4
24 E.Guitar Amp 1 These electric guitar sounds feature amp simulations.
25 E.Guitar Amp 2
26 E.Guitar Amp 3
27 Muted Guitar 1 These are muted guitar sounds.
28 Muted Guitar 2
29 Muted Guitar 3
30 S-Clean Guitar 1 *2 These are Super Articulation Voices. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers muting strings
is reproduced.
31 S-Clean Guitar 2 *2
32 Distortion Gtr 1 These are distorted guitar sounds.
33 Distortion Gtr 2
34 Distortion Gtr 3
35 Distortion Gtr 4
36 Distortion Gtr 5
37 Distortion Gtr 6
38 Distortion Gtr 7
39 S-Dist Solid 1 *2 This is a distorted electric guitar sound that is suitable for solos. It is a Super Articulation Voice that
features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a
perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and
muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing.
40 S-Dist Solid 2 *2 This is a distorted electric guitar sound that is suitable for solos. It is a Super Articulation Voice. When
you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural
sounds can be simulated through legato playing.
41 Banjo This sound is suitable for country and dixieland jazz.
42 Mandolin This instrument is used commonly in Italian music and features a realistic plucked sound.
43 Pedal Steel Gtr1 These are Hawaiian guitar sounds. They are effective when used with the glide function.
44 Pedal Steel Gtr2
45 Harp 1 The gentle, beautiful sound of this instrument makes it ideal for soft passages, and it is often played
glissando for dramatic effect.
46 Harp 2
47 Harp 3
PERCUSSION 01 Vibraphone 1 This percussion instrument utilizes resonators fitted with metal discs, which in turn are connected by rod
to a motor — which produces the distinctive, warm tremolo effect heard in some jazz music.
02 Vibraphone 2
03 Marimba 1 This instrument is similar to the xylophone and has resonant tubes under the sound plates. However, the
wooden keys give it a soft, more organic sound, and it has an especially rich lower register, giving it a
wide expressive range and making it useful as a solo instrument.
04 Marimba 2
05 Xylophone This instrument features dry and tight sounds.
06 Glockenspiel 1 These are sounds of a small glockenspiel, and feature a soft, shining sound.
07 Glockenspiel 2
08 Celesta 1 The celesta is similar in structure to the piano. Hammers move and hit metal bars (similar to the
glockenspiel) when the keys are played, producing a pretty, somewhat fragile bell sound.
09 Celesta 2
10 Music Box 1 These are music box sounds.
11 Music Box 2
12 Chime 1 These are chime sounds.
13 Chime 2
14 Chime 3
Category No. Voice Name Description
2
50
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voices
TIMPANI 01 Timpani 1 This dramatic sounding percussion instrument is unlike most drums in that it produces a definite pitch. It
adds extra power and dynamic impact when played in unison with other instruments and plays a very
important role in orchestral music.
02 Timpani 2
03 Timpani Roll 1 These are timpani sounds played with a drum roll technique.
04 Timpani Roll 2
ELECTRIC
BASS
01 Fingered Bass 1 These are electric bass sounds played by finger.
02 Fingered Bass 2
03 Fingered Bass 3
04 Fingered Bass 4
05 Fingered Bass 5
06 Fingered Bass 6
07 Fingered Bass 7
08 Slap Bass 1 These are percussive, slapped bass sounds. These slap bass Voices feature variations in the ‘thickness’
of the sounds and differences in how the strings are played.
09 Slap Bass 2
10 Slap Bass 3
11 Slap Bass 4
12 Slap Bass 5
13 Picked Bass 1 These electric bass Voices feature the bright attack of playing with a pick, and have variations in the
‘thickness’ of the sounds.
14 Picked Bass 2
15 Picked Bass 3
16 Picked Bass 4
17 Picked Bass 5
18 Fretless Bass 1 These are smooth fretless bass sounds. These fretless bass Voices have a unique sound, and are best
used with subtle, sliding pitch changes.
19 Fretless Bass 2
20 Fretless Bass 3
21 Fretless Bass 4
SYNTH BASS 01 Funk Bass 1 These are synth bass sounds that feature a characteristic initial attack.
02 Funk Bass 2
03 Funk Bass 3
04 Funk Bass 4
05 Funk Bass 5
06 Funk Bass 6
07 Funk Bass 7
08 Dance Bass 1 These synth bass sounds are suitable for dance music.
09 Dance Bass 2
10 Dance Bass 3
11 Dance Bass 4
12 Dance Bass 5
13 Dance Bass 6
14 Dance Bass 7
15 Dance Bass 8
16 Dance Bass 9
17 Dance Bass 10
18 Smooth Bass 1 These are contemporary, “cool” synth bass sounds.
19 Smooth Bass 2
20 Smooth Bass 3
21 Smooth Bass 4
22 Fat Bass 1 These are fat synth bass sounds.
23 Fat Bass 2
WORLD 01 Pan Flute 1 The pan flute (also known as “pan pipes”) is a simple instrument used in folk music of various countries,
and consists of several stopped pipes of increasing length bound together in one line. It is a beautiful
instrument that evokes the sound of wind in nature and is named after the Greek mythological god Pan.
02 Pan Flute 2
03 Bagpipe This is a traditional Scottish instrument, usually played with a continuous, low drone. The sound can be
melancholy as well as dramatic and inspiring.
04 Dulcimer This is a characteristically clear and beautiful Voice.
05 Shakuhachi This is a traditional Japanese recorder made of bamboo.
06 Yokobue This is a traditional Japanese flute.
07 Shamisen This traditional Japanese instrument features three strings and a small body covered with animal skin.
The bright, slightly buzzy sound is similar to the banjo, yet has a very strong Oriental flavor.
08 Koto This is a Japanese koto sound.
09 Taishokoto This is a Japanese Taisho koto sound.
10 Er Hu 1 Also known as the “Chinese violin,” this is a two-stringed bowed instrument, capable of producing sad,
mysterious, or joyful melodies.
11 Er Hu 2
12 Er Hu 3
13 Ban Hu This traditional Chinese instrument features a clear, full sound, and is used as a solo instrument.
Category No. Voice Name Description
2
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
51
Voices
*1 The Voices using AEM technology can be used for the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice sections, but they cannot be used for the Upper Keyboard Voice and
Lower Keyboard Voice sections.
*2 The Slide function (in the Voice Condition Display) is not applied to the Super Articulation Voices (having names beginning with the prefix “S-”).
WORLD 14 Ma Tou Qin This two-stringed bowed instrument has been passed down through generations by Mongolian nomads.
It is also known as the “horse-headed violin,” and features a strong yet sometimes delicate tone.
15 Di Zi This is a Chinese flute. It features a unique sound produced by the vibration of a thinly stretched
membrane.
16 Suo Na This double-reed instrument is similar to an oboe, and features a joyful sound.
17 Hu Lu Si This Chinese folk instrument is a reed instrument with three bamboo pipes that pass through a gourd.
The center pipe is played, while the two outer pipes are typically drone pipes. It features a soft and
graceful sound.
18 Sheng The Chinese sheng is a mouth-blown free reed instrument consisting of vertical tubes, and apparently
inspired the invention of the harmonica, accordion and reed organ.
19 Gu Zheng 1 This instrument is also called the Chinese koto. It has a long history during which it grew from 13 strings
to the currently popular 21-string version. There are also 23-string and 25-string versions. It features a
bright sound that is suitable for beautiful and lyrical melodies.
20 Gu Zheng 2
21 Yang Qin This percussive stringed instrument is a member of the zither family. Sound is produced by striking the
strings with beaters. It is a relatively new Chinese instrument with origins influenced by the West.
22 Pi Pa This Chinese lute has a pear-shaped body, and it is used often for solo parts as well as accompaniment
and ensembles.
23 Liu Qin This instrument is smaller than the Pi Pa, and is also called a “willow lute” because its shape resembles
a leaf of a willow tree. It features a beautiful, crystal clear treble sound.
24 San Xian This traditional three-stringed Chinese instrument features snake skin stretched over both sides of a
resonator. It is played with fingerpicks worn on the fingers to pluck the strings.
25 Surnay This vertical reed flute features a high-pitched tone.
26 Oud This traditional stringed instrument is from Saudi Arabia, Turkey, and nearby regions.
27 Sitar This Indian (or Hindustani) classical instrument has different resonances in the lower and mid/high
ranges.
28 Steel Drum This pitched percussion instrument, originating in Trinidad in the West Indies, is made from 55-gallon oil
drums and is apparently the only acoustic instrument invented in the 20th century. It has a bright and
joyful tropical sound that belies its industrial source.
29 Kalimba African instrument.
30 S-Irish Pipe *1
*2
This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology to reproduce the characteristics of the Irish pipe.
Colorful expression is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and using Pitch Bend and grace notes.
Category No. Voice Name Description
52
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the
sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.
Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.
However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls
and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.
The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections.
Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently
according to the different types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each
keyboard or globally for the entire system.
* Although Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato are not applied to the Pedal Voices on the Pedalboard, they will be applied to the Pedal
Voices on the Lower Keyboard when you turn the To Lower function to on.
** Priority is applicable only for Lead Voice 2.
Controls and Effects
Reference
page for
changing
the settings
Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied
Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard
Upper Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Lead Voice 1, 2
Lower Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Pedalboard
Voice 1, 2
Selecting from the Voice Condition display, Pages 1-6
Page 1
Volume
page 54
Reverb (send level)
page 54
Pan
page 54
Feet
page 54
Page 2
Brilliance
page 55
Initial Touch
page 55 –*
After Touch
page 55 –*
Touch Vibrato
page 55 –*
Page 3
Vibrato
page 56
Delay
page 56
Depth
page 56
Speed
page 56
Page 4
Effect
page 57
Type
page 58
Parameters
page 58
Value
page 58
Page 5
Transpose
page 58
Tune
page 58
Page 6
Slide
page 59 – ––
Slide Time
page 59 – ––
Auto Articulation
page 59 – ––
Priority
page 59 – ** – –
Rotary Speaker
page 60
Selecting
from
the panel
Reverb (Depth)
page 61
Sustain
page 63 –
3
3
53
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
To call up the Voice Condition display:
Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again. The Voice
Condition display appears.
Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) consists of five display
pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of six pages.
1
Selecting from the Voice Condition
display
Voice Condition Display
Setting and adjusting the parameters
Press the [A] – [D] buttons at the right of the display corresponding to the items or
parameters you want to change, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired
setting.
Currently selected page
54
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
3
In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including volume and reverb
send level.
Volume
Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 34 for more information.
Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section.
When the Reverb Depth setting in the Reverb display is set to the minimum, the
setting here will have no effect. See page 61 for details.
Panning
Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are
available.
Range:
L3 – C – R3
Feet
Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide
register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2'
setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. Preset is the original (factory) setting.
Voice Condition [Page 1]
Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 61)
3
55
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
Press the Page buttons to select Page 2.
Brilliance
For adjusting the tonal quality of the Voice, making it brighter or warmer. Set the
desired brilliance for each Voice over a range of “-3” (warmest) to “+3” (brightest).
Initial Touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The
harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will
become. Higher settings make the change wider. The minimum setting produces no
effect.
Range:
0 – 14
After Touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys after
playing them. The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the
brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum
setting produces no effect.
Range:
0 – 14
Touch Vibrato
Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply
vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down
the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth
cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys.
Voice Condition [Page 2]
When the Pedal Voice is selected
When the Pedal Voice is selected, the Initial
Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato values
are displayed in parentheses. Although you
cannot use these functions with the Pedal
Voices on the Pedalboard, you can use them
with the Pedal Voices on the Lower Keyboard
when you turn the To Lower function to on
(page 38).
NOTE
Initial Touch may not be
effective on some organ
Voices.
NOTE
After Touch has no effect on
percussive Voices (such as
piano or vibraphone),
percussion sounds, or some
organ Voices.
56
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
3
Press the Page buttons to select Page 3.
Vibrato
The Vibrato function varies the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and
more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some
Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.
Preset/User
Toggles between PRESET and USER.
Selecting PRESET calls up the original
(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.
When PRESET is selected, the Delay, Depth
and Speed parameters cannot be edited.
Selecting User lets you adjust the vibrato
settings for yourself.
Delay
Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start
of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset.
Range:
0 – 14
Depth
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more
pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.
Range:
0 – 14
Speed
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of the
vibrato.
Range:
0 – 14
Voice Condition [Page 3]
Vibrato Control
Delay
Speed
Depth
3
57
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
Press the Page buttons to select Page 4.
Effect
You can select the effects applied to each Voice section.
Effect Category
You can select the Effect Category applied to each Voice section.
Voice Condition [Page 4]
PRESET
The effect type that best matches and is most suited to the currently selected sound
is automatically selected.
REVERB
Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the subtle ambience
and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms.
DELAY
Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also useful for
creating rhythmic repeats in the sound.
ER/KARAOKE
The ER effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb sound,
while Karaoke recreates the deep echo effect used in Karaoke sing-along
applications.
CHORUS
Creates a warm effect as if several instances of the same sound were playing at
once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated.
FLANGER
This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but with a
brighter more resonant sound.
PHASER
Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up/down
filter sweep effect.
TREMOLO/AUTO
PAN
This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image
both front and back, and left and right.
ROTARY SPEAKER
This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates the rich,
animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn.
The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with the Left
Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). Keep in mind that the
Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by selecting it. To use the Rotary
Speaker effect, see “Rotary Speaker” on page 60.
DISTORTION
This effect adds distortion to the sound.
DISTORTION+
A combination of Distortion, Delay and Compressor effects.
AMP SIMULATOR
A simulation of a guitar amp or microphone amp.
WAH
This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound,
producing a “wah-wah” sound.
DYNAMIC
This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic range of the
sound, and has a gain control—letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus give
more “punch” to the sound.
EQ/ENHANCER
EQ: This processing tool lets you change the level for specific frequency ranges in
the sound, and affects the overall sound quality.
Enhancer: This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in the high
frequency sound range overtone—not merely making the sound brighter, but giving
it more clarity and presence.
PITCH CHANGE
Changes the pitch of the input signal.
MISCELLANEOUS
This category contains a wide range of special effects.
THRU
Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.
Effect Category
58
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
3
Effect Type
Effect types are displayed corresponding to the selected effect category.
Effect Parameters
You can set the parameters of effect type in and below. Generally, the effect
parameters settings are optimally balanced for the selected effect type, so there is no
need to follow the steps below unless you want to change the setting.
If you want to change the setting, select the parameter in
, then change the value in
. For details on each parameter type, page 64.
If you want to use the Rotary Speaker effect, set the Speed and Mode settings in the
Rotary Speaker display. See “Rotary Speaker” on page 60.
Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.
Value setting
Press the Page buttons to select Page 5.
Transpose
Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section.
Range:
-6 – +6
Tune
Determines the fine pitch settings for each Voice section, letting you create a warmer,
richer sound by slightly detuning one Voice relative to another.
Range:
-64 – +63
Reference Page
Effect List (page 64)
Voice Condition [Page 5]
Reference Page
Transpose (for entire
instrument); (page 181)
Reference Page
Pitch (for entire instrument);
(page 181)
3
59
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
Press the Page buttons to select Page 6.
In this Page, you can set whether or not the Slide function/Auto Articulation function
is applied to the Lead Voice, and how the monophonic Lead Voice 2 responds to your
polyphonic playing (with Last or Top mode).
Slide On/Off
Slide applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is
effective within a one-octave range for the Lead Voice.
Determines the on/off status of the Slide effect.
Slide Time
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the value, the
slower the speed.
Range:
0 – 14
Auto Articulation
Determines the on/off status of the Auto Articulation effect. The settings here,
available only for Super Articulation Voices, produce effects (such as pitch bend and
glissando) which are characteristic of the corresponding acoustic instrument, making
your keyboard performance more realistic. Setting this to ON will apply various
effects such as pitch bend and glissando to your keyboard performance.
Priority (only for Lead Voice 2)
Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.
• LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played
simultaneously.
• TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously.
Voice Condition [Page 6] (only for Lead Voice)
NOTE
The parameters here are not
available when a Super
Articulation Voice is
selected.
NOTE
For information about what
effect is produced by setting
Auto Articulation to ON, see
“Voice List” on pages 42. As
listed on these pages, Auto
Articulation is not available
for some Voices.
NOTE
Priority will not function when
Solo function is on.
Reference Page
About the Solo function
(page 39)
60
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
3
Rotary Speaker
1 Select “Rotary Speaker” as the effect category.
2 Set the Speed Control to on, then adjust the rotating speed and
mode of the Rotary Speaker.
Speed Control, Speed and Mode settings are specified in the Rotary Speaker
display. The Rotary Speaker display can be called up from Page 3 of the Utility
display. Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility display, then select
Page 3 by using the Page buttons. The settings in this display are common to all
Voice sections.
Speed Control
Determines the on/off setting of the Rotary Speaker mode. When this is set to on,
rotating speed of the Rotary Speaker becomes fast, and the speed can be set in “
Speed.” When set to off, the rotating speed of the Rotary Speaker becomes slow or
stops; a slow chorus effect is applied or the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops
completely). Slow or Stop can be set in “ Mode.”
Speed
Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.
Press the [B] button to select the “Speed,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz
Mode
Determines the slow/stop mode when the “Speed Control” is set to off. If Slow is
selected, a slow chorus effect is applied. If Stop is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect
turns off (stops completely).
Pressing the [C] button alternates between slow and stop.
Select “Rotary Speaker” here
Rotary Speaker Display
3
61
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the
effect in real time from the panel (in UTILITY) or conveniently from the Left
Footswitch.
3 Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left
Footswitch.
You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel (Speed Control
parameter in UTILITY, Page 3), but also by using the Left Footswitch, if the
Footswitch has been properly assigned.
See “ Rotary Speaker” on page 180 for details.
The Reverb and Sustain displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the
panel.
Reverb
Reverb adds an ambient echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a
performance in a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for the
entire system.
To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages, press one of the REVERB
buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display
appears.
The Reverb display consists of two pages.
2
Selecting from the panel
[Page 1] Reverb Display
62
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
3
Depth
Determines the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. Coarse
reverb depth settings are made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB buttons
let you make coarse adjustment over a five-step range to the reverb depth, while this
parameter gives you fine control. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the
settings in Voice Condition display, Page 1 (page 54) have no effect.
Range:
0 – 24
Type
Selects the Reverb Type for the Voice sections. Several types can be selected: Room,
Hall, Stage, and so on. After changing the reverb type, the Time parameter below is
automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type.
Time
Determines the reverb length for the Voice sections.
Higher settings result in a longer reverb sound.
Range:
0.3s – 30.0s
Type
Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment and keyboard percussion.
Time
Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment and keyboard
percussion.
Range:
0.3s – 30.0s
NOTE
Depending on the reverb
depth value (set in the
Reverb display), two
adjacent REVERB button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
Reference Page
The amount of reverb
applied to each Voice
section (page 54)
Reference Page
Changing the rhythm
volume/reverb (page 74)
Reference Page
Effect List (page 64)
[Page 2] Reverb Display
Reference Page
Effect List (page 64)
3
63
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
Sustain
The sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices, causes Voices to
gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length
settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control.
The Sustain effect is not applied to the Lead Voices.
Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain.
The SUSTAIN display appears.
Sustain On/Off
The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press the button again to
turn sustain off and the lamp turns off. When the lamp is off, sustain does not affect
the corresponding keyboard. Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps
are on or off before you start to play.
Sustain Length
The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard. Use the Page
buttons and appropriate [A] – [D] buttons to select the desired Voice section, then use
the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range:
0 – 12
Sustain Display [Page 1] Sustain Display [Page 2]
NOTE
The minimum setting results
in no sustain. Turning sustain
off automatically resets the
sustain length to the default
setting.
64
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
3
3
Effect List
EFFECT TYPE Description
REVERB
HALL 1 Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.
HALL 2
HALL 3
HALL M
HALL L
XG HALL 1
XG HALL 2
ROOM 1 Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
room.
ROOM 2
ROOM 3
ROOM 4
ROOM S
ROOM M
ROOM L
XG ROOM 1
XG ROOM 2
XG ROOM 3
STAGE 1 Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
stage. Suitable for solo instruments.
STAGE 2
XG STAGE 1
XG STAGE 2
PLATE 1 Reverb simulating the effect of a vibrating
plate reverb.
PLATE 2
XG PLATE
GM PLATE
WHITE ROOM A short reverb creating a warm ambience.
ATMO HALL A long reverb creating a wide spatial
effect.
ACOSTIC ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
room. Standard setting.
DRUMS ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
room. For drum sounds.
PERC ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
room. For percussion sounds.
TUNNEL Reverb simulating a cylindrical space
expanding to left and right.
CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which
extends without limit.
BASEMENT A reverb with a unique resonance.
DELAY
DELAY LCR Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and
C (center).
XG DLY LCR
DELAY LR Produces two delayed sounds: L and R.
ECHO Produces two independent delayed
sounds: L and R. Also capable of
producing vintage delay effects.
CROSS DELAY1 The feedback of the two delayed sounds
is crossed.
CROSS DELAY2
TEMPO DELAY1 Tempo-synchronized delay.
TEMPO DELAY2
TEMPO ECHO Tempo-synchronized echo.
TEMPO CROSS1 Tempo-synchronized cross delay.
TEMPO CROSS2
TEMPO CROSS3
TEMPO CROSS4
ER/KARAOKE
ER 1 Isolates only the early reflection
components of the reverb.
ER 2
GATE REVERB1 Creates a unique, powerful effect by
cutting short the reverberation of a deep
reverb.
GATE REVERB2
REVERS GATE Simulates gated reverb played back in
reverse.
KARAOKE 1 Echo for karaoke. Delay effect with
feedback.
KARAOKE 2
KARAOKE 3
CHORUS
CHORUS 1 Creates an effect of warmth and depth by
periodically changing the pitch.
CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 1
XG CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 3
XG CHORUS 4
GM CHORUS 1
GM CHORUS 2
GM CHORUS 3
GM CHORUS 4
FB CHORUS
CHORUS FAST
CHORUS LITE
AMB CHORUS Chorus with early reflection sound.
CELESTE 1 A deeper chorus that adds modulation
and spaciousness to the sound with a 3-
phase LFO.
CELESTE 2
CELESTE 3
CELESTE 4
AMB CELESTE Celeste effect with early reflection sound.
SYMPHONIC A chorus that adds more stages to the
modulation of Celeste.
XG SYMPHONIC
AMB SYMPHO Symphonic effect with early reflection
sound.
ENS DETUNE 1 Chorus without modulation, created by
adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.
ENS DETUNE 2
FLANGER
FLANGER 1 Creates a modulating effect or a sound
similar to that of a jet airplane.
FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 1
XG FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 3
GM FLANGER
EFFECT TYPE Description
3
65
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
V_FLANGER Simulates an analog flanger. Irregular LFO
waveforms can also be selected.
TEMP FLANGER Tempo-synchronized flanger.
DYNA FLANGER Enables the delay time of the flanger to
respond dynamically to the input level.
VIN FLANGER1 Simulates an analog flanger, with a deep
vintage sound.
VIN FLANGER2
AMB FLANGER Flanger with early reflection sound.
PHASER
PHASER 1 Periodically modulates the phase to add
modulation to the sound.
PHASER 2
PHASER 3
EP PHASER 1 Periodically modulates the phase to add
modulation to the sound. For electric
piano.
EP PHASER 2
EP PHASER 3
TEMP PHASER1 Tempo-synchronized phaser.
TEMP PHASER2
DYNA PHASER Enables the phaser modulation frequency
to respond dynamically to the input level.
VIN PHASER 1 Simulates an analog phaser, with a deep
vintage sound.
VIN PHASER 2
VIN PHSR ST1
VIN PHSR ST2
VIN PHSR ST3
VIN PHSR ST4
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
TREMOLO 1 Periodically changes the volume.
TREMOLO 2
XG TREMOLO
EP TREMOLO
GT TREMOLO 1
GT TREMOLO 2
ORG TREMOLO
VIBE VIBRATE Adds an vibrato effect, much like that of a
vibraphone.
T_TREMOLO Tempo-synchronized tremolo.
AUTO PAN Periodically moves the sound image both
left and right, and front and back.
XG AUTO PAN1
XG AUTO PAN2
EP AUTO PAN
T_AUTO PAN 1 Tempo-synchronized auto pan.
T_AUTO PAN 2
ROTARY SPEAKER
XG ROTARY SP Simulates a rotary speaker.
ROTARY SP 1
ROTARY SP 2
ROTARY SP 3
ROTARY SP 4
ROTARY SP 5
2WAY ROT SP Simulates a rotary speaker horn and rotor
by dividing them into H (high) and L (low)
bands.
EFFECT TYPE Description
DUAL ROTSP 1 More complex and textured simulation of
the independent rotation of the rotary
speaker horn and rotor. (Bright / Warm)
DUAL ROTSP 2
DUAL ROT BRT
DUAL ROT WRM
DIST+ROT SP Distortion and rotary speaker connected
in series.
ODRV+ROT SP Overdrive and rotary speaker connected
in series.
AMP+ROT SP Amp simulator and rotary speaker
connected in series.
DIST+2ROT SP Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker
connected in series.
ODRV+2ROT SP Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker
connected in series.
AMP+2ROT SP Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker
connected in series.
DISTORTION
DIST HARD 1 Distortion is an effect that adds “dirty”
and “edgy” noise/distortion to the sound.
(Hard / Soft)
DIST HARD 2
DIST SOFT 1
DIST SOFT 2
ST DIST HARD Stereo distortion. (Hard / Soft)
ST DIST SOFT
OVERDRIVE Adds mild distortion to the sound.
ST OVERDRIVE Stereo overdrive.
XG DIST Adds some “edgy” distortion to the
sound.
XG ST DIST Stereo distortion.
V_DIST HARD Simulates the sound of a vintage tube,
fuzz effect, etc.
V_DIST SOFT
COMP+DIST Since a Compressor is included in the
first stage, steady distortion can be
produced regardless of changes in input
level.
XG CMP+DIST
V_DIST WARM Simulates the sound of a vintage tube,
fuzz effect, etc. (Warm / Classic, Hard /
Classic, Soft / Metal / Crunch / Blues /
Edge / Solid / Clean / Twin / Rockabilly /
Jazz Clean / Fusion)
V_DIST CLS H
V_DIST CLS S
V_DIST METAL
V_DIST CRUNC
V_DIST BLUES
V_DIST EDGY
V_DIST SOLID
V_DIST CLN 1
V_DIST CLN 2
V_DIST TWIN
V_DIST ROCA
V_DST JZ CLN
V_DST FUSION
DISTORTION+
DIST+DELAY Distortion and Delay connected in series.
ODRV+DELAY Overdrive and Delay connected in series.
XG DIST+DLY Distortion and Delay connected in series.
XG ODRV+DLY Overdrive and Delay connected in series.
CMP+DIST+DLY Compressor, Distortion and Delay
connected in series.
CMP+ODRV+DLY Compressor, Overdrive and Delay
connected in series.
EFFECT TYPE Description
66
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
3
XG CMP+DT+DL Compressor, Distortion and Delay
connected in series.
XG CMP+OD+DL Compressor, Overdrive and Delay
connected in series.
V_DIST H+DLY V Distortion Hard and Delay connected in
series.
V_DIST S+DLY V Distortion Soft and Delay connected in
series.
DIST+T DLY Distortion and Tempo Delay connected in
series.
ODRV+T DLY Overdrive and Tempo Delay connected in
series.
CMP+DST+TDLY Compressor, Distortion and Tempo Delay
connected in series.
CMP+OD+TDLY1 Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay
connected in series.
CMP+OD+TDLY2
CMP+OD+TDLY3
CMP+OD+TDLY4
CMP+OD+TDLY5
CMP+OD+TDLY6
VDST H+TDLY1 V Distortion Hard and Tempo Delay
connected in series.
VDST H+TDLY2
VDST S+TDLY1 V Distortion Soft and Tempo Delay
connected in series.
VDST S+TDLY2
AMP SIMULATOR
AMP SIM Simulates a guitar amp.
XG AMP SIM
ST AMP SIM 1 Stereo amp simulator.
ST AMP SIM 2
ST AMP SIM 3
ST AMP SIM 4
ST AMP SIM 5
XG ST AMP
ST AMP SOLID
ST AMP CRUNC
ST AMP BLUES
ST AMP CLEAN
ST AMP HARP
SML ST DIST Stereo effect that simulates a small guitar
amp. Creates a distorted sound ideal for
electric guitar.
SML ST OVRDR
SML ST VINTG
SML ST HEAVY
B CMB CLASC British combo amp simulator with vintage
sound settings.
B CMB TOPBST British combo amp simulator with high-
end boost sound setting.
B CMB CUSTOM British combo amp simulator with
commonly used settings.
B CMB HEAVY British combo amp simulator with heavy
sound settings.
B LGND BLUES British stack amp simulator with bluesy
sound settings.
B LGND HVY 1 British stack amp simulator; heavy sound
1 settings.
B LGND HVY 2 British stack amp simulator; heavy sound
2 settings.
B LGND CLEAN British stack amp simulator with clean
sound settings.
EFFECT TYPE Description
B LGND D CLN British stack amp simulator with crunch
sound settings.
US CMB TWIN Simulates an American combo amp.
USCMB RCH CL
USCMB THN CL
USCMB CRUNCH
JZ CMB BASIC Simulates a jazz chorus combo amp.
JZ CMB WARM
US HI GN DTY Simulates the sound of an American high-
gain amp.
US HI GN RIF
US HIGN BURN
US HIGN SOLO
B LD DIRTY Simulates the sound of a British stack
amp.
B LD DRIVE
B LD GAINER
B LD HARD
WAH
AUTO WAH Creates a “wah wah” sound by
periodically modulating the center
frequency of a wah filter.
XG AUTO WAH
V_AUTO WAH Simulates analog wah, for a strongly
vintage sound. Periodically modulates the
center frequency of a wah filter.
TOUCH WAH 1 Enables you to change the wah effect
with the strength of your playing.
TOUCH WAH 2
TOUCH WAH 3
V_TOUCH WAH Simulates analog wah, for a strongly
vintage sound. Enables you to change the
wah effect with the strength of your
playing.
AT WAH+DIST Distortion can be applied to the output of
Auto Wah.
XG AT WH+DST
AT W H+ DST HD
AT W H+ DST HV
AT W H+ DST LT
AT WAH+ODRV Overdrive distortion can be applied to the
output of Auto Wah.
XG AT WAH+OD
AT WH+OD HD
AT WH+OD HV
AT W H+ OD LT
TC WAH+DIST Distortion can be applied to the output of
Touch Wah.
XG TC WH+DST
TC WH+DST HD
TC WH+DST HV
TC WH+DST LT
TC WAH+ODRV Overdrive distortion can be applied to the
output of Touch Wah.
XG TC WAH+OD
TC WAH+OD HD
TC WAH+OD HV
TC WAH+OD LT
CLAVI TC WAH Clavinet Touch Wah.
EP TOUCH WAH EP Touch Wah.
WAH+DST+TDLY Wah, Distortion and Tempo Delay
connected in series.
WAH+OD+TDLY1 Wah, Overdrive and Delay connected in
series.
WAH+OD+TDLY2
EFFECT TYPE Description
3
67
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Controls and Effects
WAH+DIST+DLY Wah, Distortion and Delay connected in
series.
XG WH+DST+DL
WAH+ODRV+DLY Wah, Overdrive and Delay connected in
series.
XG WH+OD+DLY
TEMPO AT WAH Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah.
T_A.WH+DST Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. Distortion
can be applied to the output of Auto Wah.
T_A.WH+DSTHD
T_A.WH+DSTHV
T_A.WH+DSTLT
T_A.WH+ODRV Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. Overdrive
distortion can be applied to the output of
Auto Wah.
T_A.WH+OD HD
T_A.WH+OD HV
T_A.WH+OD LT
DYNAMIC
M BAND COMP Multi-band compressor that allows you to
adjust the compression effect for three
individual frequency bands.
COMPRESSOR Holds down the output level when a
specified input level is exceeded,
reducing wide dynamic differences in
sound volume. A sense of attack can also
be added to the sound.
COMP MED Compressor with medium setting.
COMP HEAVY Compressor with heavy setting.
COMP MELODY Compressor for a melody part.
COMP BASS Compressor for a bass part.
V_COMPRESSOR Simulates the vintage sound of an analog
compressor.
NOISE GATE Removes unnecessary sound from the
original sound. Primarily used to remove
noise from the beginning and end of
distinct sounds.
EQ/ENHANCER
ST 2BAND EQ A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and
HIGH equalization.
ST 3BAND EQ A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW, MID,
and HIGH equalization.
XG 3BAND EQ A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID,
and HIGH equalization.
EQ DISCO Equalizer effect that boosts both high and
low frequencies of the audio signal, as is
typical in most disco music.
EQ TELEPHONE Equalizer effect that cuts both high and
low frequencies of the audio signal, for
simulating the sound heard through a
telephone receiver.
HM ENHANCER Adds new harmonics to the input signal to
make the sound stand out.
XG HM ENHNCE
PITCH CHANGE
PITCH CHANGE Changes the pitch of the input signal.
XG PCH CHG 1
XG PCH CHG 2
MISCELLANEOUS
AMBIENCE Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound
to add spatial width.
IMPULSE EXP Impulse expander that adds a more
metallic resonance.
RESONATOR Adds sonic resonance characteristic of
wooden body instruments.
EFFECT TYPE Description
VOICE CANCEL Attenuates the vocal part of a CD or other
source.
TALKING MOD Adds a vowel sound to the input signal.
LO-FI Degrades the audio quality of the input
signal.
DYNA FILTER Enables the filter cutoff frequency to
respond dynamically to the input level.
DYNA RINGMOD Enables the ring modulator to respond
dynamically to the input level.
RING MOD An effect that modifies the pitch by
applying amplitude modulation to the high
frequency of the input.
ISOLATOR Controls the level of a specified frequency
band of the input signal.
LOOP FX1 Degrades the audio quality of the input
signal.
LOOP FX2
LO-FI DRUM 1 Degrades the audio quality of the input
signal. Ideal for drum sounds.
LO-FI DRUM 2
LO-FI DRUM 3
LO-FI DRUM 4
DAMPER RESO Recreates the deep and broadly resonant
sound that is produced when you use the
damper pedal.
THRU
THRU Bypass without applying an effect.
EFFECT TYPE Description
68
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Hundreds rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the
front panel.
To select and play a rhythm
1 Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the
front panel.
For example, if you have pressed the [DANCE] button, the following display
(Rhythm Menu) will appear.
The Rhythm menu contains many Dance rhythms, and they will be shown in
the display.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This Electone features hundreds different real rhythms
featuring actual drum and percussion sampled
sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are
used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and
completely automatic accompaniment to match the
style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone
has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to
directly play drum and percussion sounds from the
Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard.
1
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons
Rhythm
Menu
Display
4
69
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
2 Select the Rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display by rotating the
DATA CONTROL dial.
You can also select by pressing the [A]/[D] buttons.
Here, we’ve selected “12: Dancefloor.”
3 Press the [START] button to immediately start the rhythm.
To stop the rhythm, press this button again.
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing
the buttons on the panel—and add the accompaniment to the rhythm.
4 Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume buttons.
The buttons have five volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no rhythm
sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from the
Rhythm Condition display (page 74).
Reference Page
Operating the rhythm from
the panel (page 71)
Reference Page
Accompaniment (page 79)
Reference Page
Changing the rhythm
volume/reverb (page 74)
70
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Rhythm Structure
Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a variation of the basic
rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while
you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be
selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm
automatically shifts to the Main section.
MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can
be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several
measures repeats indefinitely.
FILL IN
This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a
repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the
selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of
Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section.
BREAK
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break
section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break
pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the rhythm
automatically stops. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the
ENDING [1] – [3] buttons.
Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit
Selected Main section’s lamp is lit
Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes
The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected
Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit
71
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Operating the rhythm from the panel
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the
buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic
interest and “spice” to your performance.
To start/stop the rhythm:
START
The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm,
press the button again.
SYNCHRO START
The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts
when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the
rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the
rhythm.
INTRO
Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction
before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3]
buttons, then press the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the
rhythm.
While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to
the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a
pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:
ENDING
Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase
before stopping the rhythm. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is
playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played.
You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING
button once again, while the ending is playing.
NOTE
When you start the rhythm
with [SYNCHRO START]
button, set the Lower/Pedal
Memory to on. When
Memory is off, releasing your
fingers from Lower keyboard
stops the rhythm. For details
on Memory and the A.B.C.
function, see page 82.
NOTE
Pressing the ENDING [1]
button during playback of
the Main section will first call
up the Fill In pattern, then the
Ending 1 pattern.
72
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
To switch the rhythm sections:
You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired
MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button)
lights.
To use the Fill In patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected
MAIN/FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and
the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes.
When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The
Auto Fill In function is set in the Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. To call up
the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm
button again. Select Page 4 by using the Page buttons.
When Auto Fill is set to ON, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you
switch the Main sections. Each press of the [A] button toggles between ON and OFF.
To use the Break patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK]
button. This lets you vary a repeating rhythm with dynamic breaks.
NOTE
You can record the currently
selected section to
Registration Memory.
However, you cannot record
the on/off status of the Auto
Fill In function.
73
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Adjusting the tempo
You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons.
TEMPO buttons
For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button increases the tempo
and pressing the left button decreases it.
Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons
simultaneously to restore the tempo to the original setting.
Tempo Indicator (Bar/Beat Indicator)
Tempo indicator shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per
minute.
The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.
When the rhythm begins playing, the Tempo indicator changes function to a Bar/
Beat indicator.
Tempo
Bar/Beat
Lights up at the first beat in the bar
during the playback of the Rhythm.
Bar (measure) Beat
74
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb
You can adjust the rhythm volume or amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and
the percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. You
can also have a Fill In play automatically by setting the Auto Fill function to ON in
Display Page 4.
To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the
same rhythm button again.
The buttons at the right side of the display and DATA CONTROL dial are used to
control the rhythm volume and reverb.
Percussion Volume
Fine adjustment of the rhythm percussion volume. Same as the panel Rhythm
Volume buttons.
Press the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Percussion Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm percussion.
When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting
here will have no effect.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
[Page 1] Rhythm Condition Display
Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 61)
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set in the display), two
adjacent Volume button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
Reference Page
Adjusting the volume and
amount of reverb applied to
the Accompaniment:
(page 81)
75
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1
or 2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that
have been created with this Electone or other models equipped with the Rhythm
Pattern Program function (such as the ELS series). For details on selecting original
User rhythms, see next page.
This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from the same category to be
selected from different buttons; one from the original Rhythm button, and the others
from the User buttons.
For example, to call up “25: Modern Shuffle,” select the R&B category.
1 Press User button [1] at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
The rhythm category appears at the upper right of the display.
2 Select one of the Pages (categories) with the Page buttons.
In this case, select Page “R&B.”
2
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons
Metronome
When you want to use the
Metronome, select the
“METRONOME” Page.
Currently selected Page
76
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
3 Select the “25: Modern Shuffle” rhythm with the DATA CONTROL
dial.
This step assigns “25: Modern Shuffle” to the User button [1]. You can call up the
“25: Modern Shuffle” the next time you press the [1] button.
To call up a User rhythm
User rhythms created on other Electones that have Rhythm Pattern Programming
functions, such as the ELS series, can be selected and played from the User buttons
in the panel Rhythm section.
To call up the User rhythm, load back the registration containing the User rhythm to
Electone in advance.
For details on loading back the Registration, see “Recalling Recorded Registrations”
on page 154 and “Playing Back a Song” on page 155.
This procedure assigns the User rhythms to the User numbers 1 – 48.
1 Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
2 Use the Page buttons to select Page “USER RHYTHM.”
3 Select the User rhythm number (User 1-48) by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial.
77
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone.
3
Rhythm List
MARCH
01 Simple March *1
02 Simple 6/8 March *1
03 Marching Band 1
04 Marching Band 2 *1
05 Marching Band 3
06 German March
07 6/8 March
08 6/8 Kids
09 Orchestral March
10 Anime Fantasy
11 Galaxy Ship
12 SF March 1
13 SF March 2
14 Blockbuster
15 Broadway *1
16 Showtune
17 Wild West
18 Pop Classics *1
19 French 50s
20 6/8 Organ March *2
21 Pub Piano
22 Baroque *2
23 Baroque Concerto *2
24 Strings Concerto *2
25 Choral Symphony *2
26 Brass Band Hymn *2
WALTZ
01 Waltz *1
02 Orchestral Waltz
03 Vienna Waltz 1
04 Vienna Waltz 2
05 Gentle Waltz
06 Classic Waltz
07 Jazz Waltz 1
08 Jazz Waltz 2
09 Jazz Waltz 3
10 JazzWaltz Medium
11 Jazz Waltz Fast
12 Mariachi
13 Snow Waltz
14 Vocal Waltz
15 Musette
16 Movie Soundtrack
17 Choir Soundtrack
18 Romantic Waltz *2
19 Classical Menuet *2
20 Green Fantasia *1
*2
21 Guitar Serenade *1
*2
SWING&JAZZ
01 Simple Big Band *1
02 Simple ComboJazz *1
03 Big Band 1
04 Big Band 2
05 Big Band 3
06 Orch Big Band 1
07 Orch Big Band 2
08 Big Band Jazz
09 Big Band Fast
10 Big Band Bop
11 Movie Panther
12 Jungle Drum
13 Medium Jazz 1
14 Medium Jazz 2
15 Acoustic Jazz 1
16 Acoustic Jazz 2
17 Combo Swing
18 InstrumentalJazz
19 Manhattan Swing
20 Five-Four
21 Trad Piano Jazz
22 Jazz Ballad 1
23 Jazz Ballad 2
24 Moonlight
25 Winter Song
26 ChristmasShuffle
27 ChristmasBallad
28 Movie Swing
29 Afro Cuban 1
30 Afro Cuban 2
31 Foxtrot
32 Slowfox
33 Dixieland
34 Dixieland Jazz 1
35 Dixieland Jazz 2 *2
36 Ragtime
37 Charleston
38 Orchestra Swing
39 Tap Dance Swing
40 Organ Groove
POPS
01 Simple 8Beat Pop *1
02 Simple 3/4 Pop *1
03 SimpleShufflePop *1
04 8Beat Light 1
05 8Beat Light 2
06 16Beat
07 British 16Beat
08 Guitar Pop
09 Classic 16Beat
10 Fusion Shuffle
11 Folk Rock
12 Easy Pop
13 Chart Guitar Pop *1
14 Jazz Pop
15 British Pop
16 Pop Shuffle
17 Unplugged 1 *1
18 Unplugged 2
19 Unplugged 3
20 JPN Pop Shuffle
21 JPN Idol Hits
22 JPN 70s Anime
23 JPN Soundtrack
24 Cute Pop
25 The 3rd Funk
26 Sunset DECA
27 US 70s TV Theme
28 Asian Pops
29 Scand Shuffle
30 60s Vintage Pop
31 60s Chart Swing
32 Bubblegum Pop
33 70s ChartCountry *1
34 Euro Pop Organ
35 Euro Fox
36 Euro Pop
R&B
01 Simple Funk *1
02 Simple R&B Balad *1
03 Simple R&B Shfl *1
04 Soul
05 16Beat Soul 1
06 16Beat Soul 2
07 Frankly Soul
08 Live Soul Band
09 Soul Swing
10 6/8 Soul
11 Gospel Sisters
12 Hollywood Gospel
13 Gospel Party
14 New Gospel
15 Gospel Shuffle
16 Jazz Funk
17 Kool Funk
18 Let's Funk
19 Motor City
20 Detroit Pop
21 Blueberry Blues
22 Blues Shuffle 1 *1
23 Blues Shuffle 2
24 Lovely Shuffle
25 Modern Shuffle
26 Cool R&B
27 Modern R&B
28 Soul R&B
29 Worship Fast
LATIN
01 Simple BossaNova *1
02 Simple Samba *1
03 Simple Mambo *1
04 Simple Rumba *1
05 Bossa Nova 1
06 Bossa Nova 2
07 Pop Bossa 1
08 Pop Bossa 2
09 Bossa Brazil
10 Lounge Bossa
11 Big Band Samba
12 Light Samba
13 Jazz Samba
14 Mambo 1
15 Mambo 2
16 Rumba
17 Rumba Flamenco
18 Cha Cha Cha
19 Big Band Cha Cha
20 Pop Cha Cha 1
21 Pop Cha Cha 2
*1 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on.
*2 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on.
78
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
22 Salsa
23 Montuno
24 Calypso
25 Danzon
26 Bomba
27 Pop Latin *1
28 Beguine
29 Tango 1
30 Tango 2
31 Italian Tango
32 Guitar Rumba
WORLD MUSIC
01 Bolero
02 Flamenco
03 Pop Flamenco *1
04 Pasodoble
05 Tarantella
06 Sirtaki
07 Hawaiian
08 Mexican Dance *2
09 Enka
10 Polka 1
11 Polka 2
12 Banda Polka *2
13 Zither Polka
14 Party Polka
15 Euro Polka
16 Irish Dance
17 Irish Hymn *1
18 Celtic Dance
19 Celtic Dance 3/4
20 Celtic Christmas
21 Sheriff Reggae 1
22 Sheriff Reggae 2
23 Caribbean
24 Zouk
25 Hoedown 1 *2
26 Hoedown 2
27 Bluegrass
28 ChinaPopBallad 1 *1
29 ChinaPopBallad 2
30 China Dance
31 China Trad 1
32 China Trad 2 *1
33 Kung Fu
34 Ethereal Voices *1
*2
BALLAD
01 Simple 8BtBallad *1
02 SimpleRockBallad *1
03 Acoustic8BtBalad *1
04 8Beat Modern
05 16Beat Ballad 1
06 16Beat Ballad 2
07 6/8 Slow Rock
08 Schlager 6/8
09 Big Rock Ballad
10 90s Rock Ballad
11 Power Ballad
12 Easy Ballad
13 Love Song
14 Dramatic Ballad *2
15 Animation Ballad
16 70s Cool Ballad
17 70s Pop Duo
18 70s Glam Piano
19 Movie Ballad
20 80s Movie Ballad
21 BigScreenClassic
22 Chart Ballad
23 Analog Ballad
24 Slow & Easy
25 Chillout *1
26 Easy Country
27 JPN Romantic Bld
28 JPN Folk Pop Duo
29 JPN Dance Ballad *1
30 JPN R&B Ballad
31 JPN TVSoundtrack *1
32 Night Walk *1
*2
33 Organ Ballad 1
34 Organ Ballad 2
35 Guitar Ballad
36 Pop GuitarBallad
37 ElecPiano Ballad
38 Pop Piano Ballad *1
ROCK
01 Simple Rock *1
02 Simple Shfl Rock *1
03 Hard Rock 1
04 Hard Rock 2
05 Tears Rock 1
06 Tears Rock 2
07 British Rock *1
08 Power Rock
09 Stadium Rock
10 ContemporaryRock
11 Standard Rock
12 Acoustic Rock
13 Brit Rock Pop
14 Funk Pop Rock
15 ChartRockShuffle
16 Chart Piano Shfl
17 Beach Rock
18 Surf Rock
19 60s Rock
20 70s Rock
21 80s Power Rock
22 80s Pop Rock
23 80s Guitar Pop
24 00s Boy Band
25 Rock Shuffle
26 Rock & Roll
27 6/8 Rock
28 60s Rock & Roll
29 Jive
30 Swingin' Boogie
31 Southern Rock
32 New Country *1
33 Country Strum
34 Disco Fox Rock *1
35 JPN Pop Rock 1
36 JPN Pop Rock 2
37 JPN Band Rock 1
38 JPN Band Rock 2
39 JPN Light Rock 1
40 JPN Light Rock 2
41 JPN Rock Duo
42 JPN Idol Rock
43 JPN Kids Hero
44 Dragon Rock
45 Miracle Rock *1
46 Pretty Cute
47 Happy Pop
DANCE
01 Simple Dance Pop *1
02 Simple Disco *1
03 Ibiza 1
04 Ibiza 2 *2
05 Trance Pop
06 Euro Trance 1
07 Euro Trance 2 *1
08 6/8 Trance 1
09 6/8 Trance 2
10 Club Dance 1 *1
11 Club Dance 2
12 Dancefloor *1
13 Techno Party
14 80s Dance
15 Swing House
16 Dirty Pop
17 Mallorca Party *1
18 Disco Fox
19 Disco Philly
20 Disco Teens 1 *1
21 Disco Teens 2
22 Disco Chocolate
23 Saturday Night
24 90s Disco
25 70s Disco 1
26 70s Disco 2
27 Chart Pop
28 Ground Beat
29 Synth Pop
30 UK Pop
31 Turkish Eurobeat *1
32 Oriental Pop
33 Pop Beat
34 Garage 1
35 Garage 2
36 Electronica
37 Club Latin
38 Latin Disco
39 US Hip Hop
40 Hip Hop Pop
41 JPN Idol Pop 1
42 JPN Idol Pop 2
43 JPN Idol Pop 3
44 JPN Dance Pop 1
45 JPN Dance Pop 2
46 Cute Techno
47 Dance Police
METRONOME
01 Metronome 2/4 *1
02 Metronome 3/4 *1
03 Metronome 4/4 *1
04 Metronome 6/8 *1
05 Metronome 9/8 *1
06 Metronome 12/8 *1
07 Metronome 5/4 *1
08 Metronome 7/4 *1
09 Metronome 8/4 *1
10 Wood Block 2/4 *1
11 Wood Block 3/4 *1
12 Wood Block 4/4 *1
13 Wood Block 6/8 *1
14 Wood Block 9/8 *1
15 Wood Block 12/8 *1
16 Wood Block 5/4 *1
17 Wood Block 7/4 *1
18 Wood Block 8/4 *1
*1 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on.
*2 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on.
79
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental
embellishments when rhythms are used.
To use the accompaniment parts, you’ll need to make appropriate settings in the
Rhythm Condition display.
1 Select the desired rhythm and press the same button on the panel
again.
The Rhythm Condition display appears.
2 Turn the desired parts on.
Use the Page buttons to select Page 2 or Page 3, then make settings for each
part.
Pressing one of the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the desired
accompaniment parts successively alternates between ON and OFF.
Each rhythm consists of seven parts, and you can visually confirm the On/Off
status for all parts in Page 2 and Page 3 of the Rhythm Condition display. These
parts, with the exception of the Main Drum and Add Drum, are
Accompaniment parts.
The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,
and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing
corresponding button. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does
not sound.
4
Accompaniment
Rhythm Condition Display
Page 2
Accompaniment parts
Page 3
80
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Chord 1/Chord 2
These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.
Pad
This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds, such as strings
and organ.
Phrase 1/Phrase 2
These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such
as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty
depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.
3 Press the [START] button to start the rhythm, and then play the
Lower Keyboard.
Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.
When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do
not sound.
Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add Drum has
additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.
81
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
To adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the
Accompaniment:
Make settings in Page 1 of the Rhythm Condition display.
1 Select the desired rhythm and then press the same rhythm button
on the panel again.
The Rhythm Condition display appears.
2 Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
Determine the reverb and volume settings.
Accompaniment Volume
Determines the accompaniment volume.
Press the [C] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Accompaniment Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to accompaniment. When the Reverb Depth
(for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
Press the [D] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
Rhythm Condition display
(page 74)
[Page 1]
Rhythm Condition Display
Reference Page
Accompaniment (page 79)
Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 61)
82
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the
Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an
entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing
band at your disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic
Accompaniment patterns. You can select the desired mode in the A.B.C./M.O.C.
display.
To set the A.B.C. function:
1 Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears.
2 Press the [A] button to select the “ABC MODE,” then select the
desired mode by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.
A.B.C. Mode
You can select modes in sequence: OFF SINGLE FINGER FINGERED
CHORD CUSTOM ABC by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.
Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse
order.
When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, set Lower/
Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower
keyboard or Pedalboard stops the rhythm. For details, see “Memory” on
page 84.
5
Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass
Chord (A.B.C.)
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display
OFF
SINGLE FINGER
FINGERED CHORD
CUSTOM ABC
83
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Off
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.
Single Finger
You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at
most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The Single Finger mode provides the
fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. The chord
produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower
keyboard.
Key of C
Major chords:
Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the
chord’s name).
Minor chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the
left of it.
7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the
left of it.
Minor 7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any
white key to the left of it.
Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
Fingered Chord
The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords
played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in
the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the
Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play
only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the
basis of the previously played chord.
Key of C
Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
Custom A.B.C.
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode.
It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by
playing notes on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
NOTE
When the A.B.C. function
mode is set to Single Finger
or Fingered Chord, the bass
part will not sound even if
you play the pedals of the
Pedalboard.
NOTE
When playing certain chords
(aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and
m6), make sure that the
lowest note you play is the
root of the chord.
C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7
CaugCm maj7 Cdim Cdim7 Csus4
Cm7-5C7sus4 C6 Cm6 Cadd9
84
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Memory
The Memory function is a convenient performance tool in the A.B.C. features that
makes playing with the accompaniment even smoother and more fluid. It is available
separately for both the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. To use it, turn Memory on,
start the rhythm and play chords and bass notes according to the selected A.B.C.
mode. With Memory on, the accompaniment continues to play, even when you
release your fingers (and foot). When you want to change to the next chord, simply
play it and release it, and the auto accompaniment keeps playing with the new chord
and bass note. This means that you can play a chord/bass note briefly, release it, and
take your time before playing the next—you don’t have to hold a chord down to keep
the accompaniment going.
When A.B.C. is turned off (but Memory is on), the auto accompaniment of the
rhythmic chords and bass pattern do not sound, but the sound of the Lower
keyboard and/or Pedalboard continues until you play the next chord/bass note.
Lower Memory
When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep
playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the
rhythm plays.
Successive pressing of the [B] button alternates between ON and OFF.
Pedal Memory
When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing
even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays.
Successive pressing of the [C] button alternates between ON and OFF.
(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass
accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your
fingers from the Lower keyboard.
85
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the
melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords
you play on the Lower keyboard—or from the chords that are played for you, if you
use Automatic Accompaniment.
To set the M.O.C. function:
1 Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears.
2 Turn the M.O.C. on.
Successive pressing of the [D] button alternates between ON and OFF.
ON:
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.
OFF:
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.
Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s
volume is set to the appropriate value.
Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voice.
6
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display
86
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Rhythm Sequence
Rhythm Sequence lets you create your own rhythm compositions, connecting together
any of the Electone’s existing rhythms as well as original rhythms created on other
Electones that have the Rhythm Sequence Program function (such as the ELS series).
Although this Electone does not have the full Rhythm Sequence Program function, you
can load four rhythm compositions to Sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons on
the panel for future recall, using the steps below.
When the rhythm sequence contains Registration Sequence data or Next Unit data, these
data types also can be loaded and played on this Electone.
While a rhythm is playing, sequence data in the Registration data cannot be loaded.
1 Insert the USB flash drive that contains the desired rhythm
sequence data into the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button and select the desired Song which
contains the Registration data you want to load back to
Electone.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
This is necessary because the rhythm sequence data is stored as part of the
registration data in the Song (page 147).
3 Load back the desired registration.
If the desired registration is in Unit 1, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button in
the MDR section to load back the Unit 1 registrations. If the desired
registration is in a Unit other than 1, specify the Unit number then load
back the Unit.
Now the rhythm sequence data has been loaded to Sequence numbers
[SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons.
Reference Page
What is a Song? (page 134)
Reference Page
Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 154)
87
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
4 Press the desired sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons
to turn them on (the respective lamps light).
5 Press the [START] button in the Rhythm section to play back
the rhythm sequence.
Only those sequences set to on can be played. Two or more rhythm
sequences can be played back in succession in numeric order. The SEQ.
lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is finished playing.
NOTE
Sequence numbers
[SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons
can be turned on at the
same time.
88
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
The Keyboard Percussion function provides many different drum and percussion
sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two
different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset
drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the
User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal
you wish.
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion
1 Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
2 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] button. Press the [1] button to play
Percussion sounds on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and press the
[2] button for the Pedalboard.
The Keyboard Percussion (KBP) display appears.
Pressing the Keyboard Percussion [1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the
Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the
Pedalboard.
3 Select the desired percussion kit.
You can select a kit from a total of 22 different kits.
Press the [B] button to select “KIT,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the kit.
7
Keyboard Percussion
NOTE
On/Off status of the Voices
(page 31)
NOTE
Two Keyboard Percussion
sets, [1] and [2], can be
played at the same time by
setting both buttons to on.
KBP Display
89
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
4 Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the “Preset Keyboard
Percussion List” on page 90.
Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb
Volume
Determines the Keyboard Percussion volume.
Press the [C] button to select “VOLUME,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.
When the Reverb depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting
here will have no effect.
Press the [D] button to select “REVERB,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
Recalling the User Keyboard
Percussion (page 104)
NOTE
The Keyboard Percussion
volume and reverb settings
made here are commonly
applied to both Keyboard
Percussion 1 and 2.
Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 61)
90
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
Indicates the drum/percussion sounds and their key assignments.
Wonderland Kit EL Kit
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
Laser Beam Thunder – Bass Drum Heavy
Laser Shot Horse – SD Brush Roll
Water Phone Bass Drum – Snare Drum Heavy
Bubble Footstep Claves SD Brush Shot 1
Puddle Snare – SD Reverb 1
Thunder Snare Roll – Snare Drum Light
Shower Footstep Synth Tom 3 To m 3
Beach Lion Concert BD Snare Drum Rim 1
Stream Footstep Synth Tom 2 To m 2
Footstep Oxen Bass Drum Heavy Hi-Hat Closed
Door Squeak Footstep Synth Tom 1 To m 1
Door Slam Door Slam Bass Drum Light Hi-Hat Open
Bass Drum Bass Drum Big Clock – Snare Drum Heavy Ride Cymbal 1
Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Footstep – SD Brush Roll Synth Tom 3
To m 2 Tom 2 Starship – Snare Drum Heavy Crash Cymbal 1
To m 1 To m 1 Footstep – SD Brush Shot 1 Synth Tom 2
Snare Snare Train – SD Reverb 1 Orchestra Cymbal
Snare Roll Snare Roll Car Crash – Snare Drum Light –
Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Footstep – Tom 3 Synth Tom 1
Cymbal Cymbal Puddle – Snare Drum Rim 1 –
Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open – Tom 2
Tambourine Tambourine – Hi-Hat Closed
Finger Snap Finger Snap – Tom 1
Castanet Castanet – Hi-Hat Open
Triangle Mute Triangle Mute – Ride Cymbal 1
Wood Block L Wood Block L – Orch Snare Drum
Triangle Open Triangle Open – Crash Cymbal 1
Wood Block H Wood Block H – Snare Drum Roll
Hand Clap Hand Clap – Orchestra Cymbal
Jingle Bells Jingle Bells – Orch Cymbal Roll
Bell Tree Bell Tree – Triangle Mute
Alarm Bell Alarm Bell – Tambourine
Trai n Tra in – Triangle Open
Horn 1 Horn 1 – Castanet
Horn 2 Horn 2 – Cowbell 1
Siren Siren – Timbale 1 Low
CarEngn Ignition CarEngn Ignition – Timbale 1 High
Car Crash Car Crash – Wood Block Low
Helicopter Helicopter – Conga Low
Starship Starship – Wood Block High
Sheep Sheep – Conga High
Goat Goat – Bongo Low
Oxen Oxen – Agogo Low
Whinny Whinny – Bongo High
Horse Horse – Agogo High
Lion Lion – Cuica Low
Dog Dog – Hand Claps
Cat Cat – Cuica High
Hen Hen – Shaker
Owl –
Insects –
Frog –
Tweet 1 –
Tweet 2 –
Cuckoo Clock –
Big Clock –
Bell –
Te le ph o ne –
Camera –
Gnaw –
Applause –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
91
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Kick – Kick Short
Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute Side Stick Light
Surdo Open Snare Surdo Open Snare Short
Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap
Whip Slap Snare Tight Whip Slap Snare Tight H
Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H Floor Tom L
Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed
Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap Floor Tom H
Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal
Metronome Click Low Tom Metronome Click Low Tom
Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open
Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L Mid Tom L
– Seq Click H Mid Tom H – Seq Click H Mid Tom H
– Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1 – Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1
– Brush Swirl High Tom – Brush Swirl High Tom
– Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1 – Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1
– Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal – Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal
– Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup – Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup
– Castanet Ta mb o urine – Castanet Tambourine
– Snare Soft Splash Cymbal – Snare Soft 2 Splash Cymbal
– Sticks – Sticks
– Kick Soft – Kick Soft
– Open Rim Shot – Open Rim Shot H
– Kick Tight – Kick Tight
Bongo H Kick Bongo H Kick Short
Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L Side Stick Light
Conga H Mute Snare Conga H Mute Snare Short
Conga H Open Hand Clap Conga H Open Hand Clap
Conga L Snare Tight Conga L Snare Tight H
Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H Floor Tom L
Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed
Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H Floor Tom H
Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal
Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa Low Tom
Maracas Hi-Hat Open Maracas Hi-Hat Open
Samba Whistle H Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H Mid Tom L
Samba Whistle L Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L Mid Tom H
Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1
Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long High Tom
Claves Ride Cymbal 1 Claves Ride Cymbal 1
Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal
Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup
Cuica Mute Tambourine Cuica Mute Tambourine
Cuica Open Splash Cymbal Cuica Open Splash Cymbal
Triangle Mute Cowbell Triangle Mute Cowbell
Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2
Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap
Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2
Bell Tree – Bell Tree –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
92
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Hit Kit Room Kit
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Kick Tight H – Kick
Surdo Mute Stick Ambient Surdo Mute Side Stick
Surdo Open Snare Ambient Surdo Open Snare Snappy
Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap
Whip Slap Snare Tight 2 Whip Slap Snare Tight Snap
Scratch H Hybrid Tom 1 Scratch H Tom R o om 1
Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed 2 Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed
Finger Snap Hybrid Tom 2 Finger Snap To m Ro o m 2
Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal
Metronome Click Hybrid Tom 3 Metronome Click Tom R oo m 3
Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open 2 Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open
Seq Click L Hybrid Tom 4 Seq Click L To m R o o m 4
– Seq Click H Hybrid Tom 5 – Seq Click H To m Ro o m 5
– Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1 – Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1
– Brush Swirl Hybrid Tom 6 – Brush Swirl Tom R o o m 6
– Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1 – Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1
– Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal – Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal
– Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup – Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup
– Castanet Tambourine Light – Castanet Tambourine
– Snare Electro Splash Cymbal – Snare Soft Splash Cymbal
– Sticks – Sticks
– Kick Tight L – Kick Soft
– Snare Pitched – Open Rim Shot
– Kick Wet – Kick Tight
Bongo H Kick Tight H Bongo H Kick
Bongo L Stick Ambient Bongo L Side Stick
Conga H Mute Snare Ambient Conga H Mute Snare Snappy
Conga H Open Hand Clap Conga H Open Hand Clap
Conga L Snare Tight 2 Conga L Snare Tight Snap
Timbale H Hybrid Tom 1 Timbale H To m R o o m 1
Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed 2 Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed
Agogo H Hybrid Tom 2 Agogo H Tom R oo m 2
Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal
Cabasa Hybrid Tom 3 Cabasa To m Ro om 3
Maracas Hi-Hat Open 2 Maracas Hi-Hat Open
Samba Whistle H Hybrid Tom 4 Samba Whistle H Tom Ro om 4
Samba Whistle L Hybrid Tom 5 Samba Whistle L Tom Ro om 5
Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1
Guiro Long Hybrid Tom 6 Guiro Long Tom R oo m 6
Claves Ride Cymbal 1 Claves Ride Cymbal 1
Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal
Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup
Cuica Mute Tambourine Light Cuica Mute Tambourine
Cuica Open Splash Cymbal Cuica Open Splash Cymbal
Triangle Mute Cowbell Triangle Mute Cowbell
Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2
Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap
Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2
Bell Tree – Bell Tree –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
93
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Rock Kit Electro Kit
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Kick Gate – Kick Gate Heavy
Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute Side Stick
Surdo Open Snare Rock Surdo Open Snare Noisy 2
Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap
Whip Slap Snare Rock Tight Whip Slap Snare Noisy 3
Scratch H To m R o ck 1 Scratch H Tom Electro 1
Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed
Finger Snap Tom R o c k 2 Finger Snap Tom Electro 2
Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal
Metronome Click Tom Ro ck 3 Metronome Click Tom Electro 3
Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open
Seq Click L To m R o ck 4 Seq Click L Tom Electro 4
– Seq Click H To m R oc k 5 – Seq Click H Tom Electro 5
– Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1 – Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1
– Brush Swirl Tom Ro c k 6 – Brush Swirl Tom Electro 6
– Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1 – Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1
– Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal – Reverse Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
– Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup – Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup
– Castanet Ta mb o urine – Hi Q 2 Tambourine
– Snare Noisy Splash Cymbal – Snare Snap Elec Splash Cymbal
– Sticks – Sticks
– Kick Soft – Kick 3
– Open Rim Shot – Open Rim Shot
– Kick 2 – Kick Gate
Bongo H Kick Gate Bongo H Kick Gate Heavy
Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L Side Stick
Conga H Mute Snare Rock Conga H Mute Snare Noisy 2
Conga H Open Hand Clap Conga H Open Hand Clap
Conga L Snare Rock Tight Conga L Snare Noisy 3
Timbale H To m R oc k 1 Timbale H Tom Electro 1
Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed
Agogo H Tom Ro ck 2 Agogo H Tom Electro 2
Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal
Cabasa Tom Ro c k 3 Cabasa Tom Electro 3
Maracas Hi-Hat Open Maracas Hi-Hat Open
Samba Whistle H To m R o c k 4 Samba Whistle H Tom Electro 4
Samba Whistle L Tom Ro c k 5 Samba Whistle L Tom Electro 5
Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1
Guiro Long Tom Ro ck 6 Guiro Long Tom Electro 6
Claves Ride Cymbal 1 Claves Ride Cymbal 1
Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal
Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup
Cuica Mute Tambourine Scratch H 2 Tambourine
Cuica Open Splash Cymbal Scratch L 2 Splash Cymbal
Triangle Mute Cowbell Triangle Mute Cowbell
Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2
Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap
Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2
Bell Tree – Bell Tree –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
94
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Analog Kit Dance Kit
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Kick Analog – Kick Techno
Surdo Mute Side Stick Anlg Kick Dance 1 Side Stick Anlg
Surdo Open Snare Analog Kick Dance 2 Snare Clap
Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q Dance Clap
Whip Slap Snare Analog 2 Whip Slap Snare Dry
Scratch H Tom Analog 1 Scratch Dance 1 Tom Dance 1
Scratch L Hat Close Analog Scratch Dance 2 Hi-Hat Closed 3
Finger Snap Tom Analog 2 Finger Snap Tom Dance 2
Click Noise Hat Close Anlg 2 Click Noise Hat Close Anlg 3
Metronome Click Tom Analog 3 Dance Perc 1 Tom Dance 3
Metronome Bell Hat Open Analog Reverse Dance 1 Hi-Hat Open 3
Seq Click L Tom Analog 4 Dance Perc 2 Tom Dance 4
– Seq Click H Tom Analog 5 – Hi Q Dance 1 Tom Dance 5
– Brush Tap Crash Analog – Snare Analog 3 Crash Analog
– Brush Swirl Tom Analog 6 – Vinyl Noise Tom Dance 6
– Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1 – Snare Analog 4 Ride Cymbal 1
– Reverse Cymbal Chinese Cymbal – Reverse Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
– Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup – Reverse Dance 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
– Hi Q 2 Ta mb o urin e – Hi Q 2 Tambourine Anlg
– Snare Noisy 4 Splash Cymbal – Snare Techno Splash Cymbal
– Sticks – Snare Dance 1
– Kick 3 – Kick Techno Q
– Open Rim Shot – Rim Gate
– Kick Anlg Short – Kick Techno L
Bongo H Kick Analog Bongo Analog H Kick Techno
Bongo L Side Stick Anlg Bongo Analog L Side Stick Anlg
Conga Analog H Snare Analog Conga Analog H Snare Clap
Conga Analog M Hand Clap Conga Analog M Dance Clap
Conga Analog L Snare Analog 2 Conga Analog L Snare Dry
Timbale H To m A na l o g 1 Timbale H Tom Dance 1
Timbale L Hat Close Analog Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed 3
Agogo H Tom An al og 2 Agogo H Tom Dance 2
Agogo L Hat Close Anlg 2 Agogo L Hat Close Anlg 3
Cabasa Tom An a l og 3 Cabasa Tom Dance 3
Maracas 2 Hat Open Analog Maracas 2 Hi-Hat Open 3
Samba Whistle H To m A n a lo g 4 Samba Whistle H Tom Dance 4
Samba Whistle L Tom An a lo g 5 Samba Whistle L Tom Dance 5
Guiro Short Crash Analog Guiro Short Crash Analog
Guiro Long Tom An al og 6 Guiro Long Tom Dance 6
Claves 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Claves 2 Ride Cymbal 1
Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal Dance Perc 3 Chinese Cymbal
Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup Dance Perc 4 Ride Cymbal Cup
Scratch H 2 Tambourine Dance Breath 1 Tambourine Anlg
Scratch L 2 Splash Cymbal Dance Breath 2 Splash Cymbal
Triangle Mute Cowbell Analog Triangle Mute Cowbell Dance
Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2
Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Analog
Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells Ride Analog
Bell Tree – Bell Tree –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
95
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Jazz Kit Brush Kit
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Kick Jazz – Kick Jazz
Surdo Mute Side Stick Light Surdo Mute Side Stick Light
Surdo Open Snare Jazz L Surdo Open Brush Slap 3
Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap
Whip Slap Snare Jazz M Whip Slap Brush Tap 2
Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H Tom Brush 1
Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed
Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap Tom Brush 2
Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal
Metronome Click Low Tom Metronome Click Tom Brush 3
Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open
Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L Tom Brush 4
– Seq Click H Mid Tom H – Seq Click H Tom Brush 5
– Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1 – Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1
– Brush Swirl High Tom – Brush Swirl Tom Brush 6
– Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1 – Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1
– Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal – Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal
– Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup – Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup
– Castanet Ta mb o urine – Castanet Tambourine
– Snare Jazz H Splash Cymbal – Brush Slap 2 Splash Cymbal
– Sticks – Sticks
– Kick Soft – Kick Soft
– Open Rim Shot – Open Rim Shot
– Kick Tight – Kick Tight
Bongo H Kick Jazz Bongo H Kick Jazz
Bongo L Side Stick Light Bongo L Side Stick Light
Conga H Mute Snare Jazz L Conga H Mute Brush Slap 3
Conga H Open Hand Clap Conga H Open Hand Clap
Conga L Snare Jazz M Conga L Brush Tap 2
Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H To m B ru sh 1
Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed
Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H To m B ru sh 2
Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal
Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa Tom Br us h 3
Maracas Hi-Hat Open Maracas Hi-Hat Open
Samba Whistle H Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H To m B ru sh 4
Samba Whistle L Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L Tom B ru sh 5
Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1
Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long Tom Br us h 6
Claves Ride Cymbal 1 Claves Ride Cymbal 1
Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal
Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup
Cuica Mute Tambourine Cuica Mute Tambourine
Cuica Open Splash Cymbal Cuica Open Splash Cymbal
Triangle Mute Cowbell Triangle Mute Cowbell
Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2
Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap
Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2
Bell Tree – Bell Tree –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
96
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Symphony Kit Live! Studio Kit
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Gran Cassa Mute – Kick Studio
Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute Side Stick
Surdo Open Band Snare Surdo Open Snare Studio M
Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap
Whip Slap Band Snare 2 Whip Slap Snare Studio L
Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H Floor Tom L
Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L Hi-Hat Closed
Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap Floor Tom H
Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise Hi-Hat Pedal
Metronome Click Low Tom Metronome Click Low Tom
Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell Hi-Hat Open
Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L Mid Tom L
– Seq Click H Mid Tom H – Seq Click H Mid Tom H
– Brush Tap Hand Cymbal – Brush Tap Crash Cymbal 1
– Brush Swirl High Tom – Brush Swirl High Tom
– Brush Slap Hand Cymbal S – Brush Slap Ride Cymbal 1
– Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal – Brush Tap Swirl Chinese Cymbal
– Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup – Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup
– Castanet Ta mb o urine – Castanet Tambourine
– Snare Soft Splash Cymbal – Snare Studio 2 Splash Cymbal
– Sticks – Sticks
– Kick Soft 2 – Kick Ambience H
– Open Rim Shot – Open Rim Shot
– Gran Cassa – Kick Ambience L
Bongo H Gran Cassa Mute Bongo H Kick Studio
Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L Side Stick
Conga H Mute Band Snare Conga H Mute Snare Studio M
Conga H Open Hand Clap Conga H Open Hand Clap
Conga L Band Snare 2 Conga L Snare Studio L
Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H Floor Tom L
Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed
Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H Floor Tom H
Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal
Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa Low Tom
Maracas Hi-Hat Open Maracas Hi-Hat Open
Samba Whistle H Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H Mid Tom L
Samba Whistle L Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L Mid Tom H
Guiro Short Hand Cymbal Guiro Short Crash Cymbal 1
Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long High Tom
Claves Hand Cymbal S Claves Ride Cymbal 1
Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H Chinese Cymbal
Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup
Cuica Mute Tambourine Cuica Mute Tambourine
Cuica Open Splash Cymbal Cuica Open Splash Cymbal
Triangle Mute Cowbell Triangle Mute Cowbell
Triangle Open Hand Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 2
Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap
Jingle Bells Hand Cymbal 2 S Jingle Bells Ride Cymbal 2
Bell Tree – Bell Tree –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
97
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
House Kit SFX Kit 1
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Kick T9 5 – Cutting Noise 1
W Kick Snare T9 Rim – Cutting Noise 2
Disco Fx Snare T9 1 – –
WhiteNoiseDown 1 Clap T9 – String Slap
PinkNoise Down 1 Snare T9 2 – –
WhiteNoiseDown 2 To m T 9 1 – –
PinkNoise Down 2 Hi-Hat Closed T8 – –
White Noise Up 2 To m T 9 2 – –
White Noise Up 1 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 – –
Pink Noise Up To m T 9 3 – –
WhiteNoiseUp Rel Hi-Hat Open T9 – –
PinkNoise Up Rel To m T 9 4 – –
– Kick T9 4 Tom T 9 5 – – –
– Snare T8 Rim Crash Cymbal T9 – – –
– Snare T8 5 Tom T 9 6 – – –
– Hand Clap Ride Cymbal T9 – – –
– Snare Garg L Crash Cymbal 4 – – Flute Key Click
– Snare Roll RideCymbal Cup 2 – – –
– Snare T9 3 Tam bo ur i ne Hi t – – –
– Snare T8 1 Splash Cymbal 2 – – –
– Snare T9 5 – –
– Kick T9 1 – –
– Snare T9 Gate – –
– Kick T9 2 – –
Bongo H Open 1 F Kick T9 5 – Cutting Noise 1
Bongo L Open 3 F Snare T9 Rim – Cutting Noise 2
Conga H Tip Snare T9 1 – –
Conga H SlapOpen Clap T9 – String Slap
Conga H Open 2 Snare T9 2 – –
Timbale H To m T 9 1 – –
Timbale L Hi-Hat Closed T8 – –
Agogo H Tom T9 2 – –
Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal T9 Shower –
Cabasa Tom T9 3 Thunder –
Maracas Slur 2 Hi-Hat Open T9 Wind –
Vox Drum L Tom T 9 4 Stream –
Vox Drum H To m T 9 5 Bubble –
Guiro Short Crash Cymbal T9 Feed –
Guiro Long Tom T9 6 – –
Claves Ride Cymbal T9 – –
Wood Block H Crash Cymbal 4 – Flute Key Click
Wood Block L RideCymbal Cup 2 – –
Cuica H Tambourine Hit – –
Cuica L Splash Cymbal 2 – –
Triangle Mute Cowbell 1 – –
Triangle Open Crash Cymbal 1 – –
Analog Shaker Cowbell T8 – –
Sleigh Bells Ride Cymbal 3 – –
Wind Chime – Dog –
Snare Break Roll Horse
Noise Burst Bird Tweet
Vox Bell –
Snare R&B 1 –
Vox Alk –
Udu High Ghost
Filter Kick Maou
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
98
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
SFX Kit 2 Noise Kit
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Phone Call – White Noise
– Door Squeak – Pink Noise
– Door Slam – WhiteNoiseDown 1
– Scratch Cut – PinkNoise Down 1
– Scratch Split – WhiteNoiseDown 2
– Wind Chime – PinkNoise Down 2
– Telephone Ring – White Noise Up 2
– – – White Noise Up 1
– – – Pink Noise Up
– – – WhiteNoiseUp Rel
– – – PinkNoise Up Rel
– – – WhiteNoiseUp LFO
– – – – – PinkNoise Up LFO
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
– – CarEngn Ignition – – –
– – Car Tires Squeal – – –
– – Car Passing – – –
– – Car Crash – – –
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
Burst Phone Call – White Noise
Roller Coaster Door Squeak – Pink Noise
Submarine Door Slam – WhiteNoiseDown 1
– Scratch Cut – PinkNoise Down 1
– Scratch Split – WhiteNoiseDown 2
– Wind Chime – PinkNoise Down 2
– Telephone Ring – White Noise Up 2
– – – White Noise Up 1
Laugh – – Pink Noise Up
Scream – – WhiteNoiseUp Rel
Punch – – PinkNoise Up Rel
Heart Beat – – WhiteNoiseUp LFO
Foot Steps – – PinkNoise Up LFO
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
– CarEngn Ignition – –
– Car Tires Squeal – –
– Car Passing – –
– Car Crash – –
– Siren – –
– Train – –
– Jet Plane – –
– Starship – –
Machine Gun – – –
Laser Gun –
Explosion –
Firework –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
99
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Pop Latin Kit Arabic Kit
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Bongo H Open 1 f – Kick Soft
Cajon Low Bongo H Open 3 f – Side Stick
Cajon Slap Bongo H Rim – Snare Soft
Cajon Tip Bongo H Tip – Arabic Hand Clap
Claves High Bongo H Heel – Snare Drum
Claves Low Bongo H Slap – Floor Tom L
Hand Clap Bongo L Open 1 f – Hi-Hat Closed
– Bongo L Open 3 f – Floor Tom H
Finger Snap Bongo L Rim – Hi-Hat Pedal
Castanet Bongo L Tip – Low Tom
Conga H Tip Bongo L Heel – Hi-Hat Open
Conga H Heel Bongo L Slap – Mid Tom L
– Conga H Open Timbale L – Nakarazan Dom Mid Tom H
– Conga H Mute – – Cabasa Crash Cymbal 1
– Conga H SlapOpen – – Nakarazan Edge High Tom
– Conga H Slap – – Hager Dom Ride Cymbal 1
– Conga H SlapMute – – Hager Edge Crash Cymbal 2
– Conga L Tip Paila L – Bongo H Duhulla Dom
– Conga L Heel Timbale H – Bongo L Tambourine
– Conga L Open – – Conga H Mute Duhulla Tak
– Conga L Mute – Conga H Open
– Conga L SlapOpen – Conga L
– Conga L Slap – Zagrouda H
– Conga L Slide – Zagrouda L
Cowbell Top Bongo H Open 1 f Katem Dom Kick Soft
Cowbell 1 Bongo H Open 3 f Katem Tak Side Stick
Cowbell 2 Bongo H Rim Katem Sak Snare Soft
Cowbell 3 Bongo H Tip Katem Tak Arabic Hand Clap
Guiro Short Bongo H Heel Doff Tak Snare Drum
Guiro Long Bongo H Slap Tab la Do m Floor Tom L
MetalGuiro Short Bongo L Open 1 f Ta b l a Ta k 1 Hi-Hat Closed
Metal Guiro Long Bongo L Open 3 f Ta bl a T ik Floor Tom H
Tambourine Bongo L Rim Tabl a Ta k 2 Hi-Hat Pedal
Tambourim Open Bongo L Tip Tabla Sak Low Tom
Tambourim Mute Bongo L Heel Tabla Roll Edge Hi-Hat Open
Tambourim Tip Bongo L Slap Tabla Flam Mid Tom L
Maracas Timbale L Sagat 1 Mid Tom H
Shaker – Ta be l D o m Crash Cymbal 1
Cabasa – Sagat 3 High Tom
Cuica Mute – Tab el Ta k Ride Cymbal 1
Cuica Open – Sagat 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Cowbell High 1 Paila L Rik Dom Duhulla Dom
Cowbell High 2 Timbale H Rik Tak 2 Tambourine
Shekere – Rik Finger 1 Duhulla Tak
Shekere Tone – Rik Tak 1 Cowbell
Triangle Mute – Rik Finger 2 Duhulla Sak
Triangle Open – Rik BrassTremolo Claves
– Paila H Rik Sak Doff Dom
Wind Chime – Rik Tik –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
100
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
China Kit Orchestra Perc
Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 2 (PK)
– Luo High 1 – Snare Ensemble
– Gong Batter Symphonic Gong 1 Sus Cym 1 Roll S
– Jin Luo Symphonic Gong L Sus Cymbal 1
– Luo High 2 Symphonic Gong 2 Sus Cym 2 Roll L
– Luo Mid-Low Timpani E Sus Cymbal 2
– Luo Timpani F Concert Tom 5
– Jin Luo Low Timpani F# OrchCymbal 1 ckd
– Da Cha 1 Timpani G Concert Tom 4
– Da Cha Effect Timpani G# Orch Cymbal 1
– Zhongcha Timpani A Concert Tom 3
– Xiaocha Effect Timpani A# Orch Cymbal 2
Da Cha 2 Xiaocha Timpani B Concert Tom 2
– Da Gu mp Mang Luo Low – Timpani C Concert Tom 1
– Da Gu Rim Mang Luo Mid – Timpani C# Finger Cymbal
– Da Gu f Qing – Timpani D Gong
– Da Gu Hand Finger Bell – Timpani D# Ride Cymbal Tip
– Da Gu Roll Luo Big – Timpani High E China Cymbal
– Pai Gu 4 Muyu Low – Gran Cassa Hard Ride Cymbal Cup
– Pai Gu 4 High Muyu Mid-Low – Gran Cassa Soft Tambourine
– Pai Gu 3 Muyu Mid – Gran Cassa Hit Splash Cymbal
– Pai Gu 3 High – Gran Cassa Cresc
– Pai Gu 2 – ConcertSnareDrum
– Pai Gu 2 High – Snare Roll
– Pai Gu 1 – Snare Drum Light
Ban Luo High 1 Bongo H Stick Snare Ensemble
Bangu Roll Gong Batter Bongo L Stick Sus Cym 1 Roll S
ChineseOperaVo 1 Jin Luo Conga H Stick Sus Cymbal 1
ChineseOperaVo 2 Luo High 2 Conga L Stick Sus Cym 2 Roll L
ChineseOperaVo 3 Luo Mid-Low Whip Sus Cymbal 2
Yunluo F Luo Rotating Tom 5 Concert Tom 5
Yunluo F# Jin Luo Low Tu b ul ar Bell L OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Yunluo G Da Cha 1 Rotating Tom 4 Concert Tom 4
Yunluo G# Da Cha Effect Tubular Bell M Orch Cymbal 1
Yunluo A Zhongcha Rotating Tom 3 Concert Tom 3
Yunluo A# Xiaocha Effect Tubular Bell H Orch Cymbal 2
Yunluo B Xiaocha Rotating Tom 2 Concert Tom 2
Yunluo C Mang Luo Low Rotating Tom 1 Concert Tom 1
Yunluo C# Mang Luo Mid Temp l e B loc k H Finger Cymbal
Yunluo D Qing Temp le Bl oc k L Gong
Yunluo D# Finger Bell Claves Ride Cymbal Tip
Yunluo E Luo Big Wood Block H China Cymbal
Yunluo High F Muyu Low Wood Block L Ride Cymbal Cup
Yunluo High F# Muyu Mid-Low Anveil Tambourine
Yunluo High G Muyu Mid Triangle Roll Splash Cymbal
Yunluo High G# Muyu High Triangle Mute Cowbell
Yunluo High A Nanbangzi Roll Triangle Open Jingle Ring
Yunluo High A# Nanbangzi Bell Tree Castanet Roll
Yunluo High B Bangu Sleigh Bells Ta b l e C as ta ne t
Yunluo High C – Wind Chime –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
101
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and
your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User
40. The User setting saved in the User memory location can be called up by using the
Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] buttons.
In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with
Keyboard Percussion [1] button.
1 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
Keyboard Percussion [1] button.
The KBP display appears.
2 Select “User 1” here.
Press the [A] button to select “User 1.” If another name is shown, select “User 1”
with the DATA CONTROL dial.
This step assigns “User 1” to the Keyboard Percussion [1] button. You can call
up “User 1” the next time you press the [1] button.
3 Select the desired percussion kit.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the kit. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.
NOTE
By default, the same data as
the Preset 1 – 2 of the EL Kit
is stored to User Keyboard
Percussion 1 and 2.
KBP Display
102
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
4 Use the Page buttons to select the ASSIGN Page.
In this Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys.
Category
This allows you to select the desired percussion category using the [A] buttons.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.
Instrument Names
The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be selected with the [B]
button.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.
Assign
Assigns the selected instrument to the desired key. (See the following explanation in
step 7.)
Clear
This function is used to erase the User assignment for User 1. Clear works in two ways:
either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all instruments. (See the following
explanation on page 103.)
5 Select the desired percussion group.
Press the [A] button to select “CATEGORY,” then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to select the category.
6 Select the desired instruments.
Press the [B] button to select “INST.” (Instrument), then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired instrument.
103
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
7 To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal.
Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button [C] corresponding to
“ASS.”(Assign) and press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be
assigned. The currently displayed instrument will be assigned to the key you
press down as a part of User 1.
When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is
displayed at the bottom of the display. The assignments are saved to the User
memory selected in step 2 (in this example, User 1).
8 Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your
own User Keyboard Percussion set.
To erase one instrument:
Simultaneously hold down the [D] button corresponding to “CLR.”(Clear) in the
display and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to
erase.
(A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.)
NOTE
Though 40 User Keyboard
Percussion setups can be
created, they cannot be
memorized to Registration
Memory. Only on/off data
and the Keyboard
Percussion Menu are
memorized to Registration
Memory. If you want to save
the User Keyboard
Percussion setups with the
Registration Memory, save
the data to the USB flash
drive (page 147). 40 User
Keyboard Percussion setups
will be saved to each Unit.
7-1. While holding down
[C] button...
7-2. Press the key.
NOTICE
The Keyboard Percussion
on/off data and Menu is
automatically saved to
Registration Memory when
another display is called
up. Make sure to switch to
another display before
turning the power off. A “”
mark appears at the top left
of the display indicating
that the Registration data
is currently being saved.
Do not turn the power off
while the Registration is
being saved, otherwise the
data will be lost.
1. While holding down
[D] button...
2. Press the key.
104
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
To erase all instruments:
You can clear all assignments in ASSIGN Page of the Keyboard Percussion display.
1 Press, then release the [D] “CLR.” (CLEAR) button in the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. You
can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding
to “CANCEL.”
2 Press the [C] “CLR.” (Clear) button to erase all data. When the [C]
button is pressed, an “Assignments of User xx have been cleared”
message momentarily appears on the display.
Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion
1 Press the Keyboard Percussion button.
2 Select the desired User Keyboard percussion kit.
Press the [A] button to select “MENU,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the desired User number.
Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
105
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Kit Assign List
EL Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cym Mute
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Orch Cymbal Mute
Cymbal March
Cym Brush Shot
Tam -Ta m
HI-HAT
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Analog HH Open
Analog HH Closed
SNARE DRUM
Snare Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum Rim 2
SD Accent 1
SD Accent 2
SD Reverb 1
SD Reverb 2
Synth Snare Drum
Orch Snare Drum
Snare Drum Roll
Analog SD
SNARE BRUSH
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Brush Shot 2
SD Brush Roll
TOM
Tom 1
Tom 2
Tom 3
Tom 4
Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Brush Shot 2
Tom Brush Shot 3
Tom Brush Shot 4
Synth Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
Synth Tom 3
BASS DRUM
Bass Drum Light
Bass Drum Heavy
Bass Drum Attack
Synth Bass Drum
Bass Drum March
Concert BD
Analog BD Short
Analog BD Long
CONGA/BONGO
Conga High
Conga Low
Conga Slap
Conga Muff
Conga Slide
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Bongo Slap
Bongo Mute
CUICA/SURDO
Cuica High
Cuica Middle
Cuica Low
Tamborim Open
Tamborim Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Mute
Surdo Rim
Surdo Muff
TIMBALES/COWBELL
Timbale 1 High
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 2 High
Timbale 2 Low
Timbale 3 High
Timbale 3 Low
Timbale 4 High
Timbale 4 Low
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell 4
PERCUSSION 1
Cabasa
Shaker
Maracas High
Maracas Low
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Wood Block High
Wood Block Mid
Wood Block Low
Claves
Castanet
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Agogo High
Agogo Low
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime Down
Wind Chime Up
Tambourine
Pandeiro
Bells
Hand Claps
Finger Snap
Scratch
Noise Percussion
PERCUSSION 3
Kotsuzumi 1
Kotsuzumi 2
Kotsuzumi 3
Kotsuzumi 4
Ohtsuzumi 1
Ohtsuzumi 2
Tai ko 1
Tai ko 2
Ohdaiko 1
Ohdaiko 2
Kakegoe 1
Kakegoe 2
Kakegoe 3
Standard Kit 1
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare
Snare Tight
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard Kit 2
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Short
Snare Tight H
Snare Soft 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot H
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Short
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
106
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Hit Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Ambient
Snare Tight 2
Snare Electro
Snare Roll
Stick Ambient
Snare Pitched
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Hybrid Tom 1
Hybrid Tom 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Hybrid Tom 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Tight H
Kick Wet
Kick Tight L
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Light
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Room Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Snappy
Snare Tight Snap
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom R o o m 1
Tom R o o m 2
Tom R o o m 3
Tom R o o m 4
Tom R o o m 5
Tom R o o m 6
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Rock Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Rock
Snare Rock Tight
Snare Noisy
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom R o c k 1
Tom R o c k 2
Tom R o c k 3
Tom R o c k 4
Tom R o c k 5
Tom R o c k 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate
Kick 2
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
107
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Electro Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Noisy 3
Snare Snap Elec
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Electro 1
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Tom Electro 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate Heavy
Kick Gate
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Analog Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hat Open Analog
Hat Close Analog
Hat Close Anlg 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Analog
Snare Analog 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Roll
Side Stick Anlg
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Analog 1
Tom Analog 2
Tom Analog 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Tom Analog 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Analog
Kick Anlg Short
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Analog
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Dance Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Analog
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 3
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Hat Close Anlg 3
SNARE DRUM
Snare Clap
Snare Dry
Snare Techno
Reverse Dance 2
Side Stick Anlg
Rim Gate
Snare Analog 3
Snare Analog 4
Vinyl Noise
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Dance 1
Tom Dance 2
Tom Dance 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Tom Dance 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Techno
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno Q
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Dance
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap Analog
PERCUSSION 2
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Anlg
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Snare Dance 1
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Dance Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1
Jazz Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Jazz L
Snare Jazz M
Snare Jazz H
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
108
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Brush Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Brush Slap 3
Brush Tap 2
Brush Slap 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Symphony Kit
CYMBAL
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Hand Cymbal S
Hand Cymbal 2 S
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Gran Cassa Mute
Gran Cassa
Kick Soft 2
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Live!StudioKit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Studio M
Snare Studio L
Snare Studio 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Studio
Kick Ambience L
Kick Ambience H
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
109
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
House Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 4
Splash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal 3
RideCymbal Cup 2
Hi-Hat Open T9
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
SNARE DRUM
Snare T9 1
Snare T9 2
Snare T9 3
Snare T9 5
Snare T9 Gate
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T8 1
Snare T8 5
Snare T8 Rim
Snare Garg L
Snare R&B 1
Snare Roll
Snare Break Roll
TOM
Tom T9 1
Tom T9 2
Tom T9 3
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Tom T9 6
BASS DRUM
Kick T9 1
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 4
Kick T9 5
W Kick
Filter Kick
NOISE
PinkNoise Down 1
PinkNoise Down 2
Pink Noise Up
PinkNoise Up Rel
WhiteNoiseDown 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
White Noise Up 1
White Noise Up 2
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
Noise Burst
Disco Fx
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open 2
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Tip
Bongo H Open 1 F
Bongo L Open 3 F
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell 1
Cowbell T8
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas Slur 2
PERCUSSION 2
Cuica H
Cuica L
Cabasa
Agogo H
Agogo L
Analog Shaker
Udu High
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Hit
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Clap T9
Hand Clap
Vox Drum H
Vox Drum L
Vox Alk
Vox Bell
SFX Kit 1
SFX
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
SFX Kit 2
SFX 1
Phone Call
Telephone Ring
Wind Chime
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
SFX 2
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
Noise Kit
NOISE
White Noise
WhiteNoiseDown 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
White Noise Up 1
White Noise Up 2
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
Pink Noise
PinkNoise Down 1
PinkNoise Down 2
Pink Noise Up
PinkNoise Up Rel
PinkNoise Up LFO
Wonderland Kit
SE
Laser Beam
Laser Shot
Water Phone
Bubble
Puddle
NATURE
Thunder
Shower
Beach
Stream
DAILY
Footstep
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Alarm Bell
Cuckoo Clock
Big Clock
Bell
Telephone
Camera
Gnaw
Applause
VEHICLE
Train
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
CarEngn Ignition
Car Crash
Helicopter
Starship
ANIMAL
Sheep
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse
Lion
Dog
Cat
Hen
Owl
Insects
Frog
Tweet 1
Tweet 2
PERCUSSION 1
Cymbal
Snare
Snare Roll
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom 1
Tom 2
Bass Drum
Gran Cassa
PERCUSSION 2
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
Pop Latin Kit
CONGA
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
BONGO
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
PERCUSSION 1
Timbale H
Timbale L
Paila H
Paila L
Cowbell Top
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell High 1
110
4
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Cowbell High 2
Claves High
Claves Low
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Metal Guiro Long
MetalGuiro Short
PERCUSSION 2
Maracas
Cuica Open
Cuica Mute
Cabasa
Shaker
Tambourine
Tambourim Tip
Tambourim Open
Tambourim Mute
Castanet
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime
PERCUSSION 3
Hand Clap
Finger Snap
Shekere
Shekere Tone
Cajon Low
Cajon Slap
Cajon Tip
Arabic Kit
ARABIC 1
Nakarazan Dom
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Arabic Hand Clap
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak
Duhulla Sak
Doff Dom
Doff Tak
ARABIC 2
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Tab la Do m
Tab la Tak 1
Tab la Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tab la Ti k
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Tab el Do m
Tab el Tak
ARABIC 3
Sagat 1
Sagat 2
Sagat 3
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 1
Rik Tak 2
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
Rik Finger 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo
CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 1
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Snare Drum
Snare Soft
Side Stick
TOM/BASS DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Cowbell
Claves
Cabasa
Tambourine
China Kit
CYMBAL
Da Cha 1
Da Cha 2
Da Cha Effect
Zhongcha
Xiaocha
Xiaocha Effect
Gong Batter
Luo Big
Luo
Luo Mid-Low
Luo High 1
Luo High 2
Jin Luo
Jin Luo Low
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid
DRUM
Da Gu f
Da Gu mp
Da Gu Rim
Da Gu Roll
Da Gu Hand
Pai Gu 1
Pai Gu 2 High
Pai Gu 2
Pai Gu 3 High
Pai Gu 3
Pai Gu 4 High
Pai Gu 4
GONG 1
Yunluo F
Yunluo F#
Yunluo G
Yunluo G#
Yunluo A
Yunluo A#
Yunluo B
Yunluo C
Yunluo C#
Yunluo D
Yunluo D#
Yunluo E
Yunluo High F
Yunluo High F#
Yunluo High G
Yunluo High G#
GONG 2
Yunluo High A
Yunluo High A#
Yunluo High B
Yunluo High C
PERCUSSION
Muyu Low
Muyu Mid-Low
Muyu Mid
Muyu High
Ban
Bangu
Bangu Roll
Nanbangzi
Nanbangzi Roll
Qing
Finger Bell
ChineseOperaVo 1
ChineseOperaVo 2
ChineseOperaVo 3
OrchestraPerc
CYMBAL
China Cymbal
Finger Cymbal
Orch Cymbal 1
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Orch Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Tip
Ride Cymbal Cup
Splash Cymbal
Sus Cymbal 1
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
Sus Cymbal 2
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
SNARE DRUM
ConcertSnareDrum
Snare Drum Light
Snare Ensemble
Snare Roll
TOM
Concert Tom 1
Concert Tom 2
Concert Tom 3
Concert Tom 4
Concert Tom 5
Rotating Tom 1
Rotating Tom 2
Rotating Tom 3
Rotating Tom 4
Rotating Tom 5
BASS DRUM
Gran Cassa Hard
Gran Cassa Soft
Gran Cassa Hit
Gran Cassa Cresc
GONG
Gong
Symphonic Gong 1
Symphonic Gong 2
Symphonic Gong L
TIMPANI
Timpani E
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani C
Timpani C#
Timpani D
Timpani D#
Timpani High E
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Stick
Conga L Stick
Bongo H Stick
Bongo L Stick
Cowbell
Claves
Bell Tree
Sleigh Bells
Tubular Bell H
Tubular Bell M
Tubular Bell L
Wind Chime
Jingle Ring
Tambourine
Castanet Roll
Table Castanet
PERCUSSION 2
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Roll
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Temple Block H
Temple Block L
Anveil
Whip
111
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
Registration Memory is a powerful performance tool that helps you sound like a professional
player. It lets you store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, conveniently
allowing you to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing—simply by
pressing a single Registration Memory button. The buttons are conveniently located at the top
right on the panel for easy access while playing. Just press the numbered button that
corresponds to the Registration you wish to select.
Moreover, for even greater convenience, you can also recall the settings using the right
footswitch. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash drive.
Newly created Registrations you’ve made can be stored to the Registration Memory
panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB
flash drive.
1 Create your original Registration by making all desired panel
settings.
2 While holding down the [MEMORY] button in the Registration
Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to
save your Registration.
When the Registration is stored, the LED of the numbered button flashes
momentarily.
1
Storing Registrations
Reference Page
• Selecting a Rhythm
(page 68)
• Selecting a Voice
(page 33)
• Voice Controls and Effects
(page 52)
NOTE
By default, Bank A is called
up to the panel Registration
buttons. Thus, your
registration is stored to Bank
A. For details about Banks,
refer to page 116.
2-1. While holding down the [MEMORY]
button...
2-2. Press the desired numbered button.
NOTICE
When storing the
Registration to the
numbered button, a “”
mark appears at the top left
of the display indicating
that the Registration data
is currently being saved.
Do not turn the power off
while the Registration is
being saved, otherwise the
data will be lost.
5
5
112
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
To store Registrations 9 – 16
Although this Electone has just eight Registration Memory buttons, up to sixteen
Registrations can be stored by turning on the [9-16] button to make the numbered
buttons function as 9 – 16. To restore to the 1-8, turn off the [9-16] button. Then, in
both cases, all you have to do is simply press the desired numbered button while
holding down the [MEMORY] button as described in step 2.
Reference Page
Saving the Registration Data
to USB Flash Drive
(page 147)
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:
The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number.
The following settings are common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and
cannot be stored individually for each number.
• Pitch (page 181) • LCD contrast
• MIDI Control settings (page 190) • Wireless LAN settings
• LCD related settings (page 27)
• Transpose (page 181) • User rhythms (page 76)
• Registration Shift (page 121) • Rhythm Sequences (page 86)
• Auto Fill setting (page 72) • Disable setting (page 114)
• Reverb type (page 62) • Disable mode (page 114)
• Keyboard Percussion Kit/Assign
5
113
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to
select. (The selected button’s LED lights.)
To call up one of the Registrations 9 – 16, turn on the [9-16] button, then press the
appropriate numbered button.
Example: Calling up Registration Number 11
To call up the Registrations stored to another Bank
If you’ve selected another Bank and stored Registrations to it, you will need to select
the same Bank to recall the Registrations. Select the Bank in Page 3 of the VOICE
display, then press the panel numbered button to recall the Registration. For details
on how to select the Bank, refer to page 116.
You can also recall Registrations in a pre-programmed order by using the right
footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 121).
2
Selecting Registrations
1. Turn on the [9-16] button...
2. Press the appropriate button
5
114
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
Using the [DISABLE] button:
Keep in mind that rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns as well as the tempo
also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. There may be times
during your performance when you want to keep the same rhythm going, even when you
make Registration Memory changes. Pressing the [DISABLE] button allows you to keep
the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your
Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to.
When the [DISABLE] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when
you change the Registration Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm
reverb
•Rhythm reverb time
• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode
The particular settings that do not change when the [DISABLE] button is on depend on
the Disable mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see “Selecting Disable Mode”
below.
NOTE
The Disable function is
available even after
changing the Bank.
Selecting Disable mode:
The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be disabled when the [DISABLE]
button is on. There are two Disable modes: Normal (rhythm menu, tempo, etc. are
disabled) and Tempo (only tempo is disabled).
1 Press the [UTILITY] button.
The UTILITY display appears.
2
3
5
115
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
2 Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
3 Press the [B] button to set DISABLE MODE to “NORMAL” or
“TEMPO.”
NORMAL
When the Disable Mode is set to Normal and the [DISABLE] button is on, the
following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration
Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm
reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode
TEMPO
When the Disable Mode is set to Tempo and the [DISABLE] button is on, the
rhythm tempo will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory
number.
5
116
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
Registration Memory and Banks
The ELB-02 series lets you create up to five Registration Banks A – E, each of which
consists of 1 – 16 Registration Memories. Although preset various Registrations are
stored to the Number buttons 1 – 16 of only Bank A by default, you can replace them
with your original Registrations. Your original Registrations can be stored also to
Banks B – E, up to a maximum of 80 Registrations. Executing the Initialize function
(page 120) recalls the preset Registrations of Bank A, and then resets the created
Registrations of Banks B – E to their original empty status.
With the default initial settings and Bank A selected, you can store your original
Registrations to Banks A and B. Bank C is available only after Registrations have
been stored to Bank B. Likewise, other Banks (up to Bank E) will not be available
until the Bank preceding it contains data.
To select the Bank:
1 Call up the VOICE Display, then select the Page 3.
The currently selected Registration bank will be shown.
2 Select the desired Bank by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
You can select the Banks from A (at top) to an empty Bank next to the last Bank
containing data. When Banks A and B contain Registration data, for example,
you can select Banks A, B, and C (which is empty). The message shows whether
the selected Bank contains data or not. When you select the Bank containing
data, no message is shown, while a message “Registration is not recorded” is
shown when you select an empty Bank.
3
Storing Registrations to Another Bank
Registration Bank A
Bank B
Bank C
Bank D
Bank E
5
117
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
To store the Registration:
3 Create your original Registration, then store it to any of the
Number buttons 1 – 16. (This corresponds to steps 1 – 2 on
page 111.)
Select the desired Bank to be deleted in Page 3 of the VOICE display, then press the
[D] button corresponding to “DELETE” in the display. A message “Are you sure you
want to delete the Bank xx” appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Press
the [C] “DELETE” button if you want to delete the Bank, or [D] “CANCEL” button
to cancel the operation.
Bank A can only be deleted if data is stored to another bank (other than A).
Data of Banks that follow the deleted Bank will be moved up to the previous Bank
respectively. For example, deleting the Bank A will move the data of Bank B to Bank
A, Bank C to Bank B, Bank D to Bank C, and Bank E to Bank D.
NOTE
When you try to store
Registrations after changing
the Bank, a confirmation
dialog appears. Confirm
whether or not you want to
set the current Bank as the
destination. If you want to set
the current Bank as the
destination, press the [C]
“OK” button, or press the [D]
“CANCEL” button to cancel
the operation.
4
Deleting Banks
5
118
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
The Registration data stored to the Number buttons can be saved to a USB flash
drive connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
For details about the save operation, see Chapter 6, Music Data Recorder (MDR).
The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash
drive.
Make sure to use one of the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible
USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort,
etc. Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on
page 132.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button.
The MDR display appears.
3 Confirm the SONG Page is shown.
Confirm “SONG” is shown at the top right of the display. If another page is
shown, select the “SONG” Page by simultaneously pressing both Page buttons.
4 Select the Song to which you want to save the Registration data.
Press the [B] button corresponding to the “ ” in the display to call up the
Song/Folder list, in which you can find “new song” (blank Song) at the bottom
of the list. Select “new song” by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial.
5
Saving the Registration Data to USB
Flash Drive
Reference Page
What is a Song? (page 134)
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
5
119
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
5 Press the [D] “UNIT” button.
The UNIT EDIT display appears.
6 Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.
When the operation is completed, the message closes and the Song name and
the Unit number will be shown in the display. The Registration data stored to
Banks A – E is now saved as a Unit to the USB flash drive.
7 Press the [D] “EXIT” button.
The display returns to MDR display.
Song name
Unit number
Reference Page
Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 154)
Reference Page
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 144)
About Banks and Units
The Registration Memory data (16
x up to 5 Banks) stored to internal
memory of the instrument will be
handled as a “Unit.” If you want to
create more than 80 (=16 x 5
Banks) Registrations, create
another Unit to create more
additional Registrations. The Unit
can be edited in the MDR
function. See page 147.
Song
Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Registration Memory Bank A
Bank B
Bank C
Bank D
Bank E
5
120
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration
Memory and restores the original factory-programmed Registration Memory
presets. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data. In
order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to a USB flash drive.
If you want to delete a specific Bank, see “Deleting Banks” on page 117.
1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Page 1 of the UTILITY
display.
If another page is shown, select Page 1 by using the Page buttons.
2 Press the [D] “INITIALIZE” button.
The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button. Press [C] “INITIALIZE” button to actually initialize the data. When the
operation is complete, the Electone will be restarted.
6
Initializing Registration Memory
NOTE
Deleting Banks (page 117)
Reference Page
Factory Set (Initializing the
Electone) (page 27)
5
121
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
The Registration Shift function conveniently allows you to change Registrations
without needing to take your hands from the keyboards.
By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified
Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric
order or in any order you specify.
Registration Shift has four modes: Off, Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift
mode in the VOICE Display.
1 Select the Bank containing the Registration you want to use.
2 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.
3 Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
The REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display appears.
7
Registration Shift
Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT)
Display
5
122
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
4 Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These
are set in the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display by successive
pressing of the [A] button.
Select each in order (Off Shift Jump User).
Off
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When Off is selected, Registrations cannot
be changed by using the Right Footswitch.
Shift
In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory
presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function
‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The LEDs of numbered buttons 1 – 16
light up as they are selected. Keep in mind that the [9-16] button lights up in addition
to the selected numbered button if Registrations 9 – 16 are selected.
OFF
SHIFT
JUMP
USER
Bank
Current Registration Next Registration
You can confirm the actual
Registration Shift in Page 2.
NOTE
In the Shift mode, the Right
Footswitch cannot call up
another Registration Bank.
5
123
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
Jump
Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration.
Press the [B] button to select the Jump destination.
User
In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to
the order you’ve specified. You can also specify an end point for the Registration Shift
function. User Shift can be set in Page 2, and Shift End can be set in Page 1 of the
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display.
To set the User Registration order:
Before proceeding, set the mode to User.
1 Select the Bank containing the Registration you want to use.
For details about how to select Banks, refer to page 116.
NOTE
In the Jump mode, the Right
Footswitch cannot call up
another Registration Bank.
Bank
Current Registration Registration number of the destination
You can confirm the actual
Registration Shift in Page 2.
5
124
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
2 Call up Page 2 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display.
3 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
If you want to use 9 – 16 Registrations, turn on the [9-16] button, then press the
desired numbered button.
4 Press the [A] “INS.” (Insert) button.
5 The Bank indication and Registration number appears in the
display, indicating that the Registration is entered.
Enter the Registration Number
[Page 2] REGIST SHIFT
(RIGHT) Display
NOTE
To select the Registration
from another Bank, select
desired Bank in the Page 3
of the VOICE display
(page 116). To go back to
the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT)
display, press the [FOOT
SWITCH] button.
Highlighted cursor indicates the data entry position.
NOTE
No Bank indication will be
shown as long as same
Registration Bank will be
used.
Bank
5
125
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
6 Repeat steps 1 through 4 above to set additional numbers in the
Registration order. Up to 400 steps with 80 Registrations (16
Registrations x 5 Banks) can be memorized.
7 After settings, move the cursor to the top position with DATA
CONTROL dial, then press the Right Footswitch as you play the
Electone.
Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order
you’ve specified. If you’ve inadvertently advanced the shift setting in the middle
of your performance, use DATA CONTROL dial to move the cursor back to the
correct position.
Move the cursor to the desired point with the [C] and [D] buttons or
DATA CONTROL dial, then insert or delete the desired number by using
the [A] and [B] buttons.
Data Entry Position: Highlighted cursor indicates the current data entry
position.
If you want to move the cursor to the left, press the [C] button or turn the DATA
CONTROL dial counter-clockwise. If you want to move the cursor to the right, press
the [D] button or turn the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.
Insert: Use the [A] button.
This is for initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the
Registration row.
To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button, then press the [A]
“INS.” button. The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row.
After using [A] “INS.” button to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among
the numbers.
Insert can also be used to insert a Registration number just before the current cursor
position. To perform the operation, first move the data entry position to a numbered
position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button, and press the [A]
“INS.” button. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all
other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new
numbers.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s
capacity of 400. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, “INS.” in the display will
changed to “---” and the operation cannot be executed.
Delete: Use the [B] button.
To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and
press the [B] “DEL.” button.
NOTICE
The Registration Shift
setting will be
automatically saved to the
Registration data when you
switch to another display.
While data is being saved,
a “” mark appears at the
top left of the display
indicating that the
Registration data is
currently being saved. Do
not turn the power off while
the save operation is in
progress, or without
switching to another
display, otherwise the data
will be lost.
NOTE
Registration data cannot be
added or deleted when the
cursor position is at the
“TOP” (found at the lower left
of the screen) after inputting
the number. Add or delete
the data after moving the
cursor by rotating the DATA
CONTROL dial clockwise.
NOTE
Up to five Registration
numbers can be displayed
at once in the LCD; however,
screen scrolling is enabled
when four or more
Registration numbers are
input. Turn the DATA
CONTROL dial counter-
clockwise to scroll back
toward the beginning.
Move the cursor position
5
126
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
Shift End:
Determines the end point for the Registration Shift function.
Press the Page buttons to select Page 1.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Stop
Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.
Top
After the last preset is reached, “Top” is called up, returning operation to the
beginning. To select the first preset, press the Right Footswitch.
Next Unit
After the last preset is reached, the next Unit in the Song on the MDR is called up.
This function is available only when two or more Units are saved in one Song. This
function is handy when you need to play a Song with more than 80 Registrations.
The Shift End mark ( : Top, : Next) will automatically be put at the end of the
Registrations you entered when Top or Next Unit is selected as the Shift End.
STOP
TOP
NEXT UNIT
Reference Page
Next Unit Settings (using
more than 80 Registrations in
one performance)
(page 153)
NOTE
• When you play the Song
using Next Unit function,
always press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button to start the
Song with CUSTOM PLAY
function (page 156) is set
to off since CUSTOM PLAY
function will not activate the
Next Unit function.
• When you use the Next
Unit function during
Rhythm playback, Rhythm
Sequence and User
Rhythm cannot be loaded.
127
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Music Data Recorder (MDR) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that
lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash drive. Moreover, the
MDR allows you to perform various other operations to your Song data (such as copy, delete and
convert).
Compatible USB flash drives
Please make sure to use one of the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List
downloadable from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash
drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132.
Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the MDR display. All operations
related to the MDR, such as recording and playing your performances, can be done
from the MDR display.
Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the MDR display is open exits
from the MDR display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the
[MDR] button again to recall the MDR display.
Song data
USB flash drive
Copy
Delete
Convert
1
Calling Up the MDR Display
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
MDR Display
6
6
128
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The MDR display consists of seven display Pages. Each Page is devoted to a specific
function, and you can call up the desired function or operation by selecting the
appropriate Page. For example, first select the SONG Page to select a target Song,
then select TOOLS1 Page to copy/convert/delete the Song, or TEMPO Page to set
the Repeat playback setting for the Song.
To select the desired Page, use Page buttons at the top right of the display on the
panel. The TEMPO Page and PART Page below will be shown when you press the
[C] “SET.” (Setting) button in the SONG Page while the Song is selected.
2
Using the MDR Display
SONG Page TOOLS1 Page TOOLS2 Page
TEMPO Page PART 1 Pag e PART 2 Page PART 3 Pag e
• Select target Song • Copy/Delete/Convert
Song
* You can copy folder or USB
flash drive.
• Create Folder
•Format USB flash drive
•Change Song/Folder
name
• Confirm information of
Song/USB flash drive
•Song tempo, Repeat
playback settings
•Custom Play
Part settings for Song Part settings for Song Part settings for XG
Song
Press the [C] “SET.” button while the Song is selected.
Press the [D] “FINISH” button.
Page construction
NOTE
Keep in mind that the functions shown in the TOOLS1 and TOOLS2 Pages depend on the target selected in the SONG Page.
6
129
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
SONG Page:
Current USB Flash Drive/Folder
Displays the currently selected USB flash drive or folder. The contents included in
are listed as below.
USB Flash Drive/Folder/Song List
Displays the USB flash drive, folders or Songs.
Scroll bar
If the USB flash drive/folder/Song list contains more than 5 USB flash drive/folders/
Songs, you can scroll through the display with the DATA CONTROL dial.
UP
Selects the higher layer folder or USB flash drive by pressing the [A] button.
IN
Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or USB flash drive by pressing the [B]
button.
Page
Selects the Page of the display if the display contains two or more Pages.
Unit
Show the Unit name last used (shown as blank unless the UNIT is used).
If USB flash drive cannot be found:
Press the [A] “ ” button several times until the indication
changes to “ .”
The USB flash drive list will be displayed. If there are more than three media
selections, scroll through the display with the DATA CONTROL dial to display and
select the desired USB flash drive.
6
130
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
If Songs cannot be found:
1 Check the current USB flash drive/ folder (page 129 ).
2 If the desired Song is stored in the currently displayed folder, use
the DATA CONTROL dial to display and select the Song.
If the desired Song is stored in a different folder, use the DATA CONTROL dial
and the [A] “ ” and [B] “ ” buttons to select the folder in which
the desired Song is stored.
Song icons
These icons are shown when you select a USB flash drive, folder, and Song.
Indicates a USB flash drive. This icon is displayed in the USB flash drive/
folder list.
Indicates a folder.
Indicates that performance data is contained in the Song.
Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 163 for details.
Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 163 for details.
Indicates an XG-compatible Song.
6
131
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Media (USB flash drive) Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files
Folders:
A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple Songs in groups. If
you've saved hundreds of Songs to a USB flash drive, it may be difficult to find the
desired Song quickly. Organizing your Songs in folders, with similar Songs grouped
together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the Songs
you want.
Songs:
A Song is a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to
external media. A single Song can contain both the recorded performance and
Registrations. A blank Song containing no data is displayed as a “new song.” When a Song
containing the performance data is selected, a note icon ( ) appears in the display.
Files:
A file is an element of data in a Song. For example, a single Song consists of various files,
such as Registration files and performance files. The file types listed below are created
with the MDR (The extension will not appear in the Electone display. They will, however,
be displayed on a computer.)
Files in the Song
In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for
organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone
display.
USB flash drive
Creating folders
USB flash drive
Song
1
Song
2
Song
3
Song
4
Song
5
Song
6
Song Song Song
Song 4
5
6
Folder 001
Folder 002
Song 1
2
3
File Explanation Extension
Performance data
This file contains performance data, played on the
keyboards and pedals of the Electone.
.mid
Registration data
This file contains Registration settings, User Voices,
User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.
.b00
XG-converted data
This file contains XG Song data, for which Electone
performance data is converted to XG-compatible
format.
.mid
NOTE
Audio files cannot be saved
to a Song, even if created
with the Audio Recording
features (page 169).
6
132
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
You can connect a USB flash drive (sold separately) or a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately) to the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal. You can save data you’ve created on the instrument to the USB flash drive (pages
118, 147), or you can connect the instrument to a smart device such as iPad via wireless LAN (page 192).
Connecting a USB Device
Precautions when using the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
This instrument features a built-in [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device
to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device
with care. Follow the important precautions below.
NOTE
For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to
the owner’s manual of the USB device.
Compatible USB devices
•USB flash drive
•USB hub
•USB wireless LAN adaptor
Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse
cannot be used.
The instrument does not necessarily support all
commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot
guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase.
Before purchasing a USB device for use with this
instrument, please visit the following web page:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this
instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading
from the USB device may differ depending on the type of
data or the status of the instrument.
NOTE
The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/
500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this,
since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.
Connecting USB devices
When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is
appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction.
NOTICE
• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key
cover (if you use the separately sold key cover). If the key
cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB
device may be damaged.
• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device during
playback/recording and file management operations (such
as Save, Copy, Delete and Format), or when accessing the
USB device. Failure to observe this may result in
“freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption
of the USB device and the data.
• When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and
vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the
two operations.
NOTE
• If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time
to a terminal, you should use a self-powered USB hub. Only
one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while
using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument,
then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the
USB hub.
• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is
less than 3 meters.
• Do not connect an extension cable.
Using USB Flash Drives
By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive,
you can save data you’ve created to the connected
device, as well as read data from the connected
device.
Maximum number of USB flash drives
allowed
Up to two USB flash drives can be connected to the [USB
TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The
number of USB flash drives that can be recognized
simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB
hub is used is a maximum of four.)
Formatting a USB Flash Drive
You should format the USB flash drive only with this
instrument (page 133). A USB flash drive formatted on
another device may not operate properly.
NOTICE
The format operation overwrites any previously existing
data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting
does not contain important data. Proceed with caution,
especially when connecting multiple USB flash drive.
To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,
apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash drive.
If you are saving data to the USB flash drive, make sure to
disable write-protect.
Turning off the instrument
When turning off the instrument, make sure that the
instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by
playback/recording or file management (such as during
Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so
may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data.
6
133
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
If you find that you are unable to use a new, blank USB flash drive or an old one that
has been used with other devices, you may need to format it. Formatting erases all
the data in the USB flash drive and makes it ready to record. The data erased by
formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the USB flash drive
contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation.
Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash drives.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminals.
2 Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the MDR display.
3 Select the desired USB flash drive you want to format.
If a single USB flash drive is connected, only USB 01 will be displayed. After
that, if you connect another USB flash drive, the latter one will be displayed as
USB 02. If the desired USB flash drive is not selected, use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired one.
4 Press the Page buttons at the top right of the display to call up the
TOOLS1 Page.
3
Formatting a USB Flash Drive
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
Reference Page
If USB flash drive cannot be
found: (page 129)
NOTE
If two (or more) USB flash
drives are connected, which
of them is labeled USB 01 or
USB 02 may change when
you turn on the power to the
instrument.
Currently
selected USB
flash drive name
6
134
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
5 Press the [D] “FORMAT” button in the display.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
6 Press the [C] “FORMAT” button to format the USB flash drive.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to SONG Page.
In order to record your performance to the USB flash drive or to load Registrations
in the USB flash drive back to the Electone, you will need to select a Song, as
described below.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal, then press the [MDR] button.
The SONG Page of the MDR display appears. In the SONG Page, you can select
a blank Song for recording your performance or saving the Registration
settings, or you can select a desired Song for playback.
NOTICE
Never attempt to
disconnect the USB flash
drive or turn the power off
during formatting. Doing
so may corrupt the USB
flash drive data.
4
Selecting a Song
Reference Page
USB flash drive (Media)
Contents: Folders, Songs,
and Files (page 131)
NOTICE
While the instrument is
accessing data, do NOT
remove the USB flash
drive. (Some USB flash
drives are equipped with
an LED. The LED will flash
while the USB flash drive is
being accessed.)
What is a Song?
You can think of a song as a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music,
recorded to external media. A single song can contain both the recorded performance
and Registrations.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
Currently selected USB flash drive name
MDR Display [SONG Page]
6
135
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
2 Select the desired USB flash drive.
If a single USB flash drive is connected, only USB 01 will be displayed. After
that, if you connect another USB flash drive, the latter one will be displayed as
USB 02. If the desired USB flash drive is not selected, use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired one.
3 Select a Song.
Press the [B] “ ” button to call up the Song/folder list contained in the
USB flash drive, then select the desired Song by using the DATA CONTROL
dial.
Select “new song” at the bottom of the list if you want to make a new recording
or save data.
To simply play an existing Song, select the desired Song (containing data),
referring to the Song name and icons. The selected Song is highlighted.
For details about how to select songs in a folder, see “Selecting a Song in a
Folder” on page 136.
Reference Page
If USB flash drive cannot be
found: (page 129)
NOTE
If two (or more) USB flash
drives are connected, which
of them is labeled USB 01 or
USB 02 may change when
you turn on the power to the
instrument.
NOTE
The “new song” file is a
blank Song automatically
created in the USB flash
drive/folder, if the number of
the Songs in the USB flash
drive/folder is less than 100.
Reference Page
• Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 144)
• Song Icons (page 130)
Song containing data
Blank Song (containing no data)
6
136
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Selecting the Song in the Folder:
Keep in mind that the Song in the folder will not be shown in the display unless you
open the folder which contains the Song. The illustrations below shows you how to
use the display to access a specific Song in a folder of a USB flash drive (in this case,
calling up the Song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star”).
The illustration below shows the levels of folders and Songs in the USB flash drive.
Follow the dark arrows and the accompanying instruction steps to select the desired
Song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”
Songs or folders in the same level can be selected in sequence by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial.
Playback Settings
Pressing the [C] “SET.” button in the SONG Page of the MDR display while the Song is
selected calls up a display of the currently selected Song, letting you confirm the tempo/
repeat settings (TEMPO Page) or parts that are played when playing the Song (PART
Pages). These Pages can be switched by pressing the Page buttons in the order: TEMPO
PART 1 PART 2 PART 3.
When playing back the Song (by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel), only
those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the display actually play at the indicated tempo
(over a range of 50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the Song contains
no performance data, all parts are set to “OFF.”
Reference Page
• Playing Back the Selected
Part(s) (page 157)
• Changing the Tempo
(page 158)
NOTE
The new Song is a blank
Song which is automatically
created in the USB flash
drive/folder, if the number of
the Songs in the USB flash
drive/folder is less than 100.
FOLDER_001 FOLDER_002
Twinkle Twinkle
Little Star
new song SONG 001 new song
USB flash drive
(USB 01)
USB flash drive (USB 01)
First level
(root directory)
Second level
in the root
directory
Third level in the
root directory
1. Press the [B] button
2. Use the DATA CONTROL dial
3. Press the [B] button
4. Use the DATA CONTROL dial
FOLDER_001 FOLDER_002 SONG 001 new song
new song
Twinkle Twinkle
Little Star
6
137
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Here is the actual procedure again, in linear form:
1 Press the [B] button corresponding to the “ ” in the display
to call up the folder/Songs list in the selected USB flash drive.
FOLDER_001, FOLDER_002 and SONG_001 are displayed.
2 Select FOLDER_002 by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.
3 Press the [B] button to call up the song in the FOLDER_002.
4 Select the desired Song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star,” by turning
the DATA CONTROL dial.
In this case, already “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star”
is selected.
6
138
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Recording
Before recording, set up the Electone just as you’ll need it for the entire recording.
Set the desired Registrations you’ll use throughout the performance/recording in
Registration Memory and make sure also to select the Registration that you will use
at the beginning of the Song.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the blank Song “new song” for
recording your performance.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3 Press the [RECORD] button in the
Music Data Recorder section on
the panel.
The lamp of the [RECORD] button
lights, indicating that the Electone is
ready to record.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [STOP] button.
5
Recording
MDR Recording
This lets you record your performance as a Song to a USB flash drive. A Song is
comprised of your keyboard performance information and is not a recording of the
actual sound itself. The performance information refers to which keys are played, at what
timing, and at what strength — just as in a musical score. Based on the recorded
performance information, the tone generator of the Electone outputs the corresponding
sound. MDR also records Registrations such as Voice selection, effect settings and so on
for future recall. In addition, this method enables you to record parts individually and re-
record a specific part.
Keep in mind that the Song recorded on the Electone using the MDR function is
intended for playing back only on the Electone, so you cannot transfer the Song to other
devices such as a portable music player for playing the Song on such devices. If you want
to do so, record your performance as an audio file in the method described in Chapter 7
“Audio” on page 169.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
NOTE
When you record the Song
using the Next Unit function,
make sure to press the
[PLAY/PAUSE] button before
pressing the [RECORD]
button. For details, see
page 154.
6
139
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
4 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the top left on the panel to start
the recording.
The lamp of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button lights up and a small indicator flashes
across from left to right at the bottom left of the LCD display. This indicates
that Registration data is currently being saved as a Unit to the Song.
5 After “00:00” appears at the bottom left of the LCD display, begin
playing.
6 When you finish playing, press the [STOP] button.
Recording stops and your performance is written to the Song.
The Song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named like
“SONG_001.” You can change the Song name as desired. (For details, see
page 144.)
7 To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button.
Playback will begin after a couple of seconds, as the Electone reads the
Registration. For more information on playback and other playback-related
functions, see page 155.
Reference Page
Unit (page 119)
NOTICE
Do not remove the USB
flash drive from the
instrument during
recording.
Outline of MDR Operation
Basically, the MDR independently records the following three types of data:
Registration data (including Bulk data)
All registrations stored to the Registration Memory numbered buttons as well as the
registration currently set to the panel, are recorded at the beginning of a Song, before the
actual recording of your performance. Bulk data is also saved to the Song with the
Registration data. Bulk data includes: Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Pattern (User
rhythms) and Rhythm Sequence data, and User voices.
Performance data
The MDR records your performance on the keyboards and pedalboard of the Electone
exactly as you play it, even recording the strength at which you play the keys and how
hard you press them down while playing. The various types of performance data –
Upper, Lower, Pedal and Lead – are recorded to independent “tracks,” so that you can
change any one of them without affecting the others.
Control data
All changes you make on the Electone during your performance are recorded in real
time. These include registration changes, the use of the expression pedals and
footswitches.
NOTE
Saving Registrations
(page 147)
6
140
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Re-recording (Retry)
If you make a mistake during recording, you can simply re-record the song from the
beginning.
1 Press the [RECORD] button while the Song is still running.
This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the
Song. The lamp of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button starts flashing, indicating that
you can re-record the Song.
2 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the Song and replaces the previously
recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.
3 Press the [STOP] button.
Recording Each Part Separately
You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets
you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration
changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the Song.
Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 can be recorded separately. The
following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the Song
using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper
Keyboard.
1 Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 138 to call up the Rec Standby
display.
2 Select the Page PART 1 or PART 2 with the Page buttons.
NOTE
After exiting from the
recording mode, you can re-
record your performance
using the same Registration.
1 Select the Song you
want to re-record.
After selecting the Song,
select the TOOL1 Page with
the Page buttons, then
press the [B] “DELETE”
button. A message appears
prompting confirmation of
operation. Press the [C]
“PERF. ONLY”
(Performance Only) button
to delete only the
performance data.
2 Load the Unit of the
Song to the Electone
(page 154).
3 Start recording in the
normal way (and not in
the way described in
“Re-recording” here.
Reference Page
Control data (page 139)
6
141
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3 Select the parts for recording.
In this case, set the Lower Keyboard (LOWER) and Pedalboard (PEDAL) to
“RECORD,” while other parts to “OFF.”
Each press of the [A] – [C] button corresponding to the desired part in the
display toggles the status among PLAY, OFF and RECORD. Turn off the parts
you don’t want to record, and make sure “PLAY” is selected for the parts you
want to play and “RECORD” for the part you want to record.
PLAY: Playback of parts that have been recorded.
OFF: Recording or playback is not active.
RECORD: Recording of the part.
If you set the UPPER part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard
(including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting LEAD to “REC,” however,
records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to
“REC” at the same time; neither can the LOWER and KBP (Keyboard
Percussion) parts be recorded at the same time.
4 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. After “00:00” appears at the
bottom left of the LCD display, begin playing.
5 Press the [STOP] button when you are finished with your
performance to stop recording.
Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance.
Setting up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case.
6 Press the [RECORD] button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. To overwrite, press
the [C] “OVERWRITE” button.
7 Select the PART Page with the Page buttons, then select the parts
for recording.
Set the parts you want to record next (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.”
Also set the part already recorded (in this case, the Lower and Pedal parts) to
“PLAY,” so that you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new
ones.
NOTE
You should also set the
CONTROL to “REC,” in order
to record Registration
changes and expression
pedal operation.
PART 2 PagePART 1 Page
NOTE
When you record the
Keyboard Percussion, make
sure that the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] button is
set to on.
6
142
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
If you want to change the part tempo for ease in recording, perform steps 8 and 9;
otherwise, skip to step 10.
8 Select the TEMPO Page with the Page buttons.
9 Change the playback tempo, if desired.
The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50% to 200% of the original. The
original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower
tempo while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.
Use the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
change the tempo.
10
Press the [C] button repeatedly, if necessary, to set “CUSTOM
PLAY” to ON to start recording of the new part or parts.
11
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel to start recording,
then begin playing.
Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The CUSTOM
PLAY function is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for
recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback.
While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the
Upper Keyboard.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is
automatically stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot
exceed the length of the previously recorded parts.
12
To stop the recording, press the [STOP] button.
6
143
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Punch-in Recording
This lets you re-record over a specific phrase or section—either that of a specific
part(s) or all parts.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song which contains the
phrase you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the Song.
4 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the point you want to execute
punch-in recording.
The current Song is stopped momentarily.
5 Press the [RECORD] button.
The lamp of the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the MDR is ready to
record.
6 Set the parts which you want to change to “RECORD” status and
other parts to “PLAY.”
Part settings can be set in Pages PART 1 and PART 2. You can cancel the record
standby mode at this point by pressing the [STOP] button.
7 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start punch-in recording. Play
the new phrase, as you want it to be changed.
8 Press the [STOP] button to quit punch-in recording as soon as you
reach the end of the phrase.
NOTE
This function is best used
when the phrase to be
rerecorded has definite
beginning and end points,
with slight pauses before
and after.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
Reference Page
Recording Each Part
Separately (page 140)
6
144
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Even though the Electone automatically assigns a generic name to each recorded
Song, it’s best to give each Song a “meaningful” name, such as an original title or
even a date indicating when it was recorded.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song/folder whose name
you want to change.
For details on selecting a Song or a folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3 Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS2 Page.
4 Press the [D] “CHANGE NAME” button.
The CHANGE NAME display appears.
6
Changing the Song/Folder Name
NOTE
However, Song names of EL-
series Electones, such as the
EL-900, cannot be changed.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
NOTE
A blank Song cannot be
named. Once a Song
contains data, it can be
named.
Cursor
6
145
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
5 Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [A] buttons.
Pressing the [A] button moves the cursor one step to the right, and holding
moves the cursor to the right continuously. When the cursor reaches to the end
of the name, it will return to the beginning of the name.
6 Change the character at the cursor position.
Replace the current character at the cursor by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
Turn it clockwise to select the characters in order, and counter-clockwise for
reverse order.
To delete a character:
Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the [C] button.
When the character is deleted, all other numbers to the right of the cursor are
moved one step to the left.
To insert a character:
Move the cursor one step right to the position at which you want to enter the
character, press the [B] button then use the DATA CONTROL dial.
Cursor
NOTE
If “ENGLISH” is selected as
the Language in the Utility
display (page 27), Japanese
katakana characters are
unavailable.
Blank
A – Z (capital)
a – z (lower case)
Japanese katakana
Marks
Number 0 – 9
6
146
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7 Repeat steps 5 through step 6 above to finish entering the Song
name.
Up to 50 characters can be entered.
8 After finishing, press the [D] “EXIT” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
9 To actually enter the change, press the [C] “CHANGE” button.
The renamed Song/folder is displayed.
NOTE
An XG Song name can
contain up to 46 characters.
An error message (“This name is not available”) may appear when pressing the [C]
“CHANGE” button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is
invalid and you’ll need to enter a different name. The following names cannot be used.
(The letters “xx” indicate numbers.)
MDR_xx.EVT ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.TMP TMP
MDR_xx.MID MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.TMP TMP.E02
MDR_xx.Bxx REG_xxx.B00 ELS_SONG.TMP MDR_xx.Vxx
SONG_xxx.C02 SONG.NAM
6
147
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
You can also record Registration Memory data and other created data, separate from
performance recording, as listed below. The data will be saved to a Unit of the
selected Song.
Data saved to a Unit
Registration Memory 16 x 5 Banks
Registration Shift settings
Reverb Type, Disable mode, [DISABLE] button on/off status
User Keyboard Percussion
When loading Registration data containing the following data created on the ELS
series,) User Rhythm data, Rhythm Sequence data, User Voice data, Voice Link
data
There are two ways to save Registrations.
Method 1
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 First make all the desired Electone settings to create your original
Registration.
3 Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination (blank Song).
Select “new song.” For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
7
Saving Registrations
NOTE
Even if you’ve only created a
couple of Registrations
yourself, 16 separate
Registration Memory
settings are always stored
when saving to a Song—the
factory preset Registrations
being stored if no new
settings have been made to
the numbers.
NOTE
Units can be saved to Songs
created on the ELS or ELB
series, but not to Songs
created on the EL series
such as EL-900.
Reference Page
Bank and Unit (page 119)
Reference Page
Functions and settings that
cannot be memorized
(page 112)
Song
Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Registration Memory Bank A
Bank B
Bank C
Bank D
Bank E
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
6
148
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
4 Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
“NEW UNIT” (blank Unit) is selected.
5 Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being
saved. After the message disappears, the Unit to which the Registration is
recorded is automatically named “UNIT 1,” and “SONG XXX” (XXX: number)
is assigned as Song name to the destination Song.
6 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
Method 2
1 First make all the desired settings you want to save, then select the
destination (blank Song) as you did in steps 1 and 3 above.
2 Press the [RECORD] button on the panel to enable recording on
the MDR.
Song name
Unit number
Reference Page
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 144)
6
149
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to record the Registrations, then
press the [STOP] button before the “00:00” indication is shown at
the bottom left of the display.
This is the same procedure as the one shown when you start recording. The
“00:00” at the bottom left of the display indicates that the MDR is recording the
Registrations and being set up for normal recording; pressing the [STOP]
button interrupts this process.
Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song
When you want to use various Registrations exceeding five Registration Banks (one
Unit), you should save additional Registration Units to a Song.
1 First make all the desired settings you want to save.
2 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
3 Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination Song which
includes Registration data.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
NOTE
Although a maximum of 50
Units can be saved to a
single Song, the actual
amount may differ since the
total number of Banks that
can be saved to 5 Units is
limited to 50. For example,
saving 5 Banks to one Unit
results in a maximum of 10
Units that can be saved to a
Song.
Song
Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Registration Memory Bank A
Bank B
Bank C
Bank D
Bank E
6
150
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
4 Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
5 Select the blank Registration bank “NEW UNIT” to which you want
to save the additional Registration bank, located at the bottom of
the list, by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
6 Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
The Registration Unit will be added and follows previously contained Units.
7 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
To play this Song, first press the [D] “EXIT” button to returns to the SONG
Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Keep in mind that when you play
back this Song, the “UNIT 1” will be loaded to the Electone, but the next Unit
will not be loaded unless you make the Next Unit settings of Registration Shift
(page 153).
Reference Page
Files (page 131)
NOTE
When playing back an EL
Song (created on the EL
series, such as EL-900)
which uses the Next Song
function, the Unit data in the
next Song will be loaded.
6
151
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Overwriting Registration data to a Unit
This operation lets you replace just the Registration Unit without changing the
performance data in already recorded Song data.
1 First make all the desired settings you want to save to the new
Registration.
2 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
3 Press the [MDR] button, and then select the desired Song
containing the Registration you wish to replace.
When a Song contains performance data, a note icon ( ) will appear at the left
of the Song name.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
4 Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
5 Select the Registration Unit number you wish to overwrite by using
the DATA CONTROL dial.
6 Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.
7 Press the [C] “OVERWRITE” button to overwrite (replace).
8 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
Reference Page
Song icons (page 130)
6
152
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Deleting Registrations
This function lets you delete the Registration Unit saved to a Song.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song containing the
Registrations you wish to delete.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3 Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
4 Select the Registration Unit number you want to delete by using
the DATA CONTROL dial.
5 Press the [C] “DEL.” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.
6 Press the [C] “DELETE” button.
7 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
NOTE
if you delete all the Units
from a Song, that song will
be deleted.
6
153
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations
in one performance)
You’ve learned in an earlier section that by using 5 Bank of 16 Registrations, you can
program a maximum of 400 settings to be recalled in a specified order, with the
Regist Shift function described on page 123.
When playing back a Song which uses more than 80 Registration numbers, you can
have two or more Registration Units saved to a single Song and recall them one by
one as you play the Song. This function that makes this possible is called Next Unit.
1 Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Set the User Registration order.
Set the Registration Shift mode to USER, and select Next UNIT as the Shift End
in Page 1 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display, then set the Use Registration
order in Page 2.
For details, see “To set the User Registration order” on page 123.
3 Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination Song.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
4 Call up the UNIT EDIT display, then save the User Registration to
“NEW UNIT” (blank Unit).
5 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to save the Registration Units in
the order you want to recall them in the same Song.
For details, see “Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song” on
page 149.
Once the Next Unit function has been turned on and set, you can use the function,
following the steps below.
NOTE
When repeating steps 2 – 5
and making new Registration
Shift settings, delete the
previous settings, then
continue.
6
154
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7 Press the [MDR] button, and select the Song for which the Next
Unit function has been set.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 135 for instructions on selecting Songs.
8 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
If the Song contains more than two Registration Units, the first one will be
loaded. You can check the Registration order in Page 2 of the REGIST SHIFT
(RIGHT) display.
9 As you play the Electone, press the Right Footswitch.
Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order
you’ve specified.
After finishing the play back of the first Unit, the next Unit begins loading
automatically, and can be selected by pressing the Right Footswitch.
Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to the Song can be easily loaded back to the
Electone.
Use this function if you want to recall a specific Registration Unit (other than UNIT
1) from a Song which contains more than two Registration Units.
Loading Registrations
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button and select the Song containing the
Registrations you want to load back to the Electone.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
NOTICE
When you record a Song
using the Next Unit
function, make sure to load
the top Registration Unit
(UNIT 1) to the Electone by
pressing the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button after
selecting the desired song.
If you begin the recording
procedure instead by
pressing the [RECORD]
button, even as another
Unit (UNIT 2, etc.) is
loading, a message “The
data currently loaded in the
instrument is that of Unit
xx. Are you sure you want
to save the data to Unit 1?”
will be shown. If you select
“OK,” Unit 1 will be
overwritten by the current
Unit and will be lost.
NOTE
While a rhythm is playing,
sequence data and User
rhythm in the Registration
data created on the Electone
such as ELS series cannot
be loaded.
8
Recalling Recorded Registrations
Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
6
155
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3 Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
4 Select the Registration Unit number you want to load by using the
DATA CONTROL dial.
5 Press the [A] “LOAD” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.
6 Press the [C] “LOAD” button.
A message appears, indicating the selected Unit including the 16 Registrations
x 5 banks is currently being loaded. After the Registration data is loaded, the
LCD returns to the UNIT EDIT display.
7 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
This section describes how to play back a Song recorded with the MDR and the
commercially available Song data which can be played back with the MDR.
This operation lets you automatically load the Registration data saved to a Song
when playing back your recorded performances. Thus, you can use the loaded
Registrations for your performance.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the Song to be
played back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired Song for playback.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
NOTE
If you load a Registration
while a rhythm is playing,
User rhythms and sequence
data created on the ELS
series in the Registration
data cannot be loaded.
9
Playing Back a Song
NOTICE
Since playing back a Song
containing a Registration
data will load the
Registration data (Unit 1) in
the Song to the Electone,
the Registration data
memorized on the Electone
will be overwritten and
erased. Save your
important Registration
data on the Electone to the
USB flash drive, referring
to “Saving Registrations.”
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
NOTE
Audio files will not be shown
in the MDR Display even
when the USB flash drive
contains audio files.
6
156
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
A “-----” mark appears at the bottom left of the display, indicating the
Registration data is currently being loaded when the Song contains the
Registration data. When the Song contains more than two Registration Units,
the first one will be loaded.
Depending on the Song, no note icon is shown by the file name, indicating that
only Registration data is included and there is no performance data. Starting
playback of such a Song will load only Registration data, produce no sound,
and return operation to the SONG Page.
4 When a Song contains performance data, playback starts
automatically after reading the Registration data. (No sound will be
produced if no performance data is included).
The elapsed time will be showed on the display, and Song playback starts (if the
Song contains performance data). In general, all parts recorded to the Song are
played back; however, you can mute specific parts and play back only selected
parts (page 157). When the end of the recorded performance is reached,
playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of
the Song by pressing the [STOP] button.
Although this Electone can play Songs created on other Electones, such as the ELS
series, the sound or tempo of the Song may differ from the original.
Reference Page
Next Unit Settings (using
more than 80 Registrations in
one performance)
(page 153)
NOTE
Registration data is generally
not included in most Song
data, such as commercially
available XG Songs created
on instruments other than the
Electone.
Custom Play
If you want to play back the Song without resetting the Registrations, use the Custom
Play function. Turn the CUSTOM PLAY to ON in the TEMPO Page, then press the
[PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel. This displays the Song time and starts playback
immediately.
When you play a Song using the Next Unit function, make sure to turn CUSTOM PLAY
to OFF in the TEMPO Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start the Song.
Reference Page
Playback Settings
(page 136)
6
157
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Playing Back Selected Parts
You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other
parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a
single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.
To play back the selected part(s):
Before or during playback, use the [A] – [C] buttons to turn the parts you want to
play back to “PLAY” and the parts you want to mute to “OFF.” Pressing the
corresponding button toggles the part setting between PLAY and OFF.
The XG part setting can be set in the PART 3 Page.
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause
Rewind and Fast Forward:
During audio playback (or when paused), press the [REW] (Rewind) button or [FF]
(Fast forward) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position.
When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To resume
playback from the point you’ve reversed to or advanced, press the [PLAY/PAUSE]
button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the Song or Songs, press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button. To resume playback from the point at which the Song was paused,
press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again.
Reference Page
Playback Settings
(page 136)
6
158
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Changing the Tempo
You can change the tempo of the Song as the Song is playing in the MDR display,
either while the Song is stopped or while it is playing. Since the procedure for
changing the tempo is differ depends on whether the Song has an icon or not,
confirm if the desired Song has an icon or not.
icon is included:
You can change the tempo in the following procedure.
icon is not included:
You can change the tempo by re-recording the tempo saved in the Registration data
of the Song.
Copy the Song for which you want to change the tempo, then play the edit (copied)
Song to load the Registration data to the Electone for editing. Recall the desired
Registration for editing by pressing the Registration numbered button, and change
the tempo with the TEMPO button on the panel, then record the changed tempo to
the Registration numbered button. Repeat these steps for all numbered buttons you
want to change the tempo. After finishing the settings, save (overwrite) the
Registration data to the edit Song.
1 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song with icon to be
played back.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
2 Press the [C] “SET.” button to call up the TEMPO Page.
3 Change the Tempo in the TEMPO Page.
Press the [A] button to select “TEMPO,” then press the same button
successively or use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. The range
is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result
in a slower tempo, while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.
6
159
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Repeat Playback
This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all Songs on a folder or only
one specific Song.
1 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song you wish to
repeatedly play back.
If you wish to play back all Songs on a folder, select the first Song that will be
played back.
For details on selecting a Song or folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
2 Press the [C] “SET.” button, then press the Page buttons to select
the TEMPO Page.
3 Select the repeat mode.
Press the [B] button to select “REPEAT,” then press the same button
successively or use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Off
Cancels repeat playback.
Single
Repeats the currently selected Song indefinitely.
All
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder in order.
Random
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder randomly.
OFF
SINGLE
ALL
RANDOM
6
160
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
4 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to begin playback.
To cancel the repeat setting, select “OFF” for the repeat mode.
Playing Back XG Songs
The Electone allows you to playback XG Song data, created on the computer or
converted from Electone Song format to XG format. Naturally, you can use the fast
forward, rewind and pause controls, just as with Songs (performances) recorded on
the Electone.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the XG song
data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired Song for playback.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3 Press the [C] “SET.” Button, then press the Page buttons to select
the PART Page.
You can set the volume or mute settings for each part.
Part
Select the desired channel “CH1” through “CH16” or “ALL” to specify the part to mute/
play or to change the volume.
Press the [A] button to select “XG PART CH,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the setting.
Playback/Off
Sets the selected part for playback or mute (off ). Select “PLAY” for the part you want to
play back and select “OFF” for the part you want to mute. Press the [B] button to select
“XG,” then press the same button successively to select the setting.
Volume
You can adjust the volume for the selected part within a range of 0 – 100.
Press the [C] button to select “XG VOLUME,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the setting.
When the selected Song contains an XG part, you can adjust the XG part on/off
setting and volume from Page 3, in the same way as you did with the XG Songs.
Reference Page
Converting to XG format
(page 166)
Reference Page
Playback Settings
(page 136)
6
161
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The TOOLS Pages in the MDR display has many functions, such as Song copy, Song
delete, confirming the Song size, etc., as well as creating or deleting folders.
Copy
This function lets you copy a folder/Song, or even a USB flash drive. You can copy
and exchange the data even between two different USB flash drives. (For Songs
created on EL-series instruments, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) Make sure
to check the remaining memory of the destination drive in advance. If memory
space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 Songs, Copy is not
available.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
If you want to copy a Song between two different drives, you will need to insert
the destination USB flash drive.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the folder/Song/USB flash
drive to be copied.
For details on selecting folder/Song/USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on
page 135.
3 Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS1 Page.
4 Press the [A] “COPY” button to call up the COPY TO Display.
10
Other Operations — Copy, Delete, etc.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
Copy Destination
6
162
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
5 As necessary, select the destination (highlighted).
Select folder or USB flash drive as the copy destination. You can even select the
destination from another USB flash drive.
For details on selecting folder/ USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
If you want to copy the Song/folder to the same place which contains the source
Song/folder, press the [A] “ ” button when the COPY TO display
appears to make the folder/drive which contains source Songs/folders as the
destination.
6 Press the [C] “EXE.” button to execute the copy.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the SONG Page.
The folder/Song name in the destination is the same as the one of the source
Song/folder. If you copy a folder/ Song to a folder that contains a Song whose
name is the same as the source Song, the copied name will be “source Song
name_XXX” (XXX indicates Song number). If you copy an XG-compatible
Song to another folder or USB flash drive that contains a Song with the same
name as the source Song, a message appears prompting confirmation of
overwriting the Song. Selecting “OVERWRITE” overwrites the XG-compatible
Song in the destination. Selecting “CANCEL” cancel the operation.
If you want to change the folder/Song name, see page 144.
7 When copying the folder or USB flash drive, the approximate time
of copying appears on the display; keep in mind that the actual
time necessary may differ. Proceed by following the message in
the display.
Press the [D] button to cancel, or [C] button to execute the operation.
If you want to cancel the copy operation while the copy operation is in
progress, press the [D] “INTERRUPT” button. Keep in mind, however, that
cancelling the operation may take a long time, since the operation is stopped
only after all files in the current folder are copied.
If you cancel the operation, make sure to check which files have been properly
copied and which have not.
About Copying Protected Songs
Protected Original Songs or Protected Edit Songs can be copied as long as you select the
same folder that contains the source Protected Song as the destination. If you select
another folder/drive, the message “Song xx will be moved.” will be displayed. If you select
“OK,” the currently selected Protected Original Song and Protected Edit Song created
from a Protected Original Song are all moved to another folder/drive you have specified.
In this case, the data is not copied, but moved.
Reference Page
About Protected Songs
(page 163)
NOTE
• If the USB flash drive copy
operation is executed, the
folder name “#MEDIA” will
be created in the
destination folder.
• If a “Path name is too long”
message is displayed,
change the hierarchy or
rename the folder name to
make it shorter.
• The copy operation will
automatically be stopped if
an unrecognizable file is
detected in the folder.
NOTICE
Never attempt to remove
the USB flash drive or turn
the power off during
copying (or moving a
Protected Song). Data may
be lost.
6
163
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
About Protected Songs
If you buy or download Song data, it may be protected from being deleted (to prevent
accidental erasure) or from being copied (to protect copyright ownership). These are
called “Protected Songs.” A Protected Song can be played back in the same way as Songs
you’ve created, but it cannot be converted to XG format. Registration data in the
Protected Song cannot be edited, nor can the performance data be overwritten. If you
want to edit a Protected Song, first copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy.
(You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copied Song (called “Protected Edit
Song”) is available only when the original Song (called “Protected Original Song”) exists
in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the Protected Original song.
NOTICE
If you move or copy the protected Song data on the computer without the Musicsoft
Downloader application, the Song cannot be played back. Always use Musicsoft Downloader
when moving or copying protected Songs on the computer.
Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address:
http://download.yamaha.com/
NOTICE
When you want to edit a protected Song, turn the power to the instrument off and back on
again, then select the Song to be edited. (The Registration data of the previous protected
Song will be initialized.) Otherwise the edited protected Song may not be saved.
Folder
Protected
Original Song
Protected Edit
Song
This Song can be edited, but only when it is in the
folder that contains a Protected Original Song.
This Song cannot be edited
Copy
6
164
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Song Delete/Folder Delete
These operations let you delete Songs and folders. (Only Songs created with the EL-
series, such as the EL-900, cannot be deleted.)
Before proceeding, make sure to confirm from the AUDIO display that no audio
files exist in the folder you are deleting, since the MDR display will not show any
audio files, even when the folder contains audio files.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song/folder you want to
delete.
For details on selecting a Song/folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3 Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS1 Page.
4 Press the [B] “DELETE” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.
5 Press the appropriate [A] – [D] button corresponding to the
specific data you want to delete: “DELETE” or “PERF. ONLY.”
Selecting “DELETE” deletes the entire Song, and selecting “PERF.
ONLY” deletes only performance data in the Song.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the SONG Page.
NOTICE
If the folder you are
deleting contains audio
files, deleting the folder
deletes all the audio files
as well as Songs in the
folder. Use of separate
USB flash drives — one for
Songs, one for audio files
— is highly recommended
for data protection.
However, at very least, you
should use separate
folders.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
6
165
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Creating folders
1 Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the media/folder within which
you want to create the new folder.
For details on selecting a Song/folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3 Press the [B] button to open the media/folder.
4 Call up the TOOLS1 Page with the Page buttons.
5 Press the [D] “CREATE FOLDER” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.
6 Press the [C] “OK” button.
The newly created folder is automatically named “FOLDER_001,” or similar.
Up to 120 folders can be created.
For instructions on changing the folder name, see page 144.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
6
166
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Converting to XG format
This function allows you to convert ELB-02 Song data to XG format data. You can
play back the data using XG devices. The converted XG Song data may not sound
the same as the original data.
Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If
memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available.
Protected Songs cannot be converted to XG format.
1 Connect the USB flash drive containing the Song you want to
convert to XG format to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song to be converted to
XG format.
Select the desired Song (having the icon at left of its name).
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
3 Call up the TOOLS1 Page with the Page buttons.
4 Press the [C] “CONVERT” button.
A display for selecting conversion type appears.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.
5 Press the [C] “CNV. XG” button.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
6
167
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
6 After the CONVERT TO display is called up for selecting the
convert destination, select the destination of the converted data.
Select the USB flash drive or folder as the destination. See steps 2 and 3 on
page 135 for instructions on selecting the destination.
7 Press the [C] “EXE.” button to start conversion.
8 A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted
data, and the converted Song is played back.
The song converted to XG format is automatically named such as
“XGSONG001.”
For instructions on changing the Song name, see page 144.
For details on XG Songs, refer to “Playing Back XG Songs” on page 160.
NOTE
Do not play the keyboard or
press any of the panel
controls during the
confirmation of the
conversion, since these
actions will be recorded to
the converted XGcompatible
Song.
6
168
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Checking the Remaining Memory
When a USB flash drive is selected on the TOOLS2 Page, pressing the
[INFORMATION] button calls up a display indicating the remaining memory in the
USB flash drive. When a Song is selected on the TOOLS2 page, pressing the
[INFORMATION] button calls up a display indicating the data size, amount of
Registration Banks, Song title, composer of the Song, etc. The indicated items differ
depending on what is selected.
1 Connect the USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2 Press the [MDR] button, then select a Song or USB flash drive.
For details on selecting a Song or USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on
page 135.
3 Call up the TOOLS2 Page with the Page buttons.
4 Press the [C] “INFORMATION” button to call up the information.
When a USB flash drive is selected:
REMAIN: Remaining memory in the USB flash drive
ID: Displays “Found” or “Missing” to indicate if the USB flash drive can handle
the Protected Song for ELB series or ELS series or not. “Found” indicates
the USB flash drive can handle the data, while “Missing” indicates that it
cannot.
When a Song is selected:
SIZE: Song data size
BANK: Amount of Registration Banks
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)
169
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Audio
The convenient [AUDIO] button allows you to play back audio files (.WAV) saved to a USB flash
drive. Moreover, since you can record your performances and recordings as audio data (.WAV) to
a USB flash drive, it is possible to play back the files on computer, share them with your friends,
and record your own CDs to enjoy as well.
Compatible USB flash drives
Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable
from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash
drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to data, follow the notices below.
• Yamaha recommends that you format a USB flash drive (page 133), after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any
important data, and to use it only for audio recording/playback. Using MDR Songs and audio data together in the same drive
may cause severe fragmentation of the USB flash drive, and may stop audio recording/playback altogether.
• Insert the USB flash drive firmly and take care that the USB flash drive does not loosen from the connection from sudden
shaking while performing, etc. during audio recording/playback. If the USB flash drive is disconnected while recording, it may
result in data corruption in the USB flash drive.
USB flash drive External
audio device
Audio file Audio file Audio file
Computer
1
Recording Your Performance as Audio
NOTE
When recording audio that is
input from the [AUX IN] jack
to the USB flash drive, the
output volume of the external
audio device connected to
this instrument cannot be
controlled by the Electone.
Adjust the volume level from
the control on the external
audio device.
Audio Recording
With this method, recorded performances are saved to a USB flash drive as an audio file.
An Audio file is a recording of the performed sound itself. Since it is saved in stereo WAV
format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and
played on portable music players by using a computer. You can also record the sound of
an external device since all the sounds produced via your keyboard performance and the
sound input from the [AUX IN] jack will be recorded.
Keep in mind, however, that Audio recording cannot be used to save Registrations. If you
want to save Registrations, perform the “Recording” operation described on page 138 in
chapter 6.
7
7
170
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Audio
Try recording your performance as an audio file to a USB flash drive.
Maximum amount of recording time is 60 minutes per recording, though this may
be less depending on the capacity of the particular USB flash drive.
File format that can be recorded
.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo
1 Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [AUDIO] button located at the top right on the panel to
call up the AUDIO display.
3 Select the blank audio file “new audio” for recording your
performance.
To find “new audio,” press the [B] “ ” button in the display of step 2 to
open the USB flash drive, then select “new audio” by using the DATA
CONTROL dial.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
to steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
4 Press the [C] “REC.” button to engage the Record Standby status.
NOTE
The file extension does not
appear in the Electone
display. However, it can be
viewed on a computer.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 169)
NOTE
Songs you've created on the
Electone will not be shown in
the AUDIO Display even
when the USB flash drive
contains Songs.
AUDIO Display
NOTE
The “new audio” file is a
blank audio file automatically
created in the USB flash
drive/folder, if the number of
the audio files in the USB
flash drive/folder is less than
120.
7
171
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Audio
5 Start recording by pressing the [C] “RECORD” button, and then
start your performance.
When recording begins, the elapsed recording time is shown in the lower left of
the AUDIO RECORD display.
Once the elapsed recording time is shown, you can load the Registration or play
the Song with the MDR.
6 When you finish playing, press the [D] “FINISH” button.
Recording stops and the audio file to which your performance is recorded is
automatically named and selected in the AUDIO display.
7 To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [C] “PLAY”
button twice.
NOTICE
Never attempt to
disconnect the USB flash
drive or turn the power off
during recording. Doing so
may corrupt the USB flash
drive data or the recording
data.
Elapsed
recording time
Reference Page
Deleting files/Renaming files
(page 176)
AUDIO PLAY Display [PLAY Page]
Recording the Song playback as audio file
Once you've recorded your performance as a Song using MDR function, you can record
the playback of the Song as an audio file.
1 Connect two compatible USB flash drives, one containing the
Song, and another for recording audio files, to the USB TO
DEVICE terminals.
2 Start audio recording (perform steps 2 – 5 above.)
3 Select the Song on the MDR Display, then start playback of the
Song.
Playback the Song to the end of the Song.
4 Stop the audio recording (perform steps 6 and 7 above).
7
172
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Audio
Try playing back audio files from a USB flash drive connected to this instrument.
File format that can be played back
.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the audio file
to be played back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2 Press the [AUDIO] button located at the top right on the panel to
call up the AUDIO display.
3 Select the desired audio file for playback.
To simply play an existing audio file, select the desired audio file (containing
data), referring to the audio file name and icon “ .”
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
to steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
2
Playing Back Audio Files
NOTE
This instrument cannot play
back DRM protected files.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 169)
NOTE
Songs you've recorded
using the MDR function on
this Electone and Protected
Songs will not be shown in
the AUDIO Display, even
when the USB flash drive
contains Songs.
AUDIO Display
NOTE
The “new audio” file is a
blank audio file automatically
created in the USB flash
drive/folder, if the number of
the audio files in the USB
flash drive/folder is less than
120.
7
173
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Audio
4 Press the [C] “PLAY” button to call up the PLAY Page of the AUDIO
PLAY display.
Select the PLAY Page with the page buttons if another page is shown.
5 Press the [C] “PLAY” button to start playback.
When playback begins, the elapsed time is shown in the lower left of the
display.
6 Press the [D] “FINISH” button to stop playback.
The display returns to the AUDIO display.
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause
Rewind and Fast Forward:
During audio playback (or when paused), press the [A] “REW” (Rewind) button or
[B] “FF” (Fast forward) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired
position. When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To
resume playback from the point you’ve reversed or advanced to, press the [C]
“PLAY” button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the audio file press the [C] “PAUSE”
button. To resume playback from the point at which the audio file was paused, press
the [C] “PLAY” button again.
NOTE
AUDIO PLAY display
consists of two different
pages: “PLAY” or “SET.”
(Setting). Use the Page
buttons to select the
appropriate page.
AUDIO PLAY Display
[PLAY Page]
NOTICE
Never attempt to
disconnect the USB flash
drive or turn the power off
during playback. Doing so
may corrupt the USB flash
drive data.
7
174
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Audio
Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch
You can change the volume, tempo and pitch of the audio file as the file is playing.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
2 Press the [AUDIO] button.
3 Select the desired audio file for playback.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
to steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
4 Press the [C] “PLAY” button to call up the AUDIO PLAY display.
Select the PLAY Page with the page buttons if another page is shown.
5 Press the Page buttons to select the “SET.” (Setting) Page.
In this Page, you can make other audio playback settings.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 169)
AUDIO PLAY Display
[PLAY Page]
7
175
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Audio
To adjust the Volume:
Press the [A] button to select “VOLUME,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [A] button.
Range: 0 – 127
To Change the Tempo:
Press the [B] button to select “TEMPO,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [B] button. The value can be adjusted
from 75% to 125% and the default value is 100%. Higher values result in a faster tempo.
If you select another audio file, this setting will be restored to the default value.
To Change the Pitch:
Press the [C] button to select “PITCH,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button. This let you shift the pitch
of an audio file in semitone steps (from -12 to 12). If you select another audio file, this
setting will be restored to the default value (0).
6 After setting, go back to the PLAY Page with the Page buttons, and
then play the audio file to hear and check the changes you’ve
made in the SET. Page.
7 If you are satisfied with the sound, press the [D] “FINISH” button.
Audio playback is stopped (if the file is being played back) and the display
returns to the AUDIO display.
NOTE
Changing the playback
tempo or pitch of an audio
file may change its tonal
characteristics.
NOTE
Volume, tempo and pitch
changes are temporary;
these values revert to their
defaults when the power is
turned off and then back on
again.
7
176
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Audio
Deleting the File / Changing the File Name
You can delete the file or change the file name.
1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the audio files
to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
2 Press the [AUDIO] button.
3 Select the desired audio file.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
to steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
4 Press the [D] “TOOL” button to call up the AUDIO TOOLS Page.
In this Page, you can delete or rename the audio file.
To delete the file:
Press the [B] “DELETE” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of the
operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button. If you want to delete the file, press the [C] “DELETE” button. The audio file will
be deleted and the display returns to the AUDIO display.
To rename the file:
Press the [C] “CHANGE NAME” button to call up the rename display. For details on
how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144.
After entering the characters, press the [D] “FINISH” button to call up a message
prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by
pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. To finalize the name, press the [C] “CHANGE”
button. The audio file will be renamed and the display returns to the AUDIO display.
To exit from the AUDIO TOOLS Page, press the [D] “FINISH” button.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 169)
AUDIO TOOLS Display
Reference Page
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 144)
177
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Footswitches
These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and
switch the effects on/off, without needing to take your hands from the keyboard. The Electone has
two Footswitches on the expression pedal.
The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. For details on the
Registration Shift function and Right Footswitch, see “Registration Shift” on
page 121.
The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of three functions: Rhythm, Glide, or
Rotary Speaker. Instructions for setting the Left Footswitch (in the FOOT SWITCH
(LEFT) Page) are given here.
1 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.
Left Footswitch Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
1
Right Footswitch
2
Left Footswitch
NOTE
Pressing the [FOOT
SWITCH] button calls up one
of two different displays:
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) or
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT). Use
the Page buttons to select
the appropriate display.
8
8
178
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Footswitches
2 Call up the FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) display.
Use the page buttons to select page 3.
In this page, you can assign which function the Left Footswitch will control:
Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary Speaker. Each press of the [A] button selects the
functions in sequence: Off Rhythm Glide Rotary Speaker. When Off is
selected here, the Left Footswitch is inactive.
Off
Control with the Left Footswitch is disabled.
Rhythm
When this is selected, one of the control settings appears below. Press the [B] button as
necessary to select the desired control setting.
- 1 Stop
Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Left Footswitch.
- 2 Break
This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. When you
press the Left Footswitch, the Break section is played.
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT)
Display
OFF
RHYTHM
GLIDE
ROTARY SPEAKER
Reference Page
Rhythm Structure (page 70)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
STOP
BREAK
MAIN A – MAIN D
INTRO 1 – INTRO 3
ENDING 1 – ENDING 3
OFF
8
179
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Footswitches
- 3 Main A – Main D
These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the
panel. For example, when “MAIN A” is selected in this display and you press
the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.
- 4 Intro 1 – Intro 3
These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For
example, when “INTRO1” is selected in this display and you press the Left
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.
- 5 Ending 1 – Ending 3
These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel.
For example, when “ENDING1” is selected in this display and you press the
Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending
pattern is played, the rhythm stops.
- 6 Off
Control with the Left Footswitch is disabled.
Glide
This lets you control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. Pressing the Left
Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step
and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.
When the Glide setting is chosen, two separate Glide pages are available, with the
current page number shown at the top right side of the display. You can select the pages
by using the Page buttons.
- 1 Time
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or how gradually the pitch returns
to normal when the Left Footswitch is released. Higher settings produce
slower pitch changes.
Range: 1 – 5
- 2 Lead 1/2, Upper1/2, Lower 1/2
Turn on the desired Voice section(s) for which the Glide function is to be
applied by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] buttons. Each press of the
corresponding button toggles between on and off.
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) Display
- 1
[Glide Page 3]
- 2
[Glide Page 4]
8
180
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Footswitches
Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch. When
the “ROTARY SPEAKER” is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the
Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to the “Speed
Control” in the Rotary Speaker display. To use this function, you’ll need to make the
appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section. For details, see page 60.
Reference Page
Rotary Speaker (page 60)
181
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch.
Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the
tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display.
1 Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
2 Select Page 2 of the Utility display by pressing the Page buttons.
In this page, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings.
Press the [A] button to change the Transpose setting, or press [B] button to
change the Pitch setting.
Transpose
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half steps
(semitones).
Range: -6 – +6
Pitch
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by 0.2
Hz. The default Pitch setting is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).
Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz
You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice
Condition display. (See page 58 for details.)
NOTE
These are overall pitch
controls; the actual pitch of a
Voice section will be affected
accordingly and may differ if
that Voice section’s pitch has
been changed. For example,
if the Transpose value is set
to “+1” here and the
Transpose value for Upper
Keyboard Voice 1 is set to
“+1” in the Voice Condition
display, the overall pitch of
the instrument becomes
“+1,” but the Upper
Keyboard Voice 1 pitch
setting becomes “+2.”
NOTE
The Transpose setting here
does not affect XG Songs
(page 160).
9
182
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
On the underside and right side of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with
various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are described
below.
This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone. For
details on connecting to external devices, see page 184.
[AUX IN] (stereo mini) jack
For connection to an external device. The signal from the connected external device
sounds from the Electone’s built-in speakers.
AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] (standard phone) jacks
This pair of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker system.
The output level can be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME dial.
[PHONES] jack
For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this
jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing
you to play without disturbing others.
1
Accessory Jacks and Controls
Reference Page
Outputting the sound of an
external device through the
built-in speakers of the
Electone (page 184)
Reference Page
Playing the Sounds of the
Electone Through an
External Audio System
(page 184)
Reference Page
Using Headphones
(page 19)
10
183
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
For connecting a USB flash drive. You can save data you’ve created on the
instrument to the USB flash drive. You can also use this to connect a USB wireless
LAN adaptor (sold separately) for connecting the instrument to an iPhone/iPad via
wireless LAN.
MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals
For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also
use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.
[USB TO HOST] terminal
For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make
sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer.
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
Same as “ [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.”
Reference Page
• Connecting a USB Device
(page 132)
• Connecting to an iPhone/
iPad (page 192)
Front (keyboard side)
Reference Page
• Controlling External MIDI
Devices from the Electone
(page 185)
• Controlling the Electone
from an External Device
(page 185)
• What is MIDI (page 187)
• Connection with Computer
(page 186)
184
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an
External Audio System
By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can connect your Electone to external speakers. If
you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX OUT [L/L+R]
jack (standard phone).
By connecting the Electone to an external audio device instead of speakers, you can
record your Electone performance to that device.
Outputting the sound of an external device through
the built-in speakers of the Electone
By connecting a cable from the external audio device to the [AUX IN] jack, you can
play back the sound of the external device via the speakers of the Electone.
2
Connection Examples — External
Devices
CAUTION
Before connecting the
instrument to other
electronic components,
turn off the power of all the
components. Also, before
turning any components
on or off, make sure to set
all volume levels to
minimum (0). Otherwise,
electrical shock or damage
to the components may
occur.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the
devices, first turn on the
power to the instrument,
then to the external device.
When turning off the
power, first turn off the
power to the external
device, then to the
instrument.
NOTICE
Do not route the output
from the AUX OUT jacks to
the [AUX IN] jack. If you
make this connection, the
signal input at the [AUX IN]
jack is output from the AUX
OUT jacks. These
connections could result in
a feedback loop that will
make normal performance
impossible, and may even
damage both pieces of
equipment.
NOTE
Use audio cables and
adaptor plugs having no
(zero) resistance.
AUX OUT [L/L+R]
Speaker (Right)Speaker (Left)
[R]
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the
devices, first turn on the
power to the external
device, then to the
instrument. When turning
off the power, first turn off
the power to the
instrument, then to the
external device.
NOTE
Use audio cables and
adaptor plugs having no
(zero) resistance.
[AUX IN]
External audio device
Playback sound
Stereo mini plug Stereo mini plug
185
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone
generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer,
more multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI
keyboard must match the transmit channels on your Electone.)
The Electone transmits a variety of performance messages along with note
information as digital data, including values that indicate how far the expression
pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected
external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device.
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is
used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB
wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
Controlling the Electone from an External Device
You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of
your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit
channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your
Electone.)
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is
used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB
wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be
transmitted.
MIDI [OUT] MIDI IN
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
Tone generator
NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be
transmitted.
MIDI [IN] MIDI OUT
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
MIDI keyboard or synthesizer
186
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
By using the [USB TO HOST] terminal or MIDI terminals, you can connect the
Electone and computer enabling the MIDI communication between both. Install the
USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then make the MIDI connection between the
Electone and computer. Regarding the USB-MIDI driver, you can download the
latest version from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical
possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score
writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your
original Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share
songs with your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for
example, by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your
Electone.
Using the [USB TO HOST] terminal
Using the Electone’s [USB TO HOST] terminal and a standard USB cable, connect
the Electone and the computer.
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is
used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB
wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
3
Connection with Computer
NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be
transferred to/from the
computer.
Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal
When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe
the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or
losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application
software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.
NOTICE
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used.
• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, disable any power-saving
mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby).
• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the [USB TO HOST]
terminal.
• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/
unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
- Quit any open application software on the computer.
- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing
notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.)
• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or
more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on
again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
Computer
USB cable
[USB TO HOST]
187
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use
MIDI on your Electone.
What is MIDI?
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a
grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are
easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some
strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note
sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the
speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis
for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the
Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the
electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what
Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it
released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to
the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the
stored sampled note.
Example of Keyboard Information
As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice
selection are handled as MIDI events.
4
MIDI
Voice number (with what Voice)
01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key)
60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed) &
Note off (when was it released)
Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong)
120 (strong)
RL
Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production
Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.
Based on playing information from the keyboard, a
sampled note stored in the tone generator is played
through the speakers.
Internal amp Internal amp
Tone generator
(Electric circuit)
Playing the
keyboard
188
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments
to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control
Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.
MIDI Messages of the Electone
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System
Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the
keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several
MIDI devices to communicate with each other.
Channel Messages
Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating
which keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel.
Similarly, the Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an
external keyboard.
Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The
reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.
Note Off: Generated when a key is released.
Ve lo c it y : Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.
For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document,
downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9).
Program Change
Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With
these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone.
For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document,
downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9).
Control Change
Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning,
modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters,
through specific Control Change numbers.
For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the
Electone, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document, downloadable from the Yamaha
website (page 9).
System Messages
System Exclusive Messages
System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration
data.
NOTE
Yamaha website address is
on page 9 in this Owner’s
Manual.
189
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
MIDI Channels
MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16,
the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously
sent over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its
broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different
programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate
channel to watch the desired program.
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends
MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI
cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI
Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will
sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.
The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard,
channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means
that when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must
set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive
channel(s) of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard
(Upper, Lower and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 191 for more information.
1
2
2
NEWS
Weather Report
NEWS
MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2
MIDI cable
190
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer
or computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or
how the Electone is controlled.
To select the MIDI page:
1 Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears. The MIDI Pages are found on Pages 4 – 5.
2 Use the PAGE buttons to select Pages 4 – 5.
Internal/External
Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (Internal) or
the connected device (External).
Lead1
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voice 1.
Successive presses of the [A] button alternates between Internal and External.
Internal: Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper Keyboard of the Electone. (If the
To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower Keyboard.)
External: Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI
channel 4.
Synchro
Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization
purposes.
Successive presses of the [B] button alternates between Internal and External.
Internal: Pressing the Rhythm [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button on the
panel enables control of and synchronization to any connected devices
(e.g., sequencer, etc.).
External: Starting the rhythm of a connected rhythm machine also starts the
rhythm of the Electone.
5
MIDI Control
Internal/External Display
191
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Expression
Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this control
is set to Auto.
Successive presses of the [C] button alternate among Auto, Internal and External.
Auto: Internal and External is automatically switched.
Internal: You can manually control the expression pedal even during MDR.
playback.
External: While playing the MDR or receiving MIDI messages, the expression
pedal has no effect. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a
USB flash drive or received MIDI data.)
For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted.
Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper
Keyboard, the Lower Keyboard and the Pedalboard. The MIDI messages on
each keyboard will be sent over the channels set here. You must set the
transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device.
Upper Keyboard
You can select the channel for the Upper Keyboard.
Press the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the
setting.
Lower Keyboard
You can select the channel for the Lower Keyboard.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the
setting.
Pedalboard
You can select the channel for the Pedalboard.
Press the [C] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the
setting.
Rhythm
Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the Electone.
Rhythm start/stop messages can be filtered on the Electone.
Successive presses of the [D] button alternate between being transmitted (FILTER
OFF) and not transmitted (FILTER ON).
MIDI Out Channel Display
192
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
You can connect a smart device such as an iPhone or iPad to the instrument. By
using an application tool on your smart device, you can take advantage of convenient
functions and get more enjoyment out of this instrument.
For details on connections, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the
website (page 9).
For information about compatible smart devices and application tools, access the
following page:
http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/
Connection with a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold
separately):
The USB wireless LAN adaptor lets you connect the Electone to an iPhone/iPad
wirelessly. For details about the USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately), contact
your nearest Yamaha representative or the distributor listed at the end (or
beginning) of this manual. Or you can access the following website and contact
Yamaha support at your location.
http://www.yamaha.com/contact/
To connect the Electone to an iPhone/iPad wirelessly, follow the instructions in the
“iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website, and also refer back to the
Owner’s Manual (this book) for the specific Wireless LAN settings (below) which
you’ll need to make for wireless connection.
Wireless LAN settings
Start wireless connection according to the instructions in the “iPhone/iPad
Connection Manual” on the website, then make sure to make appropriate setups
from the following instructions: “Display the Networks and connecting to the access
point,” “Automatic Setup by WPS,” “Manual Setup” or “Connecting by the Adhoc
Mode.” Refer to pages 192 – 196 in this Owner’s Manual, then set up as required.
If there is no access point, follow the instructions in “Connecting by the Adhoc
Mode” (page 196).
Automatic Setup by WPS
1 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE,” if necessary.
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
6
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
NOTE
Yamaha website address is
on page 9 in this Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
MIDI and [USB TO HOST]
terminals are automatically
disabled when the USB
wireless LAN adaptor is
connected.
Reference Page
• Wireless LAN Detailed
Settings (page 198)
• Initialize the settings in the
wireless LAN settings
(page 200)
NOTICE
When you use the
instrument along with an
application on your
iPhone/iPad, we
recommend that you first
set “Airplane Mode” to
“ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to
“ON” on your iPhone/iPad
in order to avoid noise
caused by communication.
NOTICE
Do not place your iPhone/
iPad in an unstable
position. Doing so may
cause the device to fall and
result in damage.
NOTE
Before using the USB [TO
DEVICE] terminal, be sure to
read “Precautions when
using the USB [TO DEVICE]
terminal” on page 132.
193
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
2 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6.
3 Press the [B] “WPS” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
4 Press the [C] “OK” button to start WPS setup, then press the WPS
button on your access point within two minutes.
5 After connection between the instrument and the access point is
done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by
referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
WIRELESS LAN Display
Appears when connection between the instrument and the
access point is done successfully.
194
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Displaying available networks in the wireless LAN and
connecting to a network
1 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
2 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6.
3 Press the [A] “UPDATE” button to call up the network list.
For a network with a lock icon ( ), you need to enter the proper password.
4 Connect the instrument to the desired network.
4-1 Select the desired network by using the DATA CONTROL dial, then
press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
The name of the selected network will be fully shown in the display, letting you
confirm this is the network you want to use.
4-2 Press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
• For a network without a lock icon:
Connecting starts.
• For a network with a lock icon ( ):
You need to enter the proper password. For details on how to enter characters,
refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the
password, press the [D] button to finalize the setting. This operation starts
connecting automatically.
Network list
WIRELESS LAN Display
Appears when connection between the instrument and
the access point is done successfully.
195
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
5 After connection between the instrument and the access point is
done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by
referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
Manual Setup
1 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
2 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6.
3 Select “OTHER” at the bottom of the network list by using the
DATA CONTROL dial, then press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
The OTHER display will be shown. The OTHER display consists of two
different pages that can be switched by using the Page buttons.
Network list
WIRELESS LAN Display
196
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
4 Set the SSID, Security and Password to the same as the settings
on the access point.
SSID
Press the [A] button on page 1 to call up the display for SSID input, then enter the SSID.
For details on how to enter the characters, refer to “Changing the Song/Folder Name”
on page 144. Up to 32 characters (half size), alphanumeric characters, marks can be
entered. After entering the SSID, press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting.
Security
Press the [A] button on page 2 to call up the Security list, then select the desired setting
by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Press the [C] “CHANGE” button to finalize the
setting.
Password
Press the [B] button on page 2 to call up the display for Password input, then set the
password in the same way as SSID. Press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting.
5 Press the [C] “CNCT.” button to start connection.
6 After connection between the instrument and the access point is
done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by
referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
Connecting by the Adhoc Mode
1 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “ADHOC.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
2 The settings for the instrument are complete if you do not need to
change the SSID and so on. Connect the iPhone/iPad to the
instrument by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
You can change the SSID, Security, etc. from the ADHOC display
pages.
NOTE
The password cannot be set
when you select “NONE” for
the security setting.
Appears when connection between the instrument and
the access point is done successfully.
Reference Page
Wireless LAN Detailed
Settings (page 198)
197
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Wireless LAN Mode
1 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN option display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 7.
The currently selected Mode name is shown.
2 Set the Wireless LAN mode.
You can set between two modes: INFRASTRUCTURE and ADHOC. Press the
[B] “MODE CHANGE” button to call up a message prompting confirmation of
the operation, then press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation.
Mode
198
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Wireless LAN Detailed Settings
You can set the detailed settings for each mode: INFRASTRUCTURE and ADHOC.
No need to change or set the settings if you’ve done the connection between iPhone/
iPad and instrument.
1 Set the Wireless LAN mode, then call up the display for detailed
settings by pressing the [D] button in the Wireless LAN settings
display (Page 6) or the Wireless LAN option display (Page 7)
Reference Page
Wireless LAN Mode
(page 197)
Wireless LAN settings display (Page 6) Wireless LAN option display (Page 7)
INFRASTRUCTURE mode ADHOC mode
INFRASTRUCTURE mode/
ADHOC mode
DETAIL display Page 1 ADHOC display Page 1 DETAIL display
DETAIL display Page 2 ADHOC display Page 2
ADHOC display Page 3
199
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
2 As necessary, set the detailed settings.
Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to “CHANGE” or “SHOW” in the
display to call up the display for Setting/Input.
3 Save the settings.
Press the [D] “EXIT” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of
operation when there is a change in the setting. Press the [C] “OK” button to
execute the operation, or press the [D] button to cancel. When the operation is
completed, the LCD returns to the previous display.
Wireless LAN
mode
Display Item Default setting Setting/Input
INFRASTRUCTURE
mode
DETAIL
display
Page 1
DHCP
ON
Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router
is compatible with DHCP, select “ON (set DNS
automatically)” here.
Select on or off by using the DATA CONTROL dial then
press the [C] “CHANGE” button.
IP Address
0.0.0.0
Set the wireless LAN detailed settings. IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS Server1, DNS Server2
can be set when DHCP is set to Off but cannot be set
when DHCP set to On. For details on confirmation and
changes in the setting of the access point on the router
side, refer to the owner’s manual for the product you
are using.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to the
“Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. The
setting range is 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255.
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0
DETAIL
display
Page 2
Gateway
0.0.0.0
DNS Server 1
0.0.0.0
DNS Server 2
0.0.0.0
ADHOC mode ADHOC
display
Page 1
SSID ap-ELB-02-(last 6
characters of MAC
address in
lowercase); or
simply “ap-ELB-02,”
if MAC address
cannot be used.
To find the specific MAC address, see “MAC address”
below.
• SSID, Security and Password can be set in the same
way as those described in the section “Manual
Setup” on page 195. The last 6 characters of the
MAC address must be entered in lowercase.
• Channel can be selected by the DATA CONTROL
dial and set by pressing the button corresponding to
“CHANGE.”
• DHCP and IP Address can be set in the same way
as those of “INFRASTRUCTURE mode” in this table.
• Subnet Mask can be selected in the list.
Channel
11
ADHOC
display
Page 2
Security
–
Password
–
ADHOC
display
Page 3
DHCP
ON
IP Address
192.168.0.1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
INFRASTRUCTURE
mode /
ADHOC mode
DETAIL
display
HOST NAME ELB-02-(last 6
characters of MAC
address in
lowercase); or
simply “ELB-02,” if
MAC address
cannot be used.
To find the specific MAC address, see “MAC address”
below.
Set the Host name. Up to 57 characters (half size)
including alphanumeric characters, the “_”
(underscore) and “-” (hyphen) character. For details on
how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the
Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the
characters, press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the
setting.
The last 6 characters of the MAC address must be
entered in lowercase.
MAC address
–
Shows the MAC address of the USB wireless LAN
adaptor. You cannot change the MAC address here.
STATUS
00000000
Shows the error code of network function.
200
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Initialize the wireless LAN settings
Factory Set (page 27) does not affect the settings of the wireless LAN settings, which
can be initialized by the following procedure. Be careful when executing initialize,
since it erases all the wireless LAN settings and replaces them with the factory
defaults.
1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the UTILITY display, then
select Page 7 by using the Page buttons.
2 Initialize the wireless LAN setting.
Press the [C] button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
Press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation, or the [D] button to cancel.
201
10
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Glossary of Terms
Access point
A device which acts as a base station when transmitting data by
wireless LAN.
Some access points are combined with modem functions.
Ad Hoc mode
Communication method for performing data communication with the
terminal and other devices directly without using a relay device, such
as an access point of a wireless LAN.
DHCP
A standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level
network configuration information can be dynamically and
automatically assigned each time the computer and the instrument
connect to the Internet.
DNS SERVER
A server that maps names to actual IP addresses of devices
connected to a network.
GATEWAY
A Gateway is a link between two computer programs or systems.
Infrastructure
mode
Communication method for performing data communication with
each terminal via a relay device, such as an access point of the
wireless LAN.
IP ADDRESS
A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a
network that indicate the device’s location on the network.
LAN
Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that
connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office
or home) by means of a special cable.
router
A device that allows multiple devices (e.g., computers, your Yamaha
instrument) to share the same Internet connection.
Site
Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are
opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose
addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the
Yamaha site.
SSID
A name used to identify a particular access point, or the wireless
networks set as the access point.
SUBNET
MASK
The structure for dividing a large-scale network.
Wireless LAN
A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-
free connection.
WPS
A structure to easily make a setting of wireless LAN by pushing only
the WPS buttons of an access point and the wireless LAN device.
202
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
1 Open the package, take out the two styrofoam pads from the both sides of the package, and
carefully place the main unit on top of the pads as shown.
2 Take out all parts from the package.
Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. When you take out the Speaker Unit, always
hold the bottom of the Speaker Unit, not holding the Grill Net.
Assembly Instructions
CAUTION
• Assemble the unit on a hard and flat floor with ample space.
• Be careful not to confuse or misplace the parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please
assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence described here.
• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
• Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can
cause damage or malfunction of the product.
• Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.
• To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.
A
B
Music Rest
Main Unit
Sideboard
(Left)
Styrofoam pads
Take out the styrofoam pads, and
place the Main Unit on top of the
pads.
Sideboard
(Right)
Pedalboard UnitSpeaker Unit
Grill Net
Attached to the Speaker
Unit
Bench
Bench Board
Legs: 4 pcs.
Screw caps x 4
Cord holders x 4
Power cord
Dust Cover
Assembly parts
5 x 16 mm x 4
5 x 12 mm x 8
Bundled pedal
cord inside.
11
203
11
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
3 Mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard
unit.
Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left
Sideboards.
3-1 Untie (at three points) and straighten out the
bundled pedal cord.
3-2 Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration
below.
3-3 Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard
and Sideboards as shown in the illustration and
mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using
four screws (B; two screws on each Sideboard).
3-4 Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws.
4 Mount the Speaker Unit onto the
Sideboards.
4-1 Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit.
4-2 With the help of another person, hold the Speaker
unit horizontally, and slide it from the rear into
place along the brackets.
CAUTION
Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your
finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard.
4-3 While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker
unit, fasten the four screws (B) from the rear, to
secure the Speaker unit to the Sideboards. Cover
the four screw holes on the rear side with the
corresponding screw caps.
5 Affix the two cord holders to the top
surface of the Speaker unit, then insert the
Power cord in the holders as shown in the
illustration.
Make sure to place the connector of the power
cord at the front side, and the plug of the power
cord at the back side.
6 Mount the Main Unit.
6-1
As shown in the illustration, hold the Main Unit
horizontally (with two people), and mount the Main
Unit. Be sure to place your hands at least 15 cm
from either end of the main unit when positioning it.
CAUTION
Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your
finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit.
B
Push the Sideboard
toward the Pedalboard
B
B
Push the Sideboard
toward the Speaker unit
Push the Sideboard
toward the Speaker unit
Screw
caps
Screw caps
Clamp the holder shut
after inserting the cord.
15 cm or further in
204
11
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
6-2 Use the four screws (A) to fasten the Main unit to
the Sideboards as shown in the illustration.
7 Fit the Grill Net onto the Speaker.
First, align the net with the bottom line, then
secure it to the speaker assembly.
8 Plug the power cord into the AC IN jack on
the bottom surface of the main Unit.
9 Connect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker
cord to the Main Unit.
Remove the protective film applied to each
connector of the cords. Make sure that the latches
on each connector of the cords face toward you,
and connect them to each socket securely until
the latch is set. Once connected securely, the
connector cannot be accidentally disconnected,
even if you pull the connector gently downward. (If
disconnected, the pedals will not function
properly.)
10
Affix the two cord holders to the inside of
the side board, then insert the Pedalboard
cord in the holders as shown in the
illustration.
A
AA
Fasten the Grill Net
by inserting the
knobs into the holes.
Speaker cord
Pedalboard cord
To disconnect the
Pedalboard cord and
Speaker cord:
Press the bottom of the latch
to unlatch, then disconnect.
Clamp the holder shut after
inserting the cord.
205
11
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Appendix
11
Place the music rest on the Electone.
12
Turn on the Electone’s [ ](Standby/On)
switch and confirm that the Electone can
be played, and that the assembly is
successful.
BENCH ASSEMBLY
Turn the bench board over and put the legs in place, one by
one, at the corners of the bench board, then tighten each
nut using the included wrench. Be sure to put the washer
between each leg and nut as shown.
Bench
board
Leg
Washer
Nut
After completing the assembly, please
check the following items.
• Are there any parts left over?
→ Review all assembly procedures.
• Is the Electone clear of doors and other
movable fixtures?
→ Move the Electone to an appropriate location.
• Does the Electone make a rattling noise when
you shake it?
→ Tighten all screws.
• Can the Electone be turned on?
→ Confirm that the power cord plug is securely
connected to an appropriate power outlet.
• Does the Electone produce sounds?
→ How to produce sounds is described in “Quick
Introductory Guide.” Confirm that the Speaker cord
connector and the Pedalboard cord connector are
securely connected to each socket on the Main unit.
When moving the instrument
CAUTION
When moving the instrument, always hold the bottom of
the main unit. Do not hold the top portion. Improper
handling can result in damage to the instrument or
personal injury.
• Transporting
If you move to another location, you can transport the
instrument along with other belongings. You can move the
unit as it is (assembled), or you can disassemble the unit
down to the condition it was in when you first took it out of
the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it
up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject
the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When
transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all
screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened
by moving the instrument.
CAUTION
If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when
you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly
diagrams and retighten all screws.
Do not hold here.
Hold here.
206
11
Appendix
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
GENERAL OPERATION
The sound is not heard for about 10
seconds after turning the power on.
This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.
A click or pop is heard when the power is
turned on or off.
Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal.
A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an
electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this
occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible
from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.
Interference from radio, TV, or other
sources occurs.
This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an
amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.
Noise is heard from the instrument’s
speakers or headphones when using the
instrument with an application on an
iPhone/iPad.
When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone/iPad,
we recommend that you first set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to
“ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication.
The sound of the Electone causes
surrounding objects to resonate.
Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds,
resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass
windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.
The sound is too small even when the
volume is set to its maximum.
• The MASTER VOLUME dial may be set around The minimum position. Turn it
clockwise (page 17).
• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe
(page 17).
• The speaker cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the speaker cord to
the Main Unit (page 204).
The Pedal Voices do not sound, and the
expression pedal does not work.
The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the pedal cord plug to
the Main Unit (page 204).
The “Connection interrupted; problem
occurred in USB device.” message is
shown and the USB device does not
respond.
Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of a
problem. Disconnect the device from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn
on the power of the instrument.
The Electone panel does not function
normally or the content of the memorized
data has changed.
This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to
electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/
or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory
Set operation to reset the Electone.
VOICES/RHYTHMS
When a key is pressed, two or more
Voices sound.
Perhaps the Voice of the Voice section 2 sounds as for the Lower Keyboard or
Pedalboard. Turn off the Voice of the Voice section 2 in the Voice display, or set
the volume setting to minimum after switching to the Voice section 2 (page 36).
As for the Upper Keyboard, the Lead Voice may sound in addition to the Voice
of the Voice section 2. Turn off the Lead Voice in the Voice display.
The pitch may sound excessively high on
the Pedalboard and low in the higher
registers of the Lower and Upper
keyboards.
This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.
Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the
Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.
Some of the Voices may contain cracking
and/or noisy sounds.
You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely
added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind
instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.
207
11
Appendix
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
When too many keys are pressed, not all
of the notes sound.
Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower
Keyboards) is 10 notes.
Only one sound is heard when two notes
of the Lead or Pedal Voices are
simultaneously played.
For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that
only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time.
The Pedal Voices do not sound, even
though the volume is properly set.
• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off
the mode in the display (page 82).
• TO LOWER button in the Pedal Voice section is turned on. Turn the function
off (page 38).
When keys are pressed, the sounds of
percussion instruments are also heard.
The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the
function, be sure to turn it off (page 88).
Even though a User button’s rhythm has
been selected and started, the pattern
does not sound.
Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern
has not been saved to the selected User button.
EFFECTS
The Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch
Vibrato function do not operate.
• Adjust the Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato settings in the Voice
Condition display (page 55).
• Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato are not applied to the Pedal
Voices on the Pedalboard.
The Reverb effect is not applied to the
desired Voice sections, even when the
REVERB button setting on the panel is
increased.
Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in the Voice
Condition Display (page 54).
The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be
heard, even when the “Speed Control” in
the Rotary Speaker display is on.
Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display (page 57).
ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does
not change, even when pressing different
keys of the keyboard.
Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave
interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed
outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.
While an Intro/Ending pattern is
automatically playing, the Lower
keyboard does not produce any sound,
even when the keys are played.
Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the
Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of
an Intro/Ending pattern.
The Accompaniment cannot be heard
even when an appropriate
Accompaniment type is selected and the
rhythm has been started.
• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the
Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 81).
• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on
(page 79).
The harmony notes of the Melody On
Chord function cannot be heard.
The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the
volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Certain functions have not been
memorized to Registration Memory.
Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 112.
MUSIC DATA RECORDER
The instrument does not recognize the
connected USB flash drive.
Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives listed in the
Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
208
11
Appendix
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Recording or playback cannot be
performed.
• The part may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY in
the PART 1 and PART 2 Pages.
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
• The USB flash drive is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.
Recording is stopped before the
performance is finished.
• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.
Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.
• When you overwrite the Song, the length of a subsequently recorded part
cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the
previously recorded Song, then record again (page 164).
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
An error message appears while entering
a folder name or song name.
• The Song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 characters.
• The Song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 146.
• The path name is too long. Reduce the layer or shorten the Song/folder
name to shorten the path (page 144).
The rhythm does not start at the
beginning of a recording, or stops in the
middle of the performance.
The MDR is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very
beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time
indicator appears in the display (page 138).
The USB flash drive cannot be formatted
when you want to format an unformatted
drive.
Recognizing an unformatted drive takes a few seconds after it is inserted. Wait
about 30 seconds, then try to format again.
An error message is shown when you
edit the Protected Edit Song.
Registrations from another Protected Song have been called up on the
Electone. Initialize the Registration (page 120) then select the Song you want
to edit.
The Song you've edited becones a
Protected Song.
Registrations from Protected Song has been called up on the Electone.
Initialize the Registration (page 120) then start the operations you want such
as Registration edit/saving or Song recording.
Audio
Recording or playback cannot be
performed.
• The USB flash drive is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.
• The file format may not be compatible with the instrument. The only
compatible format is WAV.
A “Data could not be saved” message is
shown and the recording is stopped.
The message will be shown when using the USB flash drive to which frequently
recording/deleting operations have been applied. Format the USB flash drive
(page 133), after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any
important data, then try to use again.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
209
11
Appendix
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
Specifications
PRODUCT NAME
DIGITAL ORGAN
TONE GENERATION
AWM
KEYBOARD
Upper: 49 keys (C – C),
Lower: 49 keys (C – C),
Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)
Keyboard Type
BASIC (FSB)
Initial Touch
Upper, Lower
After Touch
Upper, Lower
REGISTRATIONS Registration Menu
601
Registration Memory
1 Unit 16 x 5
MEMORY, 1 – 16, DISABLE
Registration Shift
Shift, Jump, User (1 Unit: 400 steps), Next Unit
VOICE Voice Sections
Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1,
Pedal 2
Voice Buttons Upper/Lower
STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO,
ORGAN, PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1,
USER 2
Lead
VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET,
USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1),
SOLO (Lead 2)
Pedal
CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1,
TO LOWER
Preset Voices
540
Rotary Speaker Control
2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop
EFFECT/
CONDITION
Sustain
Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2
Reverb Types
Hall 1 – 3, M, L, XG Hall 1 – 2,
Room 1 – 4, S, M, L, XG Room 1 – 3,
Stage 1 – 2, XG Stage 1 – 2,
Plate 1 – 2, XG Plate, GM Plate,
White Room, Atmosphere Hall, Acoustic Room,
Drums Room, Percussion Room,
Tunnel, Canyon, Basement
Depth
Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2,
Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion,
Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion
Voice Section Effects
Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser,
Tremolo/Auto Pan, Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Distortion+,
Amp Simulator, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Pitch Change,
Miscellaneous, Thru
RHYTHMS Rhythm Buttons
MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN,
WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD, ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2
Preset Rhythm Patterns
368 (including the metronome)
Parts
Main Drum, Add Drum
Sections
INTRO 1 – 3, ENDING 1 – 3, MAIN/FILL IN A – D, BREAK,
Auto Fill
ACCOMPANIMENT Accompaniment Parts
Chord 1 – 2, Pad, Phrase 1 – 2
Auto Bass Chord
OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.
Memory: Lower, Pedal
Melody On Chord
Yes
210
11
Appendix
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the
Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same
in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
Settings
1 Unit
Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 40
Kits
Wonderland Kit, EL Kit, Standard Kit 1, Standard Kit 2,
Hit Kit, Room Kit, Rock Kit, Electro Kit, Analog Kit,
Dance Kit, Jazz Kit, Brush Kit, Symphony Kit,
Live! Studio Kit, House Kit, SFX Kit 1, SFX Kit 2,
Noise Kit, Pop Latin Kit, Arabic Kit, China Kit,
Orchestra Percussion
Assign
Yes
CONTROLS Footswitch Left
Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3
Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Glide Time
Rotary Speaker
Right
Registration Shift
Expression Pedal
Yes
Transpose
-6 – +6
Pitch
A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz, Default value: A = 440 Hz
MIDI Control
Yes
MASTER VOLUME
Yes
MDR
Song Select: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Record,
Custom Play, Setting (Tempo/Part), Unit Edit
Too l s: Create Folder, Change Song Name, Copy, Delete,
Conversion (XG format), Format, Information
Audio Recording/Playback
Play: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Volume, Tempo,
Pitch
Record: Stop, Record
Too l s: Change Name, Delete
File Format: .wav (44.1kHz,16bit, stereo)
Utility
Language (English/Japanese), Disable Mode (Normal/Tempo),
LCD Contrast, Initialize
Display Select
VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY,
AUDIO
OTHERS Display
Full Dot LCD (128 x 64 dots), Monochrome
Sound System Power
Amplifiers
(20W + 10W) x 2
Speakers
(16cm + 5cm) x 2
Storage
USB flash drive
Connectors
PHONES
AUX OUT (VARIABLE, Standard phone): L/L+R, R
AUX IN (stereo mini phone)
MIDI IN/OUT
USB TO HOST
USB TO DEVICE x 2
Dimensions (Width x Depth x Height),
Weight
1113mm x 493mm x 924mm (Depth and Height with music rest:
509mm x 1103mm),
50
kg
Bench
596mm x 296mm x 580mm, 6.2
kg
Supplied Accessories
Owner’s Manual (this book),
Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook,
Online Member Product Registration,
Music Rest, Dust Cover, Power Cord, Bench
211
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
11
Appendix
Numerics
1 – 16 (Registration Memory) .............111
9 – 16 (Registration Memory)
.............112
A
[A] – [D] button .....................................25
A.B.C. (Auto Bass Chord)
....................82
Accompaniment
............................68, 79
Add Drum
.............................................80
Adhoc Mode
.......................................196
AEM
......................................................42
After Touch
...........................................55
AMP SIMULATOR
..........................57, 66
Articulation
............................................59
Assembly Instructions
........................202
Assign
.................................................102
Audio
..................................................169
Audio Recording
................................169
Auto Articulation
............................42, 59
Automatic Accompaniment
...........68, 82
AUX IN
................................................182
AUX OUT
............................................182
B
Bank ..........................................113, 116
Bass Chord
...........................................82
BREAK
..................................................70
Brilliance
...............................................55
C
Channel Messages .............................188
character
............................................145
Chord 1/Chord 2
...................................80
CHORUS
.......................................57, 64
Computer
............................................186
Connections
.......................................182
Contrast of the Display
.........................18
Controls
................................................52
Convert to XG
.....................................166
Copy
...................................................161
Creating folders
..................................165
Custom A.B.C.
......................................83
Custom Play
.......................................156
D
DATA CONTROL dial ...........................25
DELAY
...........................................57, 64
Delay (Vibrato)
......................................56
Delete (Song/Folder)
..........................164
Deleting the File
..................................176
Depth (Reverb)
.....................................62
Depth (Vibrato)
.....................................56
[DISABLE] button
............................... 114
Disable mode
..................................... 114
display
.................................................. 25
Display Language
................................ 27
Display Page
........................................ 26
Display Select
...................................... 15
DISTORTION
................................. 57, 65
DISTORTION+
.............................. 57, 65
DYNAMIC
...................................... 57, 67
E
Effect ............................................. 52, 57
Effect List
............................................. 64
ENDING
............................................... 70
EQ/ENHANCER
............................. 57, 67
ER/KARAOKE
................................ 57, 64
Expression pedal
........................ 17, 177
External
.............................................. 190
F
Fast Forward (audio) .......................... 173
Fast Forward (Song)
.......................... 157
Feet
...................................................... 54
Files
.................................................... 131
FILL IN
.................................................. 70
Fingered Chord
.................................... 83
FLANGER
...................................... 57, 64
Folders
...................................... 131, 165
Footswitches
...................................... 177
Format
.................................................... 7
Formatting a USB Flash Drive
............ 133
Functions and settings that cannot be
memorized
....................................... 112
G
Glide ................................................... 179
GM
......................................................... 7
GS
.......................................................... 7
H
Headphones ........................................ 19
I
ID ........................................................ 168
INFRASTRUCTURE
............................ 197
Initial Touch
.......................................... 55
Initialize the wireless LAN settings
..... 200
Initializing Registration Memory
......... 120
Initializing the Electone
........................ 27
Internal
............................................... 190
INTRO
.................................................. 70
J
Jacks and Controls ............................ 182
Jump
.................................................. 123
K
Keyboard ............................................. 29
Keyboard Percussion
................... 68, 88
Kit Assign List
.................................... 105
L
language .............................................. 27
LCD
...................................................... 25
Lead Voice
........................................... 29
Left Footswitch
................................... 177
Lower Keyboard
.................................. 30
Lower Keyboard Voice
........................ 30
M
M.O.C. (Melody On Chord) ................. 85
MAIN
.................................................... 70
Main Drum
........................................... 80
Manual Setup
..................................... 195
MDR
................................................... 127
MDR Display
............................. 127, 128
MDR Recording
................................. 138
Melody On Chord
................................ 85
Memory
................................................ 84
Metronome
.................................... 75, 78
MIDI
.......................................... 183, 187
MISCELLANEOUS
........................ 57, 67
Mode (Rotary Speaker)
....................... 60
Music Data Recorder
......................... 127
N
Name ................................................. 144
Name (audio)
..................................... 176
networks
............................................ 194
Next Unit
................................... 126, 153
Numbered buttons (Registration Memory)
........................................................ 111
O
On/Off status of the Voices .................. 31
P
Pad ...................................................... 80
Page construction (MDR Display)
..... 128
Panning
................................................ 54
Part (Rhythm)
....................................... 79
Pause (audio)
.................................... 173
Pause (Song)
..................................... 157
Pedal Voice
.......................................... 30
Index
212
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual
11
Appendix
Pedalboard ...........................................30
PHASER
.........................................57, 65
PHONES
.............................................182
Phrase 1/Phrase 2
................................80
Pitch (audio)
.......................................174
Pitch (overall)
......................................181
Pitch (Voice section)
.............................58
PITCH CHANGE
............................57, 67
Playback (audio)
................................172
Playback (Song Parts)
........................157
Playback (Song)
.................................155
Power Supply
.......................................16
PRESET
................................................57
Preset (Vibrato)
.....................................56
Preset Keyboard Percussion
................88
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
.........90
Priority
...................................................59
Protected Edit Song
...........................163
Protected Original Song
.....................163
Protected Songs
.................................162
Punch-in Recording
............................143
R
Random ..............................................159
Recording (audio)
..............................169
Recording (MDR)
...............................138
Recording Each Part Separately
........140
Registration Memory
..........................111
Registration Menu
................................20
Registration Menu List
..........................22
Registration Shift
................................121
Registrations (load from a USB flash drive)
..........................................................154
Registrations (memorize)
...................111
Registrations (recall)
..........................113
Registrations (save to a USB flash drive)
................................................118, 147
Remaining Memory
............................168
Repeat Playback
................................159
REVERB
.........................................57, 64
Reverb (Accompaniment part of the
Rhythm)
..............................................81
Reverb (Keyboard Percussion)
............89
Reverb (Overall)
...................................61
Reverb (Percussion part of the Rhythm)
...........................................................74
Reverb (Voice)
......................................54
Rewind (audio)
...................................173
Rewind (Song)
....................................157
Rhythm
.................................................68
Rhythm buttons
....................................68
Rhythm Condition
..........................74, 79
Rhythm List
...........................................77
Rhythm Sequence
................................86
Right Footswitch
.................................177
ROTARY SPEAKER
.......................57, 65
Rotary Speaker
.....................................60
Rotary Speaker (Footswitch)
..............180
S
Save (Registration Memory) ............... 118
Scroll bar
.............................................. 25
Selecting a Song
................................ 134
Shift
.................................................... 122
Shift End
............................................. 126
Single Finger
........................................ 83
Slide
..................................................... 59
Solo function
........................................ 39
Song
................................................... 155
Song (selection)
................................. 134
Song data size
................................... 168
Song icons
......................................... 130
SONG Page
....................................... 129
Speed (Rotary Speaker)
...................... 60
Speed (Vibrato)
.................................... 56
Speed Control
...................................... 60
START (Rhythm)
................................... 71
Stop (Shift End)
.................................. 126
Super Articulation
................................. 42
Sustain
................................................. 63
Synchro (MIDI)
................................... 190
SYNCHRO START
................................ 71
System Messages
.............................. 188
T
Tempo (audio) .................................... 174
Tempo (MDR)
..................................... 158
Tempo (Rhythm)
.................................. 73
THRU
............................................. 57, 67
Time (Reverb)
...................................... 62
To Lower function
................................. 38
Top (Shift End)
................................... 126
Touch Vibrato
....................................... 55
Transpose (overall)
............................ 181
Transpose (Voice section)
................... 58
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
.................. 57, 65
Tune
..................................................... 58
Type (Reverb)
...................................... 62
U
Unit ..................................................... 147
Units
................................................... 119
Upper Keyboard
.................................. 29
Upper Keyboard Voice
........................ 29
USB Device
........................................ 132
USB Flash Drives
............................... 132
USB TO DEVICE
................................ 183
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
................ 132
USB TO HOST
.................................... 183
USB wireless LAN adaptor
................ 192
User (Registration Shift)
..................... 123
User (Vibrato)
....................................... 56
User buttons (Rhythm)
......................... 75
User buttons (Voice)
............................ 39
User Keyboard Percussion
................ 101
User rhythm
.......................................... 76
Utility
.................................................... 18
V
Version ................................................. 28
Vibrato
................................................. 56
Voice buttons
....................................... 33
Voice Condition
................................... 53
Voice Display
....................................... 31
Voice List
............................................. 42
Voice section 1
.................................... 33
Voice section 2
.................................... 36
[VOICE SECTION 2] button
.......... 33, 36
Voice sections
..................................... 29
Voices
.................................................. 29
Volume
................................................. 17
Volume (Accompaniment part of the
Rhythm)
............................................. 81
Volume (audio)
.................................. 174
Volume (Keyboard Percussion)
........... 89
Volume (Percussion part of the Rhythm)
................................................... 69, 74
Volume (Voice)
............................. 34, 54
W
WAH .............................................. 57, 66
Wireless LAN Mode
........................... 197
Wireless LAN settings
........................ 192
WPS
................................................... 192
X
XG .......................................................... 7
XG Songs
........................................... 160
About Using BSD-Licensed Software
The software used by this product includes components
that comply with the BSD license.
The restrictions placed on users of software released
under a typical BSD license are that if they redistribute
such software in any form, with or without modification,
they must include in the redistribution (1) a disclaimer of
liability, (2) the original copyright notice and (3) a list of
licensing provisions.
The following contents are displayed based on the
licensing conditions described above, and do not
govern your use of the product.
WPA Supplicant
Copyright © 2003-2009, Jouni Malinen <[email protected]> and
contributors
All Rights Reserved.
This program is dual-licensed under both the GPL
version 2 and BSD license. Either license may be used
at your option.
License
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright
holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
XySSL
Copyright © 2006-2008, Christophe Devine.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of XySSL nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,
Canada
Tel: +1-416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: +1-714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José
Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,
D.F., C.P. 03900
Tel: +52-55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –
Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,
Brazil
Tel: +55-11-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,
Sucursal Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,
Madero Este-C1107CEK,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: +54-11-4119-7000
VENEZUELA
Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.
AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,
Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela
Tel: +58-212-943-1877
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,
P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, U.K.
Tel: +44-1908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: +41-44-3878080
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/
ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland
Tel: +48-22-880-08-88
BULGARIA
Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel: +359-2-978-20-25
MALTA
Olimpus Music Ltd.
Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta
Tel: +356-2133-2093
NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/
LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: +31-347-358040
FRANCE
Yamaha Music Europe
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: +33-1-6461-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: +39-02-93577-1
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal
en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231
Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain
Tel: +34-91-639-88-88
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,
Greece
Tel: +30-210-6686260
SWEDEN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial
Scandinavia
JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: +46-31-89-34-00
DENMARK
Yamaha Music Denmark,
Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland
Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark
Tel: +45-44-92-49-00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Antaksentie 4
FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland
Tel: +358 (0)96185111
NORWAY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -
Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway
Tel: +47-6716-7800
ICELAND
Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.
Sidumula 20
IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: +354-525-5050
CROATIA
Euro Unit D.O.O.
Slakovec 73
40305 Nedelisce
Tel: +38540829400
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.
Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,
Moscow, 121059, Russia
Tel: +7-495-626-5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
TURKEY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi
Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz
Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey
Tel: +90-212-999-8010
CYPRUS
Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.
Nikis Ave 2k
1086 Nicosia
Tel: + 357-22-511080
Major Music Center
21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy
P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel: (392) 227 9213
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-400-051-7700
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: +852-2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Private Limited
Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,
Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,
Haryana, India
Tel: +91-124-485-3300
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: +62-21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,
Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea
Tel: +82-2-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: +60-3-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited
Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: +65-6740-9200
TAIWAN
Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.
2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.
New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: +886-2-7741-8888
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: +66-2215-2622
VIETNAM
Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited
15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach
Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,
Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Tel: +84-8-3818-1122
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
http://asia.yamaha.com
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
VIC 3006, Australia
Tel: +61-3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: +64-9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
http://asia.yamaha.com
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
DMI14 Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan
(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrase 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Manual Development Department
© 2016 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2016 MWZC*.*- **C0
Printed in Indonesia
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
ZS53040
ZS53040
Transcripción de documentos
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4-5. For information on assembling the instrument, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual. EN 2 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Water warning Power supply/Power cord • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or more people. Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may damage your back, result in other injury, or cause damage to the instrument itself. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Assembly • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. DMI-5 4 • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections Using the bench (If included) • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the specified tool in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off the rear of the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest, unsupervised use may result in accident or injury. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Do not rest your legs or feet on the Expression Pedal or Pedal Box from the back of the instrument, or climb on the instrument, or put excessive weight on it. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. DMI-5 2/2 The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 5 NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below. Handling • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth. Saving data • Save your important Registration data onto the USB flash drive (page 116) since the Registration data memorized to the instrument will be overwritten by certain operations, such as Song playback, etc. Before using a USB flash drive, make sure to refer to page 132. • A “” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved, otherwise the data will be lost. The Registration Shift settings and Keyboard Percussion settings will be automatically saved to the Registration data when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, “” appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off without switching to another display or while “” is shown in the display, otherwise the data will be lost. • To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto a spare USB flash drive as backup data. Information About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases. 6 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual About functions/data bundled with the instrument • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Compatible Format “GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 7 Congratulations! Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Electone! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Included Accessories Owner’s Manual (this book) Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook Online Member Product Registration The “PRODUCT ID” on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Dust Cover Dust Cover Power Cord Bench 8 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual About the Manuals This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials. Included Documents Owner’s Manual (this book) Provides overall explanations of the Electone functions. Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook This useful book helps you familiarize yourself with the Electone, giving you basic information on playing the instrument, including the proper playing posture, and providing helpful music scores which get you started playing the Electone using the preset Registration menu. This book also includes information on how to record your performance to the USB flash drive, and listen back to your recorded performances. Online Materials (PDF) iPhone/iPad Connection Manual Explains how to connect this instrument to the iPhone/iPad. MIDI Reference Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart. To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads website, select your country, enter “ELB-02” in the Model Name box, then click [Search]. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 9 Contents PRECAUTIONS.................................................................... 4 NOTICE ................................................................................ 6 Information............................................................................ 6 Congratulations! ................................................................... 8 Included Accessories............................................................ 8 About the Manuals................................................................ 9 Main Features..................................................................... 12 Panel Controls and Terminals 13 Overview............................................................................. 13 Front Panel ......................................................................... 14 Quick Introductory Guide 16 Power Supply ..................................................................... Turning On/Off the Power................................................... Adjusting the Volume ......................................................... Adjusting the Contrast of the Display................................. Using Headphones ............................................................ 1 Basic Operation 16 16 17 18 19 20 Registration Menu .............................................................. 20 Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu.. 20 Registration Menu List ............................................... 22 Using the LCD display ....................................................... 25 Selecting from a list in the display ............................. 25 Selecting an item and changing its value.................. 25 Changing the Display Page ....................................... 26 Basic Operation.................................................................. 27 Selecting the Display Language................................ 27 Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)......................... 27 Confirming the Version of Your Electone ................... 28 2 Voices 29 Voices for Each Keyboard.................................................. Voice Display...................................................................... Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons ............................ Selecting Voices for Voice section 1.......................... Adjusting the Voice volume ....................................... Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2................................. Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 .................................................................. Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 ......................... Selecting Voices from the User buttons ............................. Voice List ............................................................................ 3 Voice Controls and Effects ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 36 37 39 42 52 Selecting from the Voice Condition display ....................... Rotary Speaker .......................................................... Selecting from the panel .................................................... Reverb........................................................................ Sustain ....................................................................... Effect List............................................................................ 10 29 31 33 33 34 36 53 60 61 61 63 64 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 68 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons ...................... 68 To select and play a rhythm...................................... 68 Operating the rhythm from the panel ........................ 71 Adjusting the tempo .................................................. 73 Changing the rhythm volume/reverb......................... 74 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons .......................... 75 Rhythm List ........................................................................ 77 Accompaniment ................................................................ 79 Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) .. 82 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ............................................... 85 Keyboard Percussion ........................................................ 88 Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion .................... 88 Preset Keyboard Percussion List .............................. 90 Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion .............................................................................. 101 Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion ............... 104 Kit Assign List.......................................................... 105 5 Registration Memory 111 Storing Registrations ....................................................... Selecting Registrations.................................................... Storing Registrations to Another Bank............................. Deleting Banks ................................................................ Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive............ Initializing Registration Memory....................................... Registration Shift.............................................................. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 111 113 116 117 118 120 121 127 Calling Up the MDR Display............................................ 127 Using the MDR Display ................................................... 128 Song icons .............................................................. 130 Connecting a USB Device............................................... 132 Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal ................................................................. 132 Using USB Flash Drives .......................................... 132 Formatting a USB Flash Drive ......................................... 133 Selecting a Song ............................................................. 134 Recording ........................................................................ 138 Recording................................................................ 138 Re-recording (Retry) ............................................... 140 Recording Each Part Separately............................. 140 Punch-in Recording ................................................ 143 Changing the Song/Folder Name.................................... 144 Saving Registrations........................................................ 147 Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song .............................................................................. 149 Overwriting Registration data to a Unit ................... 151 Deleting Registrations ............................................. 152 Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations in one performance) ............................................. 153 Recalling Recorded Registrations................................... 154 Loading Registrations ............................................. 154 Playing Back a Song ....................................................... 155 Playing Back Selected Parts ................................... 157 Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause ........................... 157 Changing the Tempo ............................................... Repeat Playback...................................................... Playing Back XG Songs ........................................... Other Operations — Copy, Delete, etc. ........................... Copy......................................................................... Song Delete/Folder Delete....................................... Creating folders ....................................................... Converting to XG format .......................................... Checking the Remaining Memory............................ 7 Audio 169 172 173 174 176 177 Right Footswitch ............................................................... 177 Left Footswitch ................................................................. 177 9 Transpose and Pitch Controls 181 10 Connections 182 Accessory Jacks and Controls......................................... 182 Connection Examples — External Devices...................... 184 Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System...................................... 184 Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in speakers of the Electone ..................... 184 Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone ............................................................................... 185 Controlling the Electone from an External Device ... 185 Connection with Computer............................................... 186 Using the [USB TO HOST] terminal ......................... 186 MIDI .................................................................................. 187 What is MIDI? ........................................................... 187 MIDI Messages of the Electone ............................... 188 MIDI Channels ......................................................... 189 MIDI Control ..................................................................... 190 Connecting to an iPhone/iPad.......................................... 192 Wireless LAN settings .............................................. 192 Wireless LAN Detailed Settings ............................... 198 Initialize the wireless LAN settings........................... 200 Glossary of Terms .................................................... 201 11 Appendix Quick Introductory Guide 1 Basic Operation 2 Voices 3 Voice Controls and Effects 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Registration Memory 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 Audio 8 Footswitches 9 Transpose and Pitch Controls 169 Recording Your Performance as Audio............................ Playing Back Audio Files.................................................. Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause ............................ Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch ................. Deleting the File / Changing the File Name ............. 8 Footswitches 158 159 160 161 161 164 165 166 168 202 Assembly Instructions ...................................................... Troubleshooting................................................................ Specifications ................................................................... Index................................................................................. 202 206 209 211 10 Connections 11 Appendix ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 11 Main Features Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 20 The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 601 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance needs. Richly textured, AWM Voices, Touch functions and High Quality Digital Effects pages 29, 52 The ELB-02 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices—540 altogether—created with the AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system, including special Super Articulation Voices, which realistically recreate characteristic instrument sounds. With highly playable keyboards featuring authentic touch response—with Initial Touch and After Touch functions—you can play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there is a wide variety of effect types that you can apply to each Voice section—letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the Voices. Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 68 The exceptionally wide selection of various rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) —such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break—that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic backing as well as embellishments. Keyboard Percussion page 88 This powerful feature allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the keyboard. A wide range of sounds and drum/percussion kits are available, for performing rhythms in real time. Each sound is assigned to its own key, and the sounds include everything from conventional kicks and snares to a wide variety of ethnic and Latin instruments, as well as special sound effects, such as thunder, laughing, animal cries and more. Versatile Functions of the Music Data Recorder page 127 The Electone also features a Music Data Recorder (MDR) for recording your Registrations and performances to a USB flash drive, and playing back those performances using the sounds of the Electone. In addition, the MDR allows you to copy a Song from one USB flash drive to another, letting you archive your important recordings and Registration data. Audio Recording page 169 You can record your performances as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive. Since the data is saved in stereo WAV format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and played on portable music players by using a computer, allowing you to share your recordings with your friends, and make your own CDs to enjoy as well. 12 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Panel Controls and Terminals Overview Upper Keyboard page 29 Music Rest page 8 Lower Keyboard page 29 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal page 183 MIDI terminals page 183 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal page 183 Front Panel [USB TO HOST] terminal page 183 [AUX IN] jack page 182 [AC IN] jack For connecting a power cord. page 16 AUX OUT [L/L+R]/ [R] jack page 182 Right Footswitch page 121 [PHONES] jack page 182 Expression Pedal page 17 Speaker Left Footswitch page 177 Pedalboard page 29 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 13 Front Panel Panel Setup (Panel Settings) By using the controls on the panel, you can make various settings such as selecting a Voice or Style, tuning the pitch, and so on. These settings of the instrument are together referred to as “panel setup” or “panel settings” in this manual. [VOICE SECTION 2] button Switches between Voice sections 1 and 2 (page 33). MUSIC DATA RECORDER (MDR) Allows recording and playback of your keyboard performances, and lets you store Registration data for future recall (page 127). LEAD VOICE LCD display Selects the Lead Voices for Upper Keyboard (page 29). Also available on the Lower Keyboard while “To Lower” function is on. Shows the current settings of the Electone (page 25). REGISTRATION MENU UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE Selects convenient Registrations, which let you instantly reconfigure all relevant settings, allowing you to start playing with all appropriate sounds pre-selected (page 20). Selects the Voices for Upper Keyboard (page 29). SUSTAIN buttons (page 63) REVERB buttons (page 61) TEMPO buttons Adjusts the speed of the rhythm (page 73). KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Turns Keyboard Percussion On or Off (page 88). C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 RHYTHM Sets the rhythm (page 68). C1 RHYTHM CONTROL Starts and stops the rhythm, and adds changes to the rhythm (page 71). 14 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 Tempo, Bar/Beat display LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE Shows the current tempo or position in the measure (page 73). Selects the Voices for Lower Keyboard (page 30). PEDAL VOICE Selects the Voices for Pedalboard (page 30). Also available on the Lower Keyboard while “To Lower” function is on. Page buttons DATA CONTROL dial Selects the Page of the display (page 26). Selects the setting or value in the display (page 25). Data Control [A] – [D] buttons Selects items and changes the values/ settings in the display (page 25). [9-16] button [MEMORY] button (page 112) (page 111) REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons For registering and recalling panel setups (page 111). [DISABLE] button (page 114) MASTER VOLUME dial Adjusts the overall volume (page 17). D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal For connecting a USB flash drive (page 183). [P] (Standby/On) switch Turns the instrument’s power on or sets it to standby (page 16). D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 Display Select [VOICE DISPLAY] button (page 31) [MDR] button (page 127) [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button (page 82) [AUDIO] button (page 169) [FOOTSWITCH] button (page 177) [UTILITY] button (page 27) ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 15 Quick Introductory Guide 1 Power Supply Connect the plugs of the power cord in the order shown in the illustration. WARNING Use only the supplied power cord. CAUTION 1 When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. 2 [AC IN] jack (page 13) AC Outlet The shape of the plug and outlet differs depending on your locale. NOTE When disconnecting the power cord, first turn off the power, then follow this procedure in reverse order. 2 Turning On/Off the Power NOTICE Do not press any keys or buttons while turning the power on. Doing so may cause the Electone to malfunction or data loss. 16 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial counter-clockwise. 2 Press the [P] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned voice settings for each Voice section (page 31). 3 Press and hold the [P] (Standby/On) switch for about a second to turn the power off. Quick Introductory Guide When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one after the other on the LCD display: CAUTION Even when the [P] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. 3 Adjusting the Volume 1 Set the MASTER VOLUME control. The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of the entire instrument. Decreases the volume 2 CAUTION Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. Increases the volume Press the Expression pedal down with your foot. Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level, you can use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot as you play. Maximum volume Minimum volume ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 17 4 Adjusting the Contrast of the Display You can adjust the contrast of the display. Quick Introductory Guide 1 2 NOTICE The LCD contrast setting is automatically saved when another display is called up. Make sure to switch to another display before turning the power off. 18 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 3 Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility display. Since the contrast setting is set in Utility display Page 1, select Page 1 with the page buttons if another page is shown. Press the [C] button corresponding to “LCD CONTRAST.” “LCD CONTRAST” is selected and highlighted. Adjust the LCD contrast with the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the corresponding button. You can set the value between -5 – +5. 5 Using Headphones CAUTION Quick Introductory Guide To use headphones, connect them to the PHONES jack (standard stereo phone jack). Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. Standard stereo phone plug ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 19 1 Basic Operation 1 Registration Menu NOTE Additional basic Registrations are preset on the Registration Memory locations from 1 to 16. See page 116 for details. The Registration Menu is a simple, highly convenient way to instantly change all the Electone settings for playing in specific music styles. A Registration consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, the assigned rhythm and so on. Registration Menu button [0] includes a variety of basic Registrations, especially for practicing, and the other buttons [1] – [5] include Registrations in various music genres for playing your favorite types of music. These give you a wide palette of Registrations to choose from, both for practice purposes and for freely playing in virtually any music style or genre. Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu 1 Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons. Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example, if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration Menu, see page 22. Basic 2 20 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Page 01 Page 02 Kids Simple Pages 01, 02 Pops & Rock Pages 01, 02 Dance & Ballad Pages 01, 02 Jazz & Latin Pages 01, 02 Symphony & World From this main category, select the specific Registration you want to use. Each Registration Menu button actually contains many Registrations. Select the desired Registrations in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. You can also select Registration by using the [A] and [D] buttons located at the immediate right side of the LCD. Changing Pages 1 Basic Operation Page buttons REGISTRATION MENU buttons [1] – [5] contain two display pages: “01” and “02,” each of which contain two different sets of Registrations. Page 01 features the same Registration Menu as that of the ELB-01, while Page 02 features new Registration Menus for the ELB-02. From each of the 01 and 02 pages, select the desired Registration. 3 Play your favorite song with the selected Registration. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 21 Registration Menu List [ 0 ] BASIC 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 1 Basic Operation 22 Simple 1 St/St Simple 2 St/Hr Simple 3 Cl/St Simple 4 Cl/Hr Simple 5 Tp/St Simple 6 Tp/Hr Simple 7 Ob/St Simple 8 Ob/Bsn Simple 9 Fl/St Simple 10 Fl/Cl Simple 11 Cl/Cl Simple 12 Pf/Pf Simple 13 Cl/Bsn Sound Effect 1 Sound Effect 2 Sound Effect 3 Sound Effect 4 Sound Effect 5 Sound Effect 6 Sound Effect 7 Sound Effect 8 Sound Effect 9 Sound Effect 10 Sound Effect 11 Sound Effect 12 Sound Effect 13 Sound Effect 14 Sound Effect 15 Sound Effect 16 StCombi 1 St/St StCombi 2 St/Hr StCombi 3 St/Br StCombi 4 St/CB StCombi 5 Oct Hi StCombi 6 Oct Lo StCombi 7 Soft StCombi 8 SftOct StCombi 9 Hard StCombi 10HrdOct StCombi 11 St+WW StCombi 12 St+Br StCombi 13 Pizz StCombi 14 Trem StCombi 15 Vn/Vc StCombi 16 Vn/Pz BrCombi 1 Tp/St BrCombi 2 Tp/Hr BrCombi 3 Tp/Tb BrCombi 4 Br/Hr BrCombi 5 Br/Br BrCombi 6 Oct BrCombi 7 Br/CB BrCombi 8Br/Timp BrCombi 9 Br+Xyl WWCombi 1 Fl/St ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 WWCombi 2 Fl/Cl WWCombi 3 Fl/Hp WWCombi 4 Ob/St WWCombi 5 Ob/Bsn WWCombi 6 Ob/Piz WWCombi 7 Cl/St WWCombi 8 Cl/Hr WWCombi 9 Cl/Piz WWCombi 10Sax/Pf Woodwind Ens 1 Woodwind Ens 2 Woodwind Ens 3 Woodwind Ens 4 Woodwind Ens 5 Woodwind Ens 6 Woodwind Ens 7 Decay 1 Piano Decay 2 Harpsi Decay 3 E.Piano Decay 4 Guitar Decay 5 E.Guitar Decay 6 Xylophne Decay 7 Glocken Decay 8 Harp Hold 1 PipeOrgan Hold 2 JazzOrgan Hold 3 Accordion Hold 4 Recorder Synth 1 Synth 2 Synth 3 Synth 4 Synth 5 Comping Rock Comping Jazz 1 Comping Jazz 2 Comping Classic1 Comping Classic2 Comping Classic3 Comping Classic4 [ 1 ] KIDS, SIMPLE Page 01 KIDS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Simple 8Beat 1 Simple 8Beat 2 Light Step Sunny Pop Kids March 1 Kids March 2 Kids March 3 Synth Rock SymphonicMarch 1 SymphonicMarch 2 Bluegrass Sea Carnival Basic Waltz Brass Ensemble Pure Waltz Rococo Ensemble Pop Cha Cha Comical Rumba Comical Samba Toy Orchestra Charleston Winter Swing Snow Waltz 1 Snow Waltz 2 Alpine Polka *A Alpine Polka *B Alpine Polka *C Alpine Polka *D Dream Ballad *A Dream Ballad *B Dream Ballad *C Dream Ballad *D Pops Orchestra*A Pops Orchestra*B Pops Orchestra*C Pops Orchestra*D Kids On Stage *A Kids On Stage *B Kids On Stage *C Kids On Stage *D Galaxy March *A Galaxy March *B Galaxy March *C Galaxy March *D SE *A SE *B SE *C SE *D Page 02 SIMPLE 01 02 03 04 05 SimpleReg Strs 1 SimpleReg Strs 2 SimpleReg Orch 1 SimpleReg Orch 2 SimpleReg Orch 3 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SimpleReg Pops 1 SimpleReg Pops 2 SimpleReg Latin SimpleReg Jazz 1 SimpleReg Jazz 2 SimpleReg Jazz 3 SimpleReg Organ BrassBandMarch*A BrassBandMarch*B Orchestra March 6/8 MarchingBand 6/8 MarchingKids Light Waltz OrchestraWaltz*A OrchestraWaltz*B OrchestraWaltz*C OrchestraWaltz*D 8Beat Synth Pop 8Beat Pop Pop Shuffle R&B Shuffle Rock Rock Shuffle Rock Pop Ballad Funk Dance Pop Disco Pop R&B E.Piano Bld R&B Piano Ballad 8Beat Ballad 8Beat OrchBallad 3/4 Pop Ballad 6/8 Pop Ballad Big Band King *A Big Band King *B Big Band King *C Big Band Swing Jazz Session Fusion Samba Pop Samba Simple BossaNova Mambo Rumba Cls Organ Chapel Cls Organ Hall RockOrgan Ballad R&B Rock Organ Organ Combo 6/8 Organ Ballad Soul Jazz Organ Pop Organ 60s Toy Organ Theatre Organ NY Nostalgic Organ Page 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Dynamic 8Beat NY Ballad British Pop 8Beat Modern Rock Band Detroit Pop Techno Pop Sheriff Reggae Rock & Roll Power Rock 60s Guitar Rock Unplugged Motor City Lovely Shuffle Gospel Shuffle Joyful Gospel Frankly Soul Soul Gospel 6/8 Soul Hit Pop New Country Eternal Pop Ground Beat Bounce Pop *A Bounce Pop *B Bounce Pop *C Bounce Pop *D Blues Jam *A Blues Jam *B Blues Jam *C Blues Jam *D EvergreenWaltz*A EvergreenWaltz*B EvergreenWaltz*C EvergreenWaltz*D 16Beat Pop *A 16Beat Pop *B 16Beat Pop *C 16Beat Pop *D Top Gear Rock *A Top Gear Rock *B Top Gear Rock *C Top Gear Rock *D Southern Pop *A Southern Pop *B Southern Pop *C Southern Pop *D Page 02 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 70s Easy Pop BoysGuitarBallad Soul Pop 70s Top Duo Daydream Shuffle Oldies Pop EuroPop Folklore 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 Discotheque Rock Slow Hand Ballad Sweet AC Ballad 70s PrimeTime TV Crossover Funk Joyful Gospel #2 Gospel Groove Worship Shuffle Worship 16beat Soulful Wonder Lovely & Soulful Danceable Funk Bright Pop Rock AmericanHardRock Power Rock 80s USA RockStandard Seaside Rock 70s Folk Rock Alternative Rock Alternative6/8Rk Highway Rock Funky Rock&Roll Synth Pop Rock Power Synth Rock RockGuitarBallad Pop Rock & Roll Back To The 60s Dancing Boogie 6/8 Shuffle Rock Shuffle BoysRock Shuffle Pop Rock Shfl Rock Ballad Pop Rock Band Shuffle PopPiano Contemp Country Smooth Country Xmas Shuffle Snowy Christmas Pretty Rock Ultra Rock Rock Graffiti Casual Rock Rookie Rock Happy Rock J-Pop Idol Rock J-Pop Band Rock Spirit Pop Sweet Love Pop Summer Pop Shaky Dance J-Pop Piano Band J-Pop Boys J-PopShuffleBeat J-Pop BandBallad Breezy Ballad HeroRanger Theme Sunset Pop Funky Punch *A Funky Punch *B GlxyBattleship*A 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 GlxyBattleship*B J-Pop Anime *A J-Pop Anime *B 70s Honey 70s Hero DBZ *A DBZ *B DBZ *C DBZ *D [ 3 ] DANCE&BALLAD Page 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Organ Ballad Dramatic Ballad Love Ballad Smooth Lead Pop Ballad Guitar Ballad Acoustic Ballad Healing Guitar Chillout Sweetheart 1 Sweetheart 2 Slow & Easy Euro Trance 6/8 Trance Cool Hip Hop Latin House Dance Beat Euro Dance Pop UK Pop Jive Disco Queen Disco Soul Pop Disco Hot Disco Ibiza *A Ibiza *B Ibiza *C Ibiza *D Power House *A Power House *B Power House *C Power House *D Dance Latino *A Dance Latino *B Dance Latino *C Dance Latino *D Twilight Disco*A Twilight Disco*B Twilight Disco*C Twilight Disco*D Love Song *A Love Song *B Love Song *C Love Song *D 45 46 47 48 Movie Ballad *A Movie Ballad *B Movie Ballad *C Movie Ballad *D Page 02 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 R&B Pop Ballad R&B Soul Ballad R&B Cool Ballad Cool AC Sweet Chart Hits Sweet SlowBallad YourPiano Ballad Sweet EP Ballad J-Pop EasyBallad Sweet Sax Ballad Sweet R&B Ballad Lovers R&B Sentimental Bld Tears Ballad Glory Ballad Unplugged Ballad SentimentalMovie BeautyCinema Bld CinemaSympho Bld Enka Ballad 6/8 Enka Shuffle Christmas Ballad Disco Hits 70s 70s Disco Night Euro Pop Disco Synth Disco Ballroom Disco Syn DancePop 80s Dirty Dance Beat Fortune Disco Girls Pop 48 *A Girls Pop 48 *B Shiny Girls Pop Share The Peace DanceAndRhythm*A DanceAndRhythm*B DanceAndRhythm*C DanceAndRhythm*D Girls Techno Candy Pop Techno Dancing Platform Dance Beat EX. Club Beat Electronica Beat Kool Garage Electronic Dance New Age Chillout Eurobeat Party Ibiza Trance Casual Trance Trance Party WonderTranceShfl ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 1 Basic Operation [ 2 ] POPS&ROCK 23 [ 4 ] JAZZ&LATIN Page 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1 Basic Operation Blow On Sax Sax Ensemble Moonlight Big Band Clarinet Swing Jazz Combo Medium Jazz Organ Session Guitar Combo Tender Ballad Jazz Waltz Five-Four Big Band Samba Mambo Brass Mambo Tenor Montuno Bossa Nova Pop Bossa Sweet Rumba Beguine Cha Cha Cha Mellow Groove Modern R&B Dixieland Jazz Jungle Drum *A Jungle Drum *B Jungle Drum *C Jungle Drum *D Jazz Club *A Jazz Club *B Jazz Club *C Jazz Club *D Afro Session *A Afro Session *B Afro Session *C Afro Session *D ChaCha Grandee*A ChaCha Grandee*B ChaCha Grandee*C ChaCha Grandee*D 3/4 Fast Jazz *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Twilight Sax *A Twilight Sax *B Twilight Sax *C Twilight Sax *D Page 02 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 24 Big Band Tutti Alto Sax Combo Jazz Combo Fast Jazz Combo 66 The Big Band *A The Big Band *B Guitar JazzCombo ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 The Swing Jazz New Orleans Jazz Ragtime Band Funky Cat Groove Afro Cuban Jazz Guitar JazzWaltz Sax Jazz Waltz Swing Steps Swing Chorus Relax Swing Urban Lounge Broadway Tap Brazilian Bossa Lounge BossaNova 8Beat Bossa Nova Pop Bossa Nova Tiny Bossa Nova Cafe Samba BitterSweetLatin Latin Rock DanceBeatLatin*A DanceBeatLatin*B Pop Accordion Sweet Bomba Orquesta Salsa New Flamenco Jummin' Reggae RumbaAndTheCity French Caribbean Caribbean Sea [ 5 ] SYMPHONY&WORLD Page 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Fanfare String Orchestra Romantic Violin Baroque Flute & Harp Serenade Fast March Wild West Vienna Waltz Polka Chanson Club Theatre Organ Flamenco Pop Flamenco Mexican Dance Mariachi Celtic Dance Folk Step Italiano Musette Country Hawaiian Chinese Nocturne 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Japanese Sound OrchestraMarch*A OrchestraMarch*B OrchestraMarch*C OrchestraMarch*D Pasodoble *A Pasodoble *B Pasodoble *C Pasodoble *D Tango *A Tango *B Tango *C Tango *D Show Time *A Show Time *B Show Time *C Show Time *D Majestic Sound*A Majestic Sound*B Majestic Sound*C Majestic Sound*D OrchestraSwing*A OrchestraSwing*B OrchestraSwing*C OrchestraSwing*D Page 02 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Orch Full Unit String Classic Sweet Pizzicato Baroque Symphony Nostalgic Green New Year March Wind Orchestra BrassBand Parade Choral No.9 Angel Voices Beat Classic Can Can Pop Elegant Waltz Chorus Waltz Love Waltz Fantasy World Movie Pirates Chorus Symphony Hollywood Sound Super Showtune TV DramaTrack *A TV DramaTrack *B Movie Symphonic Movie Soundtrack Yoo-Hoo Polka Pop Polka Funny Polka Casual Polka Country Town Tango Band Turkish Pops Oriental Dance Celtic Beat Celtic Waltz 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Trad Irish Pipe Irish Ballad ChinaSweetBallad ChinaRomanticBld China Dance Beat China Kung Fu China Trad Song China Trad Dance 2 Using the LCD display Many of the Electone’s operations are done from the LCD display. Pressing a button on the panel automatically calls up the relevant function for the corresponding button in the display. Depending on the display that appears, you can conveniently perform various functions and change values/settings by using the [A] – [D] buttons (located at the immediate right side of the LCD) and the DATA CONTROL dial (at the right of the [A] – [D] buttons). Basic Operation 1 Selecting from a list in the display Scroll bar In general (for example, for Voices and Rhythms), there are too many selectable items and menus to all be shown in the display. In such a list display, scroll bar will be shown at the right side of the display. When the scroll bar is shown in the display, you can scroll through the display vertically by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial and select the desired menu. When the marks [U] and [D] are shown at the right side of the scroll bar in the display, you can scroll the display and select the desired one by using the [A] or [D] buttons. Selecting an item and changing its value 1. Select the item 2. Change the value/setting In many displays (other than lists), items or parameters, such as Volume and Reverb, are shown in vertical order, with the corresponding values/settings at the immediate right of the items. In this type of display, you can select (highlight) the item by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] button (in the example above, the [B] button, which corresponding to the Reverb setting), letting you change the value/setting with the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the corresponding button (in this case, the [B] button). ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 25 Changing the Display Page Page buttons Display name 1 Page Basic Operation Shows the number of pages and the current page. The current page is shown with a long bar (_), while other available pages are shown as dots (.). Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page buttons are used to select the various ‘pages’ of the display (when available), with the currently selected page number appearing at the top right of the LCD. Use the [R] button to select the next page, and [L] to select the previous page. Simultaneously pressing both buttons selects Page 1. 26 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 3 Basic Operation Selecting the Display Language 1 1 2 Basic Operation The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default setting is English. Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel. The Utility display appears. Since the language is set in Utility display Page 1, select Page 1 with the page buttons if another page is shown. Press the [A] button to select the corresponding language then successively press the same button to switch the value between Japanese and English. NOTICE The language setting is automatically saved when another display is called up. Make sure to switch to another display before turning the power off. Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) All current settings including Registration Memory (in all banks), Display language and display contrast settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to a USB flash drive. Note that the operation here does not affect the settings of the wireless LAN settings, which can be initialized on page 200. 1 Reference Page Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive (page 118) Reference Page Initializing Registration Memory (page 120) Turn off the power. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 27 2 While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back on. 1 Basic Operation 3 Release the ENDING [1] button after the Voice Display appears. Confirming the Version of Your Electone You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure. 1 2 28 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. Select Page 8 by using the Page buttons. The Version appears in the display. 2 Voices This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections. Voices for the Upper Keyboard Voices for Pedalboard Voices for the Lower Keyboard 1 Voices for Each Keyboard Voices for the Upper Keyboard Reference Page Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead Voice 2. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and Upper Keyboard Voice 2 can be selected from the panel’s “UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2” section, while the Lead Voice 1 and Lead Voice 2 can be selected from the “LEAD VOICE 1/2” section. Voices for the Upper Keyboard 1 and Upper Keyboard 2 • Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 (page 36) • User buttons (page 39) • [TO LOWERD/SOLO] button (pages 38, 39) Voices for the Lead Voice 1 and Lead Voice 2 The Lead Voice sounds only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone—instruments that play the “leading” or most prominent part in an orchestra or band. As the default, only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 sounds when you play the Upper Keyboard. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 29 Voices for the Lower Keyboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel’s “LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2” section. Voices for the Lower Keyboard 1 and Lower Keyboard 2 2 Voices Reference Page [TO LOWERU] button (page 38) Voices for Pedalboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel’s “PEDAL VOICE 1/2” section. The Pedal Voice sounds one note at a time; when you simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will sound. Voices for the Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2 30 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 2 Voice Display The Voice Display allows you to easily check which Voices are being used for each keyboard. It also allows you to set whether the Voice for each section sounds or not by changing the On/Off status in the display. How to call up the Voice Display: 2 Voices Pressing the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section selects the Voice Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on.) The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pressing the Page buttons at the top right of the display. The Voice Display shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section and their On/Off status. Voice Display [Page 1] Voice name Voice Display [Page 2] On/Off status Voice name On/Off status On/Off status of the Voices You can set whether the Voice sounds or not by setting the on/off status in the Voice display. Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the Voice section you want to change to alternate between on and off. Page 1 and page 2 Each of the keyboards and Pedalboard have two basic Voice sections: Voice section 1 and Voice section 2. To select a Voice, you need to first select the desired Voice section. For this reason, the Voice Display actually has two separate displays: one for checking the Voice selected in Voice section 1, and the other for Voice section 2. Successive presses of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button at the top left on the panel switch between the Voice sections, and the corresponding display will be shown. Reference Page Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 (page 36) NOTE Selecting Page 1 or 2 turns the [VOICE SECTION 2] button off or on. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 31 When Voice section 1 is selected ([VOICE SECTION 2] button is off) Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Lead Voice 1 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Pedal Voice 1 2 Voices From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 1 on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lead Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1). When Voice section 2 is selected ([VOICE SECTION 2] button lights up) Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Lead Voice 2 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Pedal Voice 2 From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 2 on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2). Voice Display [Page 3] Reference Page Registration Memory (page 111) 32 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual For selecting the desired Bank to which you can store the Registration, or from which you can recall the Registration. For details, refer to page 116. 3 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 of the Voice section 1 are given here. For details on how to select a Voice of Voice section 2, see page 37. Selecting Voices for Voice section 1 Make sure that the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is off. If the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is lit, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button to turn the lamp off, and select Voice section 1. 2 Reference Page Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 (page 36) Voices 1 Lamp is off, indicating that you can select a Voice for Voice section 1. When the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off, you can select a Voice for Voice section 1 (in this case, the Upper Keyboard Voice 1), from the panel’s UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section. 2 Press one of the Voice buttons in the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/ 2 section. For example, if you have pressed the [ORGAN] button, the following display (Voice Menu) will appear. The Voice menu contains many Organ Voices, and they will be shown in the display. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 33 3 2 Select the Voice in the Voice menu display by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial. You can also select by pressing the [A]/[D] buttons. Voices Now go on to select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did for the Upper keyboard above. Adjusting the Voice volume There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the Volume buttons on the panel and setting the volume in the display. The Volume buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the setting in the display gives you fine control. Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse) Press one of the Volume buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired level for each Voice. The controls have five volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. Increasing the volume Decreasing the volume NOTE Depending on the volume value (set in the Voice Condition display), two adjacent Volume button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. NOTE Although setting the on/off status of the Voice section to off in the Voice Display results in a Volume value of 0 in the Voice Condition display, it will change to on when you increase the Volume value in the Voice Condition display or by using the panel Volume buttons, even if you have set it to off. 34 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Setting the Volume in the display (fine) Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again after selecting the Voice calls up the Voice Condition display. The Volume is displayed in the top of the Voice Condition display Page 1. Press the [A] button to select the “VOLUME” item, then adjust the volume by using the DATA CONTROL dial. The range of the Fine volume control is 0 – 24. Voice Condition Display [Page 1] Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected button. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the two displays. Voice Menu Display Voices 2 Voice Condition Display From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition display, see page 53. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 35 4 Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2 This feature lets you blend two Voices together—Voice section 1 with a different Voice in Voice section 2. This is useful for creating rich textures in the sound, playing the two Voices in a layer. For details on how to select a Voice for Voice section 1, see page 33. The instructions below explain how to selecting a Voice (Upper Keyboard Voice 2) for Voice section 2. 2 Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 Voices NOTE Switching between Voice sections 1 and 2 has no effect on which Voice is sounded by the keyboard. To switch between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button on the panel. For the Voice section which is indicated as “1/2” on the panel, you can select the Voice from each section by switching between sections 1 and 2 by pressing the [VOICE SECTION 2] button. Each press of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button alternates between the available Voice sections 1 and 2. When the button lamp is off, Voice section 1 is available. When the button lamp is lit, Voice section 2 is available. 36 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Voice Section 1 Voice Section 2 ([VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off) ([VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is lit) Since Voice section 1 is selected, you can select the Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lead Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1. Since Voice section 2 is selected, you can select the Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Lead Voice 1 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Lead Voice 2 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Pedal Voice 1 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Pedal Voice 2 Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 Since selection of Voices for Voice section 2 follows the same procedure throughout all Keyboard sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, are given here. 1 Make sure that the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit. If the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button to turn the lamp on, and select Voice section 2. 2 Voices Lamp is lit, indicating that you can select a Voice for Voice section 2. Now, you can select a Voice for Upper Keyboard Voice 2 from the panel’s UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section. 2 Press one of the Voice buttons in the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section. Indicates Upper Keyboard Voice 2 is selected. 3 Select the Voice you want to play by using the DATA CONTROL dial. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 37 4 Press one of the Volume buttons of the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level for the Upper Keyboard Voice 2. 2 Voices Since the default Volume level for Voice section 2 is set to minimum, the Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 will produce no sound even after you select the Voices for Voice section 2. To play the Voices for Voice section 2, make sure to press the Volume buttons of the selected Voice 1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level. When the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit, the Volume buttons of the Voice sections can be used to set the Volume level specifically for Voice section 2. Now set the Voices for Lead Voice 2, Lower keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 2 above. Reference Page On/Off status of the Voices (page 31) If you want to turn off the Voices of Voice section 2, set the volume level to minimum by using the Volume buttons of the selected Voice sections on the panel while the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit, or set the status to Off in the Voice Display [Page 2]. NOTE Even when the To Lower function is on, the Pedal Voices 1, 2 played on the Lower Keyboard will be controlled by the Sustain settings for the Pedal Voices. (page 63) About the To Lower function Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the TO LOWER button in each section is on. NOTE Even when the To Lower function is on, the Pedal Voices 1, 2 played on the Lower Keyboard will sound monophonic. The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section. When this function is on, the Lead Voice 1 and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. 38 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual NOTE About the Solo function The [TO LOWERD/SOLO] button functions as Solo when the [VOICE SECTION 2] button lights up, and function as TO LOWER when the [VOICE SECTION 2] is off. 2 Voices The ELS series Electone features an exclusive Solo function letting you instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all other Upper Keyboard Voices. This Electone can playback Songs containing the Solo function by using the MDR function. After playing back such a Song, [TO LOWERD/SOLO] button may light. In this status, Lead Voice 2 will not sound, so turn off the [TO LOWERD/SOLO] button. 5 Selecting Voices from the User buttons This Electone has a variety of Voices from which you can choose—greater than what is immediately apparent from the front panel controls. You’ve already learned (in “Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” above) how to select different Voices that are available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice. The Electone also has User buttons in each voice section, giving you access to even more voices. These User buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu selectors; any internal voices can be selected from these buttons. NOTE The Voices S-Violin, S-Flute, S-Alto Sax and S-Irish Pipe can be used only for Voice sections Lead Voices 1/2 and Pedal Voices 1/2. These four Voices cannot be selected for Voice sections Upper Keyboard Voices 1/2 and Lower Keyboard Voices 1/2, and are not shown in the display. User buttons The User buttons have two basic uses: For playing any Voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or Pedalboard. You can play on the Upper Keyboard, for example, Voices from any of the other Voice Menu pages, and not be limited to only the twelve buttons (twelve Voice Menu pages) that make up the Upper Voice section. For having two different Voices from the same Voice Menu page available for selection in the same song. For example, you can assign one of the Voices to a User button in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, the second Voice to the other User button in the same section. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 39 For example, select Pedal Voice “5: Contrabass 5” for User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1. 1 Make sure that the lamp of [Voice section 2] is off. If the [Voice section 2] lamp is lit, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button to turn the lamp off, and select Voice section 1. Lamp is off, indicating that you can select a Voice for Voice section 1. 2 Voices 2 Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections (in this case, User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section). The name of the selected category is displayed. Voice category 3 40 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Select one of the Pages (categories) with the Page buttons (in this case, “CONTRABASS”). Directly selecting the category To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and simultaneously press the desired Voice button. 1. While holding down the User button... Voices 2 2. Press the Voice button. 4 Select “5: CONTRABASS 5” by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Now you’ve assigned Contrabass 5 to be called up by User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1. You can set voices to the User buttons in any other Voice sections just as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 1 above. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 41 6 Voice List This list describes the preset Voices. • Super Articulation Voices Voices having the prefix “S-” at the beginning of the name. For details on the effects that are produced by playing the Super Articulation Voices, refer to the Description column. “AEM” is the trademark of Yamaha’s leading-edge tone generation technology. 2 Voices • Auto Articulation Voices Voices which produce effects by playing the keyboard when setting AUTO ARTICULATION (page 59) to ON in page 6 of the Voice Condition display. For details on the effects that are produced by playing the Auto Articulation Voices, refer to the Description column. Portamento or glissando effect will be produced only when you play intervals of minor 7th, Major 7th or octave in legato with the Voice “S-Violin” or “S-Alto Sax.” Category STRINGS/ VIOLIN 42 No. Voice Name Description 01 Strings 1 These Voices feature string ensemble sounds, with accurate simulation of all string instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola and violin. Variations include light plucking sounds, bow scratching noises and deep resonant sounds. 02 Strings 2 03 Strings 3 04 Strings 4 05 Strings 5 06 Strings 6 07 Strings 7 08 Strings 8 09 Strings 9 10 Strings 10 11 Strings 11 12 Slow Strings This string sound features a gentle initial attack. 13 Chamber Strs 1 These string ensembles are for chamber music. 14 Chamber Strs 2 15 Chamber Strs 3 16 Chamber Strs 4 17 Pizzicato Strs 1 18 Pizzicato Strs 2 19 Pizzicato Strs 3 These are sounds of stringed instruments being plucked by finger instead of being bowed. 20 Pizzicato Strs 4 21 Tremolo Strings This is the sound of tremolo strings on a single note. 22 Spiccato Strings This is the sound of lightly bouncing a bow on the strings of a stringed instrument. 23 Strings1 & 6 This is a combination of Strings 1 and Strings 6. 24 Strings2 & Viola This is a combination of Strings 2 and Viola. 25 Strings3 & 4 This is a combination of Strings 3 and Strings 4. 26 Strings6&Violin4 This is a combination of Strings 6 and Violin 4. 27 Violin4 & Cello This is a combination of Violin 4 and Cello. 28 Octave Strings 1 These are string ensemble sounds played in octaves. 29 Octave Strings 2 30 Octave Strings 3 31 Violin 1 32 Violin 2 33 Violin 3 34 Violin 4 35 Violin 5 36 Violin 6 37 Pizzicato Violin 38 Viola This instrument is slightly larger (and deeper) than a violin. It is used for mid-range parts. 39 Cello 1 These are warm and deep sounds. 40 Cello 2 41 S-Violin ELB-02 Owner’s Manual These deeply expressive sounds are suitable not only for classical music but, also jazz and country & western. Tonal variations include bright Voices and soft ones. This is the sound of a violin being plucked by finger. *1 *2 This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release sounds. Natural-sounding portamento is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and playing legato octaves. Category No. CONTRABASS 01 Contrabass 1 02 Contrabass 2 03 Contrabass 3 04 Contrabass 4 05 Contrabass 5 06 Contrabass 6 07 Pizzicato Bass 1 08 Pizzicato Bass 2 09 Acoustic Bass 1 10 Acoustic Bass 2 These acoustic bass sounds are ideal for jazz. This instrument is also known as “standup bass” and “upright bass.” Description These sounds are used for the lowest pitched parts. Variations range from deep to solo-type sounds. These are the sounds of contrabass being plucked by finger. 11 Bass & Cymbal This is a combination of acoustic bass and ride cymbal. 01 Brass Section 1 02 Brass Section 2 These are trumpet-based brass section sounds. Variations include sounds for classical, big band and other music. 03 Brass Section 3 04 Brass Section 4 05 Brass Section 5 06 Brass Section 6 07 Power Brass This is a crisp and powerful brass section sound. 08 Soft Brass This is a soft and sustained brass section sound. 09 Trombone Sec 1 10 Trombone Sec 2 These are trombone brass section sounds. Variations include a deep sound for classical music and a sweet, smooth sound for jazz ballads. 11 Trombone Sec 3 12 Trombone Sec 4 13 Trombone Sec 5 14 Trombone Sec 6 15 Brass1&Trumpet6 This is a combination of Brass Section 1 and Trumpet 6. 16 Brass2&Trumpet6 This is a combination of Brass Section 2 and Trumpet 6. 17 Horn 1 & 3 This is a combination of Horn 1 and Horn 3. 18 Octave Brass 1 19 Octave Brass 2 These are octave brass sounds with variations. They feature rich variations from strong, dynamic impact Voices with quick attack, to soft, warm Voices for enriching the overall sound. 20 Octave Brass 3 21 Octave Brass 4 22 Octave Brass 5 23 Octave Brass 6 24 Octave Brass 7 25 Octave Brass 8 26 Trumpet 1 27 Trumpet 2 28 Trumpet 3 29 Trumpet 4 30 Trumpet 5 31 Trumpet 6 32 Trumpet 7 33 Trumpet 8 34 Trumpet 9 35 Muted Trumpet 1 36 Muted Trumpet 2 37 Muted Trumpet 3 38 Muted Trumpet 4 39 Flugel Horn 1 40 Flugel Horn 2 41 Trombone 1 42 Trombone 2 43 Trombone 3 44 Muted Trombone 1 45 Muted Trombone 2 46 Horn 1 47 Horn 2 48 Horn 3 49 Horn 4 50 Horn 5 51 Horn 6 52 Muted Horn 2 Voices BRASS/ TRUMPET Voice Name These are bright, multi-purpose trumpet sounds. These sounds recreate the distinctive tone that results when a mute is inserted in the bell of trumpet. The normal “blasting” sound of the trumpet is suppressed, and the resulting sound is thin and metallic. This is a brass instrument with a characteristically warm and soft sound. The slide trombone has distinctive “stretching” and “shrinking” characteristics and features a wide range of expressive power, from brilliant and strong to soft and sweet. A mute effect makes the volume softer and alters the characteristics of this trombone Voice. These Voices are all recreations of horns with coiled tubing, and feature a soft, mellow sound. The Voices are indispensable for orchestra and brass band since they blend well with virtually any instrument sound, woodwind or brass. This horn has a sound that is made sharp and metallic by using a mute, and is even capable of mimicking the sound of a human Voice. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 43 Category BRASS/ TRUMPET WOODWIND/ FLUTE 2 Voices TUTTI 44 No. Voice Name Description 53 Tuba 1 This instrument is meant to be played in the lower octaves and has a rich, stable sound that supports brass band and orchestra. It has a wide expressive range, and is often used in playing humorous phrases. 54 Tuba 2 55 Euphonium This instrument features a characteristically broad and deep — even noble — sound, and is frequently used as a solo instrument. 56 Brass Bass 1 These are brass ensembles for playing in the lower octaves. They also have a timpani sound in unison. 57 Brass Bass 2 58 Brass Bass 3 01 Flute 1 02 Flute 2 03 Flute 3 04 Flute 4 05 Flute 5 06 Piccolo This instrument is one octave higher than flute and is meant to be played in the higher octaves. 07 Recorder 1 08 Recorder 2 This basic flute instrument is used in grade school music classes, and can be heard in some medieval and baroque music. It has a relatively hard and round sound. 09 Ocarina This instrument has a long history and features a simple, warm sound. The pitch and the sound quality are changed by the strength of the breath. 10 Whistle This sound is a reproduction of a human whistling. 11 Clarinet 1 12 Clarinet 2 13 Clarinet 3 This instrument has a wide sound range and distinctive character — with rich sound in the low end and crisp, bright tones in the high. It is used extensively in a variety of music styles including classical chamber music and swing jazz. 14 Clarinet 4 15 Bass Clarinet This instrument has a thick, deep sound and is played one octave lower than the normal clarinet. 16 Oboe 1 17 Oboe 2 An instrument of the woodwind double reed family, this has a high, reedy, sometimes nasal tone — yet it is also rich and warm, and can handle a wide range of expression and emotion. 18 Oboe 3 19 English Horn Also known as “cor anglais,” this instrument is larger than the oboe, and its timbre is well-suited for the performance of expressive, melancholic solos in slow orchestral pieces. 20 Bassoon 1 21 Bassoon 2 22 Bassoon 3 This instrument belongs to the double reed family and is used in the lower range. It is known for its humorous, expressive character as well as its wide range and agility, and can also be used as a solo instrument. 23 Alto Sax 1 24 Alto Sax 2 This light and transparent instrument Voice sounds like a bird singing. This instrument is equally good for both fast, quickly executed passages and smooth melodies. Among the woodwind instruments, this instrument is capable of the loudest sound, and plays a highly prominent role. Its wide expressive power makes it ideal for both classical music and jazz. 25 Tenor Sax 1 26 Tenor Sax 2 27 Tenor Sax 3 28 Soprano Sax 29 Baritone Sax This is a soft and low baritone sax sound, also used in R&B music. 30 Sax Ensemble 1 31 Sax Ensemble 2 These are saxophone ensemble sounds with variations, such as mellow sounds for classical music and a sax section for big band. 32 Sax Ensemble 3 33 Sax Ensemble 4 34 Sax Ensemble 5 35 Sax Ensemble 6 36 Woodwind Ens 1 37 Woodwind Ens 2 38 Woodwind Ens 3 This instrument is active in a wide range of genres, including classical and jazz. It is often used in soul and R&B music, or in slow, moody pieces. This instrument features a characteristic high, “stretching” sound, perfect for legato phrasing and sweet, emotional passages. These are woodwind ensemble sounds that change the instrument depending on the particular register played. 39 Woodwind Ens 4 40 Clarinet&Flutes This is a clarinet and flute ensemble. 41 Clarinet & Oboe This is a clarinet and oboe ensemble. 42 Flutes & Oboes This is a flute and oboe ensemble. 43 Woodwind&Glocken 44 S-Flute *1 *2 This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release sounds. 45 S-Alto Sax *1 *2 This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release sounds. Natural-sounding glissando is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and playing legato octaves. This is a combination of woodwind ensemble and glockenspiel. 01 Strings & Winds This is a strings and woodwind ensemble. 02 Strings&Brass 1 This is a strings and brass section ensemble. 03 Strings&Brass 2 04 Strings&Brass 3 05 Strings & Horn 06 Trumpets & Winds This is a trumpet, brass section, and woodwind ensemble. 07 Horns & Winds This is a horn and woodwind ensemble. 08 Orchestra Bass This is a tuba, contrabass, and timpani ensemble. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual This is a strings and horn ensemble. CHOIR PAD No. Voice Name 09 Brass & Sax 1 10 Brass & Sax 2 11 Brass & Sax 3 Description This is a brass section and sax ensemble. 12 Brass & Winds This is a brass section and woodwind ensemble. 13 Orchestra Hit 1 14 Orchestra Hit 2 These are popular, widely used sampled sounds in which the many instruments of the orchestra play together on one chord or note. They are used for dramatic hits and accents. 01 Choir 1 These are vocal chorus sounds. Variations include a male “ooh” sound, female “ahh,” and mixed choirs. 02 Choir 2 03 Choir 3 04 Choir 4 05 Choir 5 06 Choir 6 07 Choir 7 08 Choir 8 2 09 Choir 9 10 Vocal This is a solo human Voice singing “ahh.” 11 Gospel Choir This is a vocal chorus sound singing “whoo.” 12 Pop Vocals Bee 13 Pop Vocals Daa These Voices include “bee,” “daa,” and “mmh” sounds that are divided between male and female Voices based on range. 14 Pop Vocals Mmh 01 Smooth Pad 1 02 Smooth Pad 2 03 Smooth Pad 3 04 Smooth Pad 4 05 Smooth Pad 5 06 Smooth Pad 6 07 Smooth Pad 7 08 Resonance Pad 1 09 Resonance Pad 2 10 Resonance Pad 3 11 Resonance Pad 4 12 Resonance Pad 5 13 Resonance Pad 6 14 Resonance Pad 7 15 Resonance Pad 8 16 Bell Pad 1 17 Bell Pad 2 18 Bell Pad 3 19 Bell Pad 4 20 Bell Pad 5 21 Bell Pad 6 22 Bell Pad 7 23 Bell Pad 8 Voices Category TUTTI These continuous, sustained synth sounds feature a smooth, warm character that help support the other Voices in a passage, and often serve as transition sounds. These Voices have more of unique character and distinctiveness than the other synth pads, and feature sweeping filter effects and other dynamic sound variations when held. These continuous pad Voices feature gentle, bell sounds. There are several types of Voices here — including an initial bell sound, as well as a bright bell that pulses softly and continuously. 24 Bell Pad 9 25 Space Pad 1 26 Space Pad 2 27 Space Pad 3 28 Space Pad 4 29 Space Pad 5 30 Space Pad 6 31 Space Pad 7 32 Bright Pad This pad features a bright unison sound. 33 Noisy Pad 1 This pad features a bright, buzzy sound. 34 Noisy Pad 2 35 Noisy Pad 3 This pad features a mysterious, spacey sound. 36 Noisy Pad 4 37 Warm Pad This pad features a wide, spatial sound. 38 Dark Pad This pad features a calm, “floating” attack. 39 Sweep Pad 1 This pad features sounds that change over time. 40 Sweep Pad 2 41 Sweep Pad 3 42 Sweep Phase This pad features sounds that are processed with a phaser and that change over time. 43 Sweep Flanger 1 This pad features sounds that are processed with a flanger and that change over time. 44 Sweep Flanger 2 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 45 Category SYNTH 2 Voices 46 No. Voice Name Description 01 Synth Lead 1 These special synth sounds are designed for solo parts and lead lines. Included is a synth Voice that has a strong layered fourth interval below the main pitch. 02 Synth Lead 2 03 Synth Lead 3 04 Synth Lead 4 05 Synth Lead 5 06 Synth Lead 6 07 Synth Lead 7 08 Fat Saw Lead 1 09 Fat Saw Lead 2 10 Fat Saw Lead 3 11 Filter Lead This synth lead sound features an attack that simulates an analog synthesizer, with a strong touch response. 12 Soft Lead 1 These synth lead sounds simulate an analog synthesizer with a soft tone. 13 Soft Lead 2 14 Soft Lead 3 15 Soft Lead 4 These are fat and bright synth lead sounds. 16 Chorus Saw Lead This is a bright synth lead sound processed with chorus. 17 Vintage Lead 1 These strong synth lead sounds simulate a popular analog synthesizer. 18 Vintage Lead 2 19 Vintage Lead 3 20 Vintage Lead 4 21 Dance Chords 1 22 Dance Chords 2 23 Dance Chords 3 24 Club Lead 1 25 Club Lead 2 26 Pop Lead 1 27 Pop Lead 2 28 Pop Lead 3 29 Pop Lead 4 30 Pop Lead 5 31 Pop Lead 6 32 Synth Cla 1 33 Synth Cla 2 34 Synth Cla 3 35 Synth Cla 4 36 Synth Cla 5 37 Synth Cla 6 38 Synth Cla 7 39 Synth Sax This is a wind synth sound. 40 Synth Trumpet This is a bright analog synth sound with tension. 41 Synth Brass 1 42 Synth Brass 2 This is an abundant variety of synth brass Voices, from conventional sounds and octave unisons to unique, comical sounds. 43 Synth Brass 3 44 Synth Brass 4 45 Synth Brass 5 46 Synth Brass 6 47 Synth Brass 7 48 Synth Brass 8 49 Synth Brass 9 50 Synth Brass 10 51 Synth Brass 11 52 Fat Synth Brass This is a fat synth brass sound. 53 DetunedSawBrass1 These are powerful, detuned synth brass sounds. 54 DetunedSawBrass2 55 DetunedSawBrass3 56 Soft Synth Brass This is a soft synth brass sound. 57 PWM Brass Slow This is a synth brass sound that features tonal changes that are controlled by aftertouch. (PWM = Pulse Width Modulation) 58 PWM Brass Fast This is a synth brass sound with fast tonal changes. (PWM = Pulse Width Modulation) 59 Funky Analog This is a synth brass sound that features a characteristic initial attack. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual These bright, octave unison synth lead sounds are suitable for dance music. These detuned synth lead sounds are suitable for dance music. These light and round synth sounds are appropriate for solos and leads. These bright, round and fresh synth sounds are reminiscent of the clarinet. ORGAN No. Voice Name 60 Synth Strs 1 61 Synth Strs 2 62 Synth Strs 3 63 Synth Strs 4 64 Synth Strs 5 65 Synth Strs 6 66 Synth Strs 7 67 Synth Strs 8 68 Synth Strs 9 69 Synth Strs 10 Description These are spacious synth strings sounds. 70 Light SynStrings This is a useful synth strings sound. 71 FatSynStrings This is a fat synth strings sound. 72 Oct SynStrings 1 These are synth strings played in octaves. 73 Oct SynStrings 2 74 Synth Bell 1 75 Synth Bell 2 76 Synth Bell 3 77 Synth Bell 4 78 Synth Bell 5 79 Vox Bell This is a combination of Voice Pad and Synth Bell. 80 Pop Synth Bell This is a bright synth bell sound. 81 Synth Decay 1 These are unique decaying synth sounds. 82 Synth Decay 2 83 Synth Decay 3 84 Synth Decay 4 85 Synth Sequence This synth sound is suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios. 86 TranceSequence 1 These synth sounds are suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios used in dance music. 87 TranceSequence 2 88 Percussive Seq 1 89 Percussive Seq 2 01 Pipe Organ 1 02 Pipe Organ 2 03 Pipe Organ 3 04 Pipe Organ 4 05 Pipe Organ 5 06 Theatre Organ 1 07 Theatre Organ 2 08 Theatre Organ 3 09 Theatre Organ 4 10 Theatre Organ 5 11 Theatre Organ 6 12 Theatre Organ 7 13 Theatre Organ 8 14 TheatreTp&Kinura 15 Theatre Tp 16&8 2 These are synth sounds with variations including crisp, clangorous bright bell and soft, glassy sounds. Voices Category SYNTH These percussive synth sounds are suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios. The pipe organ has its roots in churches and cathedrals, and features a solemn, rich, majestic sound. The Voices here range from soft to powerful. This instrument evokes feelings of nostalgia, having been used extensively in silent movie theaters, skating rinks, restaurants (especially pizzerias) and baseball stadiums. 16 Harmonica 1 17 Harmonica 2 This instrument has a wide expressive range, and can be used for emotional, soft ballads and solos. 18 Harmonica 3 19 Reed Organ This is a small organ without pipes and features a warm sound. 20 Bandoneon 1 This musical instrument is often used for tango, and features a characteristic initial attack. 21 Bandoneon 2 22 Accordion 1 23 Accordion 2 A versatile, multi-purpose instrument that has a home in a wide variety of genres, including French chanson, Argentinian tango, polka and Tex-Mex music. 24 Accordion 3 25 Accordion 4 26 AccordionMuset. This is a musette tone accordion with a bright and unique tuning. 27 Jazz Organ 1 28 Jazz Organ 2 These electric organ sounds — great for jazz and R&B — are designed to be used with the rich rotary speaker effect. 29 Jazz Organ 3 30 Jazz Organ 4 31 Jazz Organ 5 32 Jazz Organ 6 33 Jazz Organ 7 34 Vintage Organ This is a vintage organ sound. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 47 Category ORGAN 2 Voices PIANO GUITAR 48 No. 35 Voice Name Description Vin Organ Slow 1 These vintage organ sounds feature a rotary speaker at slow speed. 36 Vin Organ Slow 2 37 VintageOrganFast This vintage organ sound features a rotary speaker at fast speed. 38 Pop Organ 1 These are multi-purpose organ sounds. 39 Pop Organ 2 40 Pop Organ 3 41 Pop Organ 4 42 Pop Organ 5 43 Pop Organ 6 44 Rock Organ 1 45 Rock Organ 2 46 Rock Organ 3 47 RockOrgan Slow 1 48 RockOrgan Slow 2 49 RockOrgan Slow 3 50 RockOrgan Slow 4 51 Rock Organ Fast This rock organ sound features a rotary speaker at fast speed. 52 Organ Bass 1 These pipe organ bass and jazz organ bass sounds are for lower register parts. 53 Organ Bass 2 54 Organ Bass 3 55 Organ Bass 4 01 Piano 1 02 Piano 2 03 Piano 3 These are hard, overdriven, distorted organ sounds, ideal for rock. These rock organ sounds feature a rotary speaker at slow speed. These are multi-purpose piano sounds. 04 Honkytonk Piano This purposely out-of-tune piano sound is used in ragtime, older jazz and blues, and country rock music. 05 Octave Piano 1 06 Octave Piano 2 These are piano sounds played in octaves, including Voices that are an octave lower or two octaves higher. 07 Octave Piano 3 08 Harpsichord 1 09 Harpsichord 2 This is the definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. 10 Harpsichord 3 11 Clavichord This is a soft keyboard instrument for classical music, with a unique sound when the keys are released. 12 DX E.Piano 1 These electric piano sounds are from the popular DX7 synthesizer. 13 DX E.Piano 2 14 DX E.Piano 3 15 DX E.Piano 4 16 DX E.Piano 5 17 DX E.Piano&Pad 1 18 DX E.Piano&Pad 2 19 Galaxy E.Piano This is a bright sound with a strong touch response. 20 Stage E.Piano 1 21 Stage E.Piano 2 These electric piano Voices feature the characteristic hammer and tine sound, with a bright yet warm feel. They also have tremolo effects. 22 Stage E.Piano 3 23 Stage E.Piano 4 24 Stage E.Piano 5 25 Stage E.Piano 6 26 Stack E.Piano 1 27 Stack E.Piano 2 28 Clavi 1 29 Clavi 2 These sounds combine the popular DX7 synthesizer with pads. These bright electric pianos are characterized by their sharp attack sound. These are funky sounds of a popular 1960’s era keyboard. 30 Clavi 3 01 Nylon Guitar 1 02 Nylon Guitar 2 03 Nylon Guitar 3 04 S-Nylon Guitar 1 *2 This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing. 05 S-Nylon Guitar 2 *2 This sound is the same as S-Nylon Guitar 1, but without the legato effect or the noise caused by fingers touching strings. 06 Flamenco Guitar 07 S-FlamencoGuitar *2 This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual These sounds are of an acoustic guitar with nylon strings. This guitar sound is suitable for flamenco music. PERCUSSION No. Voice Name Description 08 Steel Guitar 1 These sounds are acoustic guitar with steel strings. 09 Steel Guitar 2 10 S-Steel Guitar 1 *2 This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing. 11 S-Steel Guitar 2 *2 This sound is the same as S-Steel Guitar 1, but without the legato effect or the noise caused by fingers touching strings. 12 12Str Guitar This is a 12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds. 13 Jazz Guitar 1 These soft electric guitars are good for jazz solo passages. 14 Jazz Guitar 2 15 Jazz Guitar Oct 16 S-Jazz Guitar 17 E.Guitar 1 18 E.Guitar 2 19 E.Guitar 3 20 Clean Guitar 1 21 Clean Guitar 2 22 Clean Guitar 3 23 Clean Guitar 4 24 E.Guitar Amp 1 25 E.Guitar Amp 2 26 E.Guitar Amp 3 27 Muted Guitar 1 28 Muted Guitar 2 This electric guitar is mixed with a Voice one octave higher, and is good for jazz solo passages. *2 2 This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing. These electric guitar sounds include distortion and overdrive effects, as well a clean electric guitar. Voices Category GUITAR These electric guitar sounds are suitable for accompaniment and arpeggios. These electric guitar sounds feature amp simulations. These are muted guitar sounds. 29 Muted Guitar 3 30 S-Clean Guitar 1 *2 31 S-Clean Guitar 2 *2 32 Distortion Gtr 1 33 Distortion Gtr 2 34 Distortion Gtr 3 35 Distortion Gtr 4 36 Distortion Gtr 5 37 Distortion Gtr 6 38 Distortion Gtr 7 39 S-Dist Solid 1 *2 This is a distorted electric guitar sound that is suitable for solos. It is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing. 40 S-Dist Solid 2 *2 This is a distorted electric guitar sound that is suitable for solos. It is a Super Articulation Voice. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing. These are Super Articulation Voices. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers muting strings is reproduced. These are distorted guitar sounds. 41 Banjo This sound is suitable for country and dixieland jazz. 42 Mandolin This instrument is used commonly in Italian music and features a realistic plucked sound. 43 Pedal Steel Gtr1 These are Hawaiian guitar sounds. They are effective when used with the glide function. 44 Pedal Steel Gtr2 45 Harp 1 46 Harp 2 The gentle, beautiful sound of this instrument makes it ideal for soft passages, and it is often played glissando for dramatic effect. 47 Harp 3 01 Vibraphone 1 02 Vibraphone 2 03 Marimba 1 04 Marimba 2 This instrument is similar to the xylophone and has resonant tubes under the sound plates. However, the wooden keys give it a soft, more organic sound, and it has an especially rich lower register, giving it a wide expressive range and making it useful as a solo instrument. 05 Xylophone This instrument features dry and tight sounds. 06 Glockenspiel 1 These are sounds of a small glockenspiel, and feature a soft, shining sound. 07 Glockenspiel 2 This percussion instrument utilizes resonators fitted with metal discs, which in turn are connected by rod to a motor — which produces the distinctive, warm tremolo effect heard in some jazz music. 08 Celesta 1 09 Celesta 2 The celesta is similar in structure to the piano. Hammers move and hit metal bars (similar to the glockenspiel) when the keys are played, producing a pretty, somewhat fragile bell sound. 10 Music Box 1 These are music box sounds. 11 Music Box 2 12 Chime 1 13 Chime 2 14 Chime 3 These are chime sounds. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 49 Category TIMPANI ELECTRIC BASS 2 Voices SYNTH BASS WORLD 50 No. Voice Name Description 01 Timpani 1 02 Timpani 2 This dramatic sounding percussion instrument is unlike most drums in that it produces a definite pitch. It adds extra power and dynamic impact when played in unison with other instruments and plays a very important role in orchestral music. 03 Timpani Roll 1 These are timpani sounds played with a drum roll technique. 04 Timpani Roll 2 01 Fingered Bass 1 02 Fingered Bass 2 03 Fingered Bass 3 04 Fingered Bass 4 05 Fingered Bass 5 06 Fingered Bass 6 07 Fingered Bass 7 08 Slap Bass 1 09 Slap Bass 2 10 Slap Bass 3 11 Slap Bass 4 12 Slap Bass 5 13 Picked Bass 1 14 Picked Bass 2 15 Picked Bass 3 16 Picked Bass 4 17 Picked Bass 5 18 Fretless Bass 1 19 Fretless Bass 2 20 Fretless Bass 3 21 Fretless Bass 4 01 Funk Bass 1 02 Funk Bass 2 03 Funk Bass 3 04 Funk Bass 4 05 Funk Bass 5 06 Funk Bass 6 07 Funk Bass 7 08 Dance Bass 1 09 Dance Bass 2 10 Dance Bass 3 11 Dance Bass 4 12 Dance Bass 5 13 Dance Bass 6 14 Dance Bass 7 15 Dance Bass 8 16 Dance Bass 9 17 Dance Bass 10 18 Smooth Bass 1 19 Smooth Bass 2 20 Smooth Bass 3 21 Smooth Bass 4 22 Fat Bass 1 23 Fat Bass 2 These are electric bass sounds played by finger. These are percussive, slapped bass sounds. These slap bass Voices feature variations in the ‘thickness’ of the sounds and differences in how the strings are played. These electric bass Voices feature the bright attack of playing with a pick, and have variations in the ‘thickness’ of the sounds. These are smooth fretless bass sounds. These fretless bass Voices have a unique sound, and are best used with subtle, sliding pitch changes. These are synth bass sounds that feature a characteristic initial attack. These synth bass sounds are suitable for dance music. These are contemporary, “cool” synth bass sounds. These are fat synth bass sounds. 01 Pan Flute 1 02 Pan Flute 2 03 Bagpipe This is a traditional Scottish instrument, usually played with a continuous, low drone. The sound can be melancholy as well as dramatic and inspiring. 04 Dulcimer This is a characteristically clear and beautiful Voice. 05 Shakuhachi This is a traditional Japanese recorder made of bamboo. 06 Yokobue This is a traditional Japanese flute. 07 Shamisen This traditional Japanese instrument features three strings and a small body covered with animal skin. The bright, slightly buzzy sound is similar to the banjo, yet has a very strong Oriental flavor. 08 Koto This is a Japanese koto sound. 09 Taishokoto This is a Japanese Taisho koto sound. 10 Er Hu 1 11 Er Hu 2 Also known as the “Chinese violin,” this is a two-stringed bowed instrument, capable of producing sad, mysterious, or joyful melodies. 12 Er Hu 3 13 Ban Hu ELB-02 Owner’s Manual The pan flute (also known as “pan pipes”) is a simple instrument used in folk music of various countries, and consists of several stopped pipes of increasing length bound together in one line. It is a beautiful instrument that evokes the sound of wind in nature and is named after the Greek mythological god Pan. This traditional Chinese instrument features a clear, full sound, and is used as a solo instrument. No. Voice Name Description 14 Ma Tou Qin This two-stringed bowed instrument has been passed down through generations by Mongolian nomads. It is also known as the “horse-headed violin,” and features a strong yet sometimes delicate tone. 15 Di Zi This is a Chinese flute. It features a unique sound produced by the vibration of a thinly stretched membrane. 16 Suo Na This double-reed instrument is similar to an oboe, and features a joyful sound. 17 Hu Lu Si This Chinese folk instrument is a reed instrument with three bamboo pipes that pass through a gourd. The center pipe is played, while the two outer pipes are typically drone pipes. It features a soft and graceful sound. 18 Sheng The Chinese sheng is a mouth-blown free reed instrument consisting of vertical tubes, and apparently inspired the invention of the harmonica, accordion and reed organ. 19 Gu Zheng 1 20 Gu Zheng 2 This instrument is also called the Chinese koto. It has a long history during which it grew from 13 strings to the currently popular 21-string version. There are also 23-string and 25-string versions. It features a bright sound that is suitable for beautiful and lyrical melodies. 21 Yang Qin This percussive stringed instrument is a member of the zither family. Sound is produced by striking the strings with beaters. It is a relatively new Chinese instrument with origins influenced by the West. 22 Pi Pa This Chinese lute has a pear-shaped body, and it is used often for solo parts as well as accompaniment and ensembles. 23 Liu Qin This instrument is smaller than the Pi Pa, and is also called a “willow lute” because its shape resembles a leaf of a willow tree. It features a beautiful, crystal clear treble sound. 24 San Xian This traditional three-stringed Chinese instrument features snake skin stretched over both sides of a resonator. It is played with fingerpicks worn on the fingers to pluck the strings. 25 Surnay This vertical reed flute features a high-pitched tone. 26 Oud This traditional stringed instrument is from Saudi Arabia, Turkey, and nearby regions. 27 Sitar This Indian (or Hindustani) classical instrument has different resonances in the lower and mid/high ranges. 28 Steel Drum This pitched percussion instrument, originating in Trinidad in the West Indies, is made from 55-gallon oil drums and is apparently the only acoustic instrument invented in the 20th century. It has a bright and joyful tropical sound that belies its industrial source. 29 Kalimba 30 S-Irish Pipe 2 Voices Category WORLD African instrument. *1 *2 This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology to reproduce the characteristics of the Irish pipe. Colorful expression is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and using Pitch Bend and grace notes. *1 The Voices using AEM technology can be used for the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice sections, but they cannot be used for the Upper Keyboard Voice and Lower Keyboard Voice sections. *2 The Slide function (in the Voice Condition Display) is not applied to the Super Articulation Voices (having names beginning with the prefix “S-”). ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 51 3 Voice Controls and Effects The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects. Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound. However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital. The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system. Controls and Effects Selecting from the Voice Condition display, Pages 1-6 Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 Selecting from the panel Page 6 Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied Reference Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard page for Upper Keyboard changing Upper Keyboard Lower Keyboard Pedalboard the settings Lead Voice 1, 2 Voice 1, 2 Voice 1, 2 Voice 1, 2 Volume page 54 Reverb (send level) page 54 Pan page 54 Feet page 54 Brilliance page 55 Initial Touch page 55 –* After Touch page 55 –* Touch Vibrato page 55 –* Vibrato page 56 Delay page 56 Depth page 56 Speed page 56 Effect page 57 Type page 58 Parameters page 58 Value page 58 Transpose page 58 Tune page 58 Slide page 59 – – – Slide Time page 59 – – – Auto Articulation page 59 – – – Priority page 59 – ** – – Rotary Speaker page 60 Reverb (Depth) page 61 Sustain page 63 – * Although Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato are not applied to the Pedal Voices on the Pedalboard, they will be applied to the Pedal Voices on the Lower Keyboard when you turn the To Lower function to on. ** Priority is applicable only for Lead Voice 2. 52 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Selecting from the Voice Condition 1 display To call up the Voice Condition display: Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again. The Voice Condition display appears. Voice Condition Display Voice Controls and Effects 3 Currently selected page Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) consists of five display pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of six pages. Setting and adjusting the parameters Press the [A] – [D] buttons at the right of the display corresponding to the items or parameters you want to change, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired setting. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 53 Voice Condition [Page 1] 1 2 3 4 In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including volume and reverb send level. 3 1 Volume Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 34 for more information. Voice Controls and Effects Reference Page Reverb Depth (page 61) 2 Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the Reverb Depth setting in the Reverb display is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. See page 61 for details. 3 Panning Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. Range: L3 – C – R3 4 Feet Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2' setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. Preset is the original (factory) setting. 54 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Voice Condition [Page 2] Press the Page buttons to select Page 2. 1 2 3 4 When the Pedal Voice is selected When the Pedal Voice is selected, the Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato values are displayed in parentheses. Although you cannot use these functions with the Pedal Voices on the Pedalboard, you can use them with the Pedal Voices on the Lower Keyboard when you turn the To Lower function to on (page 38). Voice Controls and Effects 3 1 Brilliance For adjusting the tonal quality of the Voice, making it brighter or warmer. Set the desired brilliance for each Voice over a range of “-3” (warmest) to “+3” (brightest). 2 Initial Touch Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. The minimum setting produces no effect. Range: 0 – 14 3 After Touch Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them. The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect. Range: 0 – 14 NOTE Initial Touch may not be effective on some organ Voices. NOTE After Touch has no effect on percussive Voices (such as piano or vibraphone), percussion sounds, or some organ Voices. 4 Touch Vibrato Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 55 Voice Condition [Page 3] Press the Page buttons to select Page 3. 1 Vibrato 3 The Vibrato function varies the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected. Vibrato Control Speed Delay Depth Voice Controls and Effects 1 Preset/User Toggles between PRESET and USER. Selecting PRESET calls up the original (factory) vibrato settings for the Voice. When PRESET is selected, the Delay, Depth and Speed parameters cannot be edited. Selecting User lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself. 1 2 3 4 2 Delay Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset. Range: 0 – 14 3 Depth Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect. Range: 0 – 14 4 Speed Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of the vibrato. Range: 0 – 14 56 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Voice Condition [Page 4] Press the Page buttons to select Page 4. Effect Category 1 2 3 4 Effect 3 You can select the effects applied to each Voice section. PRESET The effect type that best matches and is most suited to the currently selected sound is automatically selected. REVERB Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms. DELAY Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound. ER/KARAOKE The ER effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb sound, while Karaoke recreates the deep echo effect used in Karaoke sing-along applications. CHORUS Creates a warm effect as if several instances of the same sound were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated. FLANGER This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant sound. PHASER Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up/down filter sweep effect. TREMOLO/AUTO PAN This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image both front and back, and left and right. ROTARY SPEAKER This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn. The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). Keep in mind that the Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by selecting it. To use the Rotary Speaker effect, see “Rotary Speaker” on page 60. DISTORTION This effect adds distortion to the sound. DISTORTION+ A combination of Distortion, Delay and Compressor effects. AMP SIMULATOR A simulation of a guitar amp or microphone amp. WAH This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound, producing a “wah-wah” sound. DYNAMIC This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain control—letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus give more “punch” to the sound. EQ/ENHANCER EQ: This processing tool lets you change the level for specific frequency ranges in the sound, and affects the overall sound quality. Enhancer: This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in the high frequency sound range overtone—not merely making the sound brighter, but giving it more clarity and presence. PITCH CHANGE Changes the pitch of the input signal. MISCELLANEOUS This category contains a wide range of special effects. THRU Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing. Voice Controls and Effects 1 Effect Category You can select the Effect Category applied to each Voice section. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 57 Reference Page Effect List (page 64) 2 Effect Type Effect types are displayed corresponding to the selected effect category. Effect Parameters You can set the parameters of effect type in 3 and 4 below. Generally, the effect parameters settings are optimally balanced for the selected effect type, so there is no need to follow the steps below unless you want to change the setting. If you want to change the setting, select the parameter in 3, then change the value in 4. For details on each parameter type, page 64. If you want to use the Rotary Speaker effect, set the Speed and Mode settings in the Rotary Speaker display. See “Rotary Speaker” on page 60. 3 3 Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type. Voice Controls and Effects 4 Value setting Voice Condition [Page 5] Press the Page buttons to select Page 5. 1 2 Reference Page Transpose (for entire instrument); (page 181) Reference Page Pitch (for entire instrument); (page 181) 58 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 1 Transpose Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Range: -6 – +6 2 Tune Determines the fine pitch settings for each Voice section, letting you create a warmer, richer sound by slightly detuning one Voice relative to another. Range: -64 – +63 Voice Condition [Page 6] (only for Lead Voice) Press the Page buttons to select Page 6. 1 2 3 4 In this Page, you can set whether or not the Slide function/Auto Articulation function is applied to the Lead Voice, and how the monophonic Lead Voice 2 responds to your polyphonic playing (with Last or Top mode). NOTE Voice Controls and Effects 1 Slide On/Off Slide applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective within a one-octave range for the Lead Voice. Determines the on/off status of the Slide effect. 3 The parameters here are not available when a Super Articulation Voice is selected. 2 Slide Time Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the value, the slower the speed. Range: 0 – 14 3 Auto Articulation Determines the on/off status of the Auto Articulation effect. The settings here, available only for Super Articulation Voices, produce effects (such as pitch bend and glissando) which are characteristic of the corresponding acoustic instrument, making your keyboard performance more realistic. Setting this to ON will apply various effects such as pitch bend and glissando to your keyboard performance. 4 Priority (only for Lead Voice 2) Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top. • LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously. • TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously. NOTE For information about what effect is produced by setting Auto Articulation to ON, see “Voice List” on pages 42. As listed on these pages, Auto Articulation is not available for some Voices. NOTE Priority will not function when Solo function is on. Reference Page About the Solo function (page 39) ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 59 Rotary Speaker 1 Select “Rotary Speaker” as the effect category. Select “Rotary Speaker” here 3 Voice Controls and Effects 2 Set the Speed Control to on, then adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker. Speed Control, Speed and Mode settings are specified in the Rotary Speaker display. The Rotary Speaker display can be called up from Page 3 of the Utility display. Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility display, then select Page 3 by using the Page buttons. The settings in this display are common to all Voice sections. Rotary Speaker Display 1 2 3 1 Speed Control Determines the on/off setting of the Rotary Speaker mode. When this is set to on, rotating speed of the Rotary Speaker becomes fast, and the speed can be set in “2 Speed.” When set to off, the rotating speed of the Rotary Speaker becomes slow or stops; a slow chorus effect is applied or the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops completely). Slow or Stop can be set in “3 Mode.” 2 Speed Determines the speed of the speaker rotation. Press the [B] button to select the “Speed,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz 3 Mode Determines the slow/stop mode when the “Speed Control” is set to off. If Slow is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied. If Stop is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops completely). Pressing the [C] button alternates between slow and stop. 60 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect in real time from the panel (in UTILITY) or conveniently from the Left Footswitch. 3 Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left Footswitch. You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel (Speed Control parameter in UTILITY, Page 3), but also by using the Left Footswitch, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned. See “4 Rotary Speaker” on page 180 for details. 3 Voice Controls and Effects 2 Selecting from the panel The Reverb and Sustain displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the panel. Reverb Reverb adds an ambient echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for the entire system. To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages, press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display appears. The Reverb display consists of two pages. [Page 1] Reverb Display 1 2 3 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 61 NOTE Depending on the reverb depth value (set in the Reverb display), two adjacent REVERB button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. Reference Page The amount of reverb applied to each Voice section (page 54) Reference Page Changing the rhythm volume/reverb (page 74) 3 Reference Page Effect List (page 64) 1 Depth Determines the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. Coarse reverb depth settings are made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB buttons let you make coarse adjustment over a five-step range to the reverb depth, while this parameter gives you fine control. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the settings in Voice Condition display, Page 1 (page 54) have no effect. Range: 0 – 24 2 Type Selects the Reverb Type for the Voice sections. Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so on. After changing the reverb type, the Time parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type. Voice Controls and Effects 3 Time Determines the reverb length for the Voice sections. Higher settings result in a longer reverb sound. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s [Page 2] Reverb Display 1 2 Reference Page Effect List (page 64) 1 Type Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment and keyboard percussion. 2 Time Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment and keyboard percussion. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s 62 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Sustain The sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices, causes Voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control. The Sustain effect is not applied to the Lead Voices. Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain. The SUSTAIN display appears. Voice Controls and Effects 3 Sustain On/Off The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press the button again to turn sustain off and the lamp turns off. When the lamp is off, sustain does not affect the corresponding keyboard. Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps are on or off before you start to play. Sustain Length Sustain Display [Page 1] Sustain Display [Page 2] The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard. Use the Page buttons and appropriate [A] – [D] buttons to select the desired Voice section, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 12 NOTE The minimum setting results in no sustain. Turning sustain off automatically resets the sustain length to the default setting. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 63 3 Effect List EFFECT TYPE Description REVERB HALL 1 TEMPO CROSS1 Tempo-synchronized cross delay. TEMPO CROSS2 HALL 3 TEMPO CROSS3 HALL M TEMPO CROSS4 HALL L ER/KARAOKE XG HALL 1 ER 1 XG HALL 2 ER 2 ROOM 2 Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. ROOM 3 GATE REVERB1 GATE REVERB2 Isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb. Creates a unique, powerful effect by cutting short the reverberation of a deep reverb. REVERS GATE Simulates gated reverb played back in reverse. ROOM S KARAOKE 1 ROOM M KARAOKE 2 Echo for karaoke. Delay effect with feedback. ROOM L KARAOKE 3 XG ROOM 1 CHORUS XG ROOM 2 CHORUS 1 XG ROOM 3 CHORUS 2 ROOM 4 Voice Controls and Effects STAGE 1 STAGE 2 Reverb simulating the acoustics of a stage. Suitable for solo instruments. XG STAGE 1 PLATE 1 PLATE 2 Creates an effect of warmth and depth by periodically changing the pitch. XG CHORUS 1 XG CHORUS 2 XG CHORUS 3 XG STAGE 2 XG CHORUS 4 Reverb simulating the effect of a vibrating plate reverb. XG PLATE GM CHORUS 1 GM CHORUS 2 GM CHORUS 3 GM PLATE GM CHORUS 4 WHITE ROOM A short reverb creating a warm ambience. FB CHORUS ATMO HALL A long reverb creating a wide spatial effect. CHORUS FAST ACOSTIC ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. Standard setting. DRUMS ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. For drum sounds. CHORUS LITE AMB CHORUS Chorus with early reflection sound. CELESTE 1 A deeper chorus that adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound with a 3phase LFO. CELESTE 2 PERC ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. For percussion sounds. CELESTE 3 TUNNEL Reverb simulating a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. AMB CELESTE Celeste effect with early reflection sound. SYMPHONIC A chorus that adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste. CANYON BASEMENT A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. A reverb with a unique resonance. CELESTE 4 XG SYMPHONIC AMB SYMPHO Symphonic effect with early reflection sound. ENS DETUNE 1 Chorus without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound. DELAY DELAY LCR XG DLY LCR Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center). DELAY LR Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. ECHO Produces two independent delayed sounds: L and R. Also capable of producing vintage delay effects. CROSS DELAY1 CROSS DELAY2 TEMPO DELAY1 ENS DETUNE 2 FLANGER FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 XG FLANGER 1 The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed. XG FLANGER 2 Tempo-synchronized delay. GM FLANGER TEMPO DELAY2 64 Description Tempo-synchronized echo. HALL 2 ROOM 1 3 Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall. EFFECT TYPE TEMPO ECHO ELB-02 Owner’s Manual XG FLANGER 3 Creates a modulating effect or a sound similar to that of a jet airplane. Description Simulates an analog flanger. Irregular LFO waveforms can also be selected. TEMP FLANGER Tempo-synchronized flanger. DYNA FLANGER Enables the delay time of the flanger to respond dynamically to the input level. VIN FLANGER1 Simulates an analog flanger, with a deep vintage sound. VIN FLANGER2 AMB FLANGER PHASER 2 Periodically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound. PHASER 3 EP PHASER 1 EP PHASER 2 DUAL ROTSP 2 DUAL ROT WRM DIST+ROT SP Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series. ODRV+ROT SP Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series. AMP+ROT SP Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series. DIST+2ROT SP Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. ODRV+2ROT SP Periodically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound. For electric piano. Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. AMP+2ROT SP Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Tempo-synchronized phaser. DISTORTION EP PHASER 3 TEMP PHASER1 TEMP PHASER2 DIST HARD 1 DYNA PHASER Enables the phaser modulation frequency to respond dynamically to the input level. DIST HARD 2 VIN PHASER 1 Simulates an analog phaser, with a deep vintage sound. DIST SOFT 2 VIN PHASER 2 Description More complex and textured simulation of the independent rotation of the rotary speaker horn and rotor. (Bright / Warm) DUAL ROT BRT Flanger with early reflection sound. PHASER PHASER 1 EFFECT TYPE DUAL ROTSP 1 Distortion is an effect that adds “dirty” and “edgy” noise/distortion to the sound. (Hard / Soft) DIST SOFT 1 ST DIST HARD Stereo distortion. (Hard / Soft) VIN PHSR ST1 ST DIST SOFT VIN PHSR ST2 OVERDRIVE Adds mild distortion to the sound. VIN PHSR ST3 ST OVERDRIVE Stereo overdrive. VIN PHSR ST4 XG DIST Adds some “edgy” distortion to the sound. XG ST DIST Stereo distortion. TREMOLO 2 V_DIST HARD XG TREMOLO V_DIST SOFT Simulates the sound of a vintage tube, fuzz effect, etc. EP TREMOLO COMP+DIST GT TREMOLO 1 XG CMP+DIST TREMOLO/AUTO PAN TREMOLO 1 Periodically changes the volume. GT TREMOLO 2 ORG TREMOLO V_DIST WARM VIBE VIBRATE Adds an vibrato effect, much like that of a vibraphone. V_DIST CLS H T_TREMOLO Tempo-synchronized tremolo. V_DIST METAL AUTO PAN Periodically moves the sound image both left and right, and front and back. V_DIST CRUNC XG AUTO PAN1 XG AUTO PAN2 Simulates the sound of a vintage tube, fuzz effect, etc. (Warm / Classic, Hard / Classic, Soft / Metal / Crunch / Blues / Edge / Solid / Clean / Twin / Rockabilly / Jazz Clean / Fusion) V_DIST BLUES V_DIST SOLID Tempo-synchronized auto pan. T_AUTO PAN 2 V_DIST CLN 1 V_DIST CLN 2 ROTARY SPEAKER XG ROTARY SP V_DIST CLS S Since a Compressor is included in the first stage, steady distortion can be produced regardless of changes in input level. V_DIST EDGY EP AUTO PAN T_AUTO PAN 1 V_DIST TWIN Simulates a rotary speaker. V_DIST ROCA ROTARY SP 1 V_DST JZ CLN ROTARY SP 2 V_DST FUSION ROTARY SP 3 DISTORTION+ ROTARY SP 4 DIST+DELAY Distortion and Delay connected in series. ROTARY SP 5 ODRV+DELAY Overdrive and Delay connected in series. XG DIST+DLY Distortion and Delay connected in series. 2WAY ROT SP 3 Voice Controls and Effects EFFECT TYPE V_FLANGER Simulates a rotary speaker horn and rotor by dividing them into H (high) and L (low) bands. XG ODRV+DLY Overdrive and Delay connected in series. CMP+DIST+DLY Compressor, Distortion and Delay connected in series. CMP+ODRV+DLY Compressor, Overdrive and Delay connected in series. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 65 EFFECT TYPE EFFECT TYPE B LGND D CLN British stack amp simulator with crunch sound settings. XG CMP+OD+DL Compressor, Overdrive and Delay connected in series. US CMB TWIN Simulates an American combo amp. USCMB RCH CL V_DIST H+DLY V Distortion Hard and Delay connected in series. V_DIST S+DLY V Distortion Soft and Delay connected in series. DIST+T DLY Distortion and Tempo Delay connected in series. JZ CMB WARM ODRV+T DLY Overdrive and Tempo Delay connected in series. US HI GN RIF CMP+DST+TDLY Compressor, Distortion and Tempo Delay connected in series. CMP+OD+TDLY2 Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay connected in series. USCMB THN CL USCMB CRUNCH JZ CMB BASIC US HI GN DTY B LD DIRTY B LD DRIVE Voice Controls and Effects CMP+OD+TDLY4 B LD HARD CMP+OD+TDLY5 WAH AUTO WAH VDST H+TDLY2 VDST S+TDLY1 VDST S+TDLY2 V Distortion Hard and Tempo Delay connected in series. AMP SIM Simulates a guitar amp. Simulates analog wah, for a strongly vintage sound. Periodically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. TOUCH WAH 1 Enables you to change the wah effect with the strength of your playing. TOUCH WAH 2 Stereo amp simulator. V_TOUCH WAH Simulates analog wah, for a strongly vintage sound. Enables you to change the wah effect with the strength of your playing. AT WAH+DIST Distortion can be applied to the output of Auto Wah. ST AMP SIM 3 ST AMP SIM 4 XG AT WH+DST ST AMP SIM 5 AT WH+DST HD XG ST AMP AT WH+DST HV ST AMP SOLID AT WH+DST LT ST AMP CRUNC AT WAH+ODRV ST AMP BLUES XG AT WAH+OD ST AMP CLEAN Overdrive distortion can be applied to the output of Auto Wah. AT WH+OD HD ST AMP HARP SML ST OVRDR Creates a “wah wah” sound by periodically modulating the center frequency of a wah filter. V_AUTO WAH ST AMP SIM 2 SML ST DIST Simulates the sound of a British stack amp. TOUCH WAH 3 XG AMP SIM ST AMP SIM 1 XG AUTO WAH V Distortion Soft and Tempo Delay connected in series. AMP SIMULATOR Simulates the sound of an American highgain amp. US HIGN SOLO B LD GAINER VDST H+TDLY1 Simulates a jazz chorus combo amp. US HIGN BURN CMP+OD+TDLY3 CMP+OD+TDLY6 Stereo effect that simulates a small guitar amp. Creates a distorted sound ideal for electric guitar. SML ST VINTG AT WH+OD HV AT WH+OD LT TC WAH+DIST XG TC WH+DST SML ST HEAVY 66 Description Compressor, Distortion and Delay connected in series. CMP+OD+TDLY1 3 Description XG CMP+DT+DL Distortion can be applied to the output of Touch Wah. TC WH+DST HD B CMB CLASC British combo amp simulator with vintage sound settings. B CMB TOPBST British combo amp simulator with highend boost sound setting. B CMB CUSTOM British combo amp simulator with commonly used settings. B CMB HEAVY British combo amp simulator with heavy sound settings. B LGND BLUES British stack amp simulator with bluesy sound settings. TC WAH+OD LT B LGND HVY 1 British stack amp simulator; heavy sound 1 settings. EP TOUCH WAH EP Touch Wah. WAH+DST+TDLY Wah, Distortion and Tempo Delay connected in series. WAH+OD+TDLY1 Wah, Overdrive and Delay connected in series. B LGND HVY 2 British stack amp simulator; heavy sound 2 settings. B LGND CLEAN British stack amp simulator with clean sound settings. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual TC WH+DST HV TC WH+DST LT TC WAH+ODRV XG TC WAH+OD Overdrive distortion can be applied to the output of Touch Wah. TC WAH+OD HD TC WAH+OD HV CLAVI TC WAH WAH+OD+TDLY2 Clavinet Touch Wah. Description EFFECT TYPE Description VOICE CANCEL Attenuates the vocal part of a CD or other source. TALKING MOD Adds a vowel sound to the input signal. LO-FI Degrades the audio quality of the input signal. DYNA FILTER Enables the filter cutoff frequency to respond dynamically to the input level. DYNA RINGMOD Enables the ring modulator to respond dynamically to the input level. RING MOD An effect that modifies the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to the high frequency of the input. ISOLATOR Controls the level of a specified frequency band of the input signal. T_A.WH+OD LT LOOP FX1 DYNAMIC LOOP FX2 Degrades the audio quality of the input signal. XG WH+DST+DL WAH+ODRV+DLY XG WH+OD+DLY Wah, Distortion and Delay connected in series. Wah, Overdrive and Delay connected in series. TEMPO AT WAH Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. T_A.WH+DST Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. Distortion can be applied to the output of Auto Wah. T_A.WH+DSTHD T_A.WH+DSTHV T_A.WH+DSTLT T_A.WH+ODRV T_A.WH+OD HD Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. Overdrive distortion can be applied to the output of Auto Wah. T_A.WH+OD HV M BAND COMP COMPRESSOR Multi-band compressor that allows you to adjust the compression effect for three individual frequency bands. Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded, reducing wide dynamic differences in sound volume. A sense of attack can also be added to the sound. LO-FI DRUM 1 LO-FI DRUM 2 LO-FI DRUM 3 LO-FI DRUM 4 DAMPER RESO COMP MED Compressor with medium setting. THRU COMP HEAVY Compressor with heavy setting. THRU COMP MELODY Compressor for a melody part. COMP BASS Compressor for a bass part. V_COMPRESSOR Simulates the vintage sound of an analog compressor. NOISE GATE Removes unnecessary sound from the original sound. Primarily used to remove noise from the beginning and end of distinct sounds. 3 Degrades the audio quality of the input signal. Ideal for drum sounds. Voice Controls and Effects EFFECT TYPE WAH+DIST+DLY Recreates the deep and broadly resonant sound that is produced when you use the damper pedal. Bypass without applying an effect. EQ/ENHANCER ST 2BAND EQ A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH equalization. ST 3BAND EQ A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalization. XG 3BAND EQ A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalization. EQ DISCO Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies of the audio signal, as is typical in most disco music. EQ TELEPHONE Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies of the audio signal, for simulating the sound heard through a telephone receiver. HM ENHANCER Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out. XG HM ENHNCE PITCH CHANGE PITCH CHANGE Changes the pitch of the input signal. XG PCH CHG 1 XG PCH CHG 2 MISCELLANEOUS AMBIENCE Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width. IMPULSE EXP Impulse expander that adds a more metallic resonance. RESONATOR Adds sonic resonance characteristic of wooden body instruments. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 67 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion This Electone features hundreds different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to directly play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard. 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons Hundreds rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the front panel. To select and play a rhythm 1 Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the front panel. For example, if you have pressed the [DANCE] button, the following display (Rhythm Menu) will appear. Rhythm Menu Display The Rhythm menu contains many Dance rhythms, and they will be shown in the display. 68 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 2 Select the Rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial. You can also select by pressing the [A]/[D] buttons. Here, we’ve selected “12: Dancefloor.” 3 Press the [START] button to immediately start the rhythm. Reference Page Operating the rhythm from the panel (page 71) Reference Page 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Accompaniment (page 79) To stop the rhythm, press this button again. You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel—and add the accompaniment to the rhythm. 4 Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume buttons. The buttons have five volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no rhythm sound, to a maximum of full volume. Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from the Rhythm Condition display (page 74). Reference Page Changing the rhythm volume/reverb (page 74) ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 69 Rhythm Structure Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a variation of the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back. INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several measures repeats indefinitely. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Selected Main section’s lamp is lit FILL IN This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section. Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the rhythm automatically stops. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit 70 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Operating the rhythm from the panel You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest and “spice” to your performance. To start/stop the rhythm: START The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press the button again. 4 NOTE When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops the rhythm. For details on Memory and the A.B.C. function, see page 82. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion SYNCHRO START The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the rhythm. INTRO Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the rhythm. While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears: ENDING Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing. NOTE Pressing the ENDING [1] button during playback of the Main section will first call up the Fill In pattern, then the Ending 1 pattern. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 71 To switch the rhythm sections: You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) lights. To use the Fill In patterns: As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion NOTE You can record the currently selected section to Registration Memory. However, you cannot record the on/off status of the Auto Fill In function. When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto Fill In function is set in the Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm button again. Select Page 4 by using the Page buttons. When Auto Fill is set to ON, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. Each press of the [A] button toggles between ON and OFF. To use the Break patterns: As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK] button. This lets you vary a repeating rhythm with dynamic breaks. 72 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the tempo You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons. Tempo 1 2 Bar/Beat Lights up at the first beat in the bar during the playback of the Rhythm. 4 Bar (measure) Beat Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 TEMPO buttons For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button increases the tempo and pressing the left button decreases it. Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons simultaneously to restore the tempo to the original setting. 2 Tempo Indicator (Bar/Beat Indicator) Tempo indicator shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per minute. The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute. When the rhythm begins playing, the Tempo indicator changes function to a Bar/ Beat indicator. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 73 Changing the rhythm volume/reverb You can adjust the rhythm volume or amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. You can also have a Fill In play automatically by setting the Auto Fill function to ON in Display Page 4. To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm button again. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion [Page 1] Rhythm Condition Display 1 2 Reference Page Reverb Depth (page 61) NOTE Depending on the volume value (set in the display), two adjacent Volume button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. Reference Page Adjusting the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment: (page 81) 74 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual The buttons at the right side of the display and DATA CONTROL dial are used to control the rhythm volume and reverb. 1 Percussion Volume Fine adjustment of the rhythm percussion volume. Same as the panel Rhythm Volume buttons. Press the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 2 Percussion Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm percussion. When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 2 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that have been created with this Electone or other models equipped with the Rhythm Pattern Program function (such as the ELS series). For details on selecting original User rhythms, see next page. This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from the same category to be selected from different buttons; one from the original Rhythm button, and the others from the User buttons. For example, to call up “25: Modern Shuffle,” select the R&B category. 1 Press User button [1] at the right of the Rhythm buttons. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 4 The rhythm category appears at the upper right of the display. 2 Select one of the Pages (categories) with the Page buttons. In this case, select Page “R&B.” Metronome When you want to use the Metronome, select the “METRONOME” Page. Currently selected Page ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 75 3 Select the “25: Modern Shuffle” rhythm with the DATA CONTROL dial. This step assigns “25: Modern Shuffle” to the User button [1]. You can call up the “25: Modern Shuffle” the next time you press the [1] button. To call up a User rhythm User rhythms created on other Electones that have Rhythm Pattern Programming functions, such as the ELS series, can be selected and played from the User buttons in the panel Rhythm section. To call up the User rhythm, load back the registration containing the User rhythm to Electone in advance. For details on loading back the Registration, see “Recalling Recorded Registrations” on page 154 and “Playing Back a Song” on page 155. This procedure assigns the User rhythms to the User numbers 1 – 48. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons. 2 Use the Page buttons to select Page “USER RHYTHM.” 3 76 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Select the User rhythm number (User 1-48) by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. 3 Rhythm List This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Romantic Waltz *2 40 Simple March *1 19 Classical Menuet *2 POPS 02 Simple 6/8 March *1 20 Green Fantasia Simple 8Beat Pop Marching Band 1 *1 *2 01 03 02 Simple 3/4 Pop 04 Marching Band 2 *1 *2 03 SimpleShufflePop 05 Marching Band 3 04 8Beat Light 1 12 Hollywood Gospel 06 German March 05 8Beat Light 2 13 Gospel Party 07 6/8 March 06 16Beat 14 New Gospel 08 6/8 Kids 07 British 16Beat 15 Gospel Shuffle 09 Orchestral March 08 Guitar Pop 16 Jazz Funk 09 Classic 16Beat 17 Kool Funk 10 Fusion Shuffle 18 Let's Funk 11 Folk Rock 19 Motor City 12 Easy Pop 20 Detroit Pop 10 *1 Galaxy Ship 12 SF March 1 13 SF March 2 14 Blockbuster 15 Broadway 16 Showtune 17 Wild West 18 Pop Classics 19 French 50s Guitar Serenade SWING&JAZZ 01 Simple Big Band *1 02 Simple ComboJazz *1 03 Big Band 1 04 Anime Fantasy 11 21 *1 *1 20 6/8 Organ March 21 Pub Piano *2 22 Baroque *2 23 Baroque Concerto *2 24 Strings Concerto *2 25 Choral Symphony *2 26 Brass Band Hymn *2 WALTZ *1 Big Band 2 05 Big Band 3 06 Orch Big Band 1 07 Orch Big Band 2 08 Big Band Jazz 09 Big Band Fast 10 Big Band Bop 11 Movie Panther 12 Jungle Drum 13 Medium Jazz 1 14 Medium Jazz 2 15 Acoustic Jazz 1 16 Acoustic Jazz 2 17 Combo Swing 18 InstrumentalJazz 19 Manhattan Swing 20 Five-Four 21 Trad Piano Jazz 22 Jazz Ballad 1 23 Jazz Ballad 2 01 Waltz 02 Orchestral Waltz 24 Moonlight 03 Vienna Waltz 1 25 Winter Song 04 Vienna Waltz 2 05 Gentle Waltz 27 ChristmasBallad 06 Classic Waltz 28 Movie Swing 07 Jazz Waltz 1 29 Afro Cuban 1 08 Jazz Waltz 2 30 Afro Cuban 2 09 Jazz Waltz 3 31 Foxtrot 10 JazzWaltz Medium 26 32 ChristmasShuffle Slowfox Organ Groove 07 Frankly Soul 08 Live Soul Band *1 09 Soul Swing *1 10 6/8 Soul *1 11 Gospel Sisters 13 Chart Guitar Pop 21 Blueberry Blues 14 Jazz Pop 22 Blues Shuffle 1 15 British Pop 23 Blues Shuffle 2 *1 24 Lovely Shuffle 25 Modern Shuffle Unplugged 2 26 Cool R&B 19 Unplugged 3 27 Modern R&B 20 JPN Pop Shuffle 28 Soul R&B 21 JPN Idol Hits 29 Worship Fast 22 JPN 70s Anime LATIN 23 JPN Soundtrack 01 Simple BossaNova 24 Cute Pop 02 Simple Samba *1 25 The 3rd Funk 03 Simple Mambo *1 26 Sunset DECA 04 Simple Rumba *1 27 US 70s TV Theme 05 Bossa Nova 1 28 Asian Pops 06 Bossa Nova 2 29 Scand Shuffle 07 Pop Bossa 1 30 60s Vintage Pop 08 Pop Bossa 2 31 60s Chart Swing 09 Bossa Brazil 32 Bubblegum Pop 33 70s ChartCountry 34 16 Pop Shuffle 17 Unplugged 1 18 *1 10 Lounge Bossa 11 Big Band Samba Euro Pop Organ 12 Light Samba 35 Euro Fox 13 Jazz Samba 36 Euro Pop 14 Mambo 1 15 Mambo 2 Rumba *1 Jazz Waltz Fast 33 Dixieland R&B 12 Mariachi 34 Dixieland Jazz 1 01 Simple Funk *1 16 13 Snow Waltz Dixieland Jazz 2 02 Simple R&B Balad *1 17 Rumba Flamenco *1 18 Cha Cha Cha 11 14 Vocal Waltz 15 Musette 16 Movie Soundtrack 17 Choir Soundtrack 35 36 37 38 39 *2 Ragtime 03 Simple R&B Shfl Charleston 04 Soul 19 Big Band Cha Cha Orchestra Swing 05 16Beat Soul 1 20 Pop Cha Cha 1 16Beat Soul 2 21 Pop Cha Cha 2 Tap Dance Swing 4 *1 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 18 01 MARCH 06 *1 *1 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on. *2 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 77 4 22 Salsa 04 8Beat Modern 15 ChartRockShuffle 18 Disco Fox 23 Montuno 05 16Beat Ballad 1 16 Chart Piano Shfl 19 Disco Philly 24 Calypso 06 16Beat Ballad 2 17 Beach Rock 20 Disco Teens 1 25 Danzon 07 6/8 Slow Rock 18 Surf Rock 21 Disco Teens 2 26 Bomba 08 Schlager 6/8 19 60s Rock 22 Disco Chocolate 27 Pop Latin 09 Big Rock Ballad 20 70s Rock 23 Saturday Night *1 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 28 Beguine 10 90s Rock Ballad 21 80s Power Rock 24 90s Disco 29 Tango 1 11 Power Ballad 22 80s Pop Rock 25 70s Disco 1 30 Tango 2 12 Easy Ballad 23 80s Guitar Pop 26 70s Disco 2 31 Italian Tango 13 Love Song 24 00s Boy Band 27 Chart Pop 32 Guitar Rumba 14 Dramatic Ballad 25 Rock Shuffle 28 Ground Beat WORLD MUSIC 15 Animation Ballad 26 Rock & Roll 29 Synth Pop 01 Bolero 16 70s Cool Ballad 27 6/8 Rock 30 UK Pop 02 Flamenco 17 70s Pop Duo 28 60s Rock & Roll 31 Turkish Eurobeat 03 Pop Flamenco 18 70s Glam Piano 29 Jive 32 Oriental Pop 04 Pasodoble 19 Movie Ballad 30 Swingin' Boogie 33 Pop Beat 05 Tarantella 20 80s Movie Ballad 31 Southern Rock 34 Garage 1 06 Sirtaki 21 BigScreenClassic 32 New Country 35 Garage 2 07 Hawaiian 22 Chart Ballad 33 Country Strum 36 Electronica 08 Mexican Dance 23 Analog Ballad 34 Disco Fox Rock 37 Club Latin 35 JPN Pop Rock 1 38 Latin Disco 36 JPN Pop Rock 2 39 US Hip Hop *1 *2 *2 *1 *1 09 Enka 24 Slow & Easy 10 Polka 1 25 Chillout 11 Polka 2 26 Easy Country 37 JPN Band Rock 1 40 Hip Hop Pop *1 *1 12 Banda Polka 27 JPN Romantic Bld 38 JPN Band Rock 2 41 JPN Idol Pop 1 13 Zither Polka 28 JPN Folk Pop Duo 39 JPN Light Rock 1 42 JPN Idol Pop 2 14 Party Polka 29 JPN Dance Ballad 40 JPN Light Rock 2 43 JPN Idol Pop 3 15 Euro Polka 30 JPN R&B Ballad 41 JPN Rock Duo 44 JPN Dance Pop 1 16 Irish Dance 31 JPN TVSoundtrack *1 42 JPN Idol Rock 45 JPN Dance Pop 2 17 Irish Hymn 32 Night Walk 43 JPN Kids Hero 46 Cute Techno 18 Celtic Dance *1 *2 44 Dragon Rock 47 Dance Police 19 Celtic Dance 3/4 33 Organ Ballad 1 45 Miracle Rock 20 Celtic Christmas 34 Organ Ballad 2 46 Pretty Cute 01 Metronome 2/4 *1 35 Guitar Ballad 47 Happy Pop 02 Metronome 3/4 *1 36 Pop GuitarBallad 03 Metronome 4/4 *1 37 ElecPiano Ballad *1 38 Pop Piano Ballad 21 Sheriff Reggae 1 22 Sheriff Reggae 2 23 Caribbean 24 Zouk 25 Hoedown 1 26 Hoedown 2 27 Bluegrass 28 ChinaPopBallad 1 29 ChinaPopBallad 2 30 China Dance 31 China Trad 1 32 China Trad 2 33 Kung Fu 34 Ethereal Voices *2 *1 *2 *1 *1 *1 *2 BALLAD *1 DANCE *1 ROCK 01 Simple Rock *1 02 Simple Shfl Rock *1 03 Hard Rock 1 04 Hard Rock 2 05 Tears Rock 1 06 Tears Rock 2 07 British Rock 08 Power Rock 09 Stadium Rock 10 ContemporaryRock 11 Standard Rock 01 Simple 8BtBallad *1 12 Acoustic Rock 02 SimpleRockBallad *1 13 Brit Rock Pop 03 Acoustic8BtBalad *1 14 Funk Pop Rock *1 *1 METRONOME 01 Simple Dance Pop *1 04 Metronome 6/8 02 Simple Disco *1 05 Metronome 9/8 *1 03 Ibiza 1 06 Metronome 12/8 *1 04 Ibiza 2 07 Metronome 5/4 *1 05 Trance Pop *2 08 Metronome 7/4 *1 06 Euro Trance 1 09 Metronome 8/4 *1 07 Euro Trance 2 10 Wood Block 2/4 *1 08 6/8 Trance 1 11 Wood Block 3/4 *1 09 6/8 Trance 2 12 Wood Block 4/4 *1 10 Club Dance 1 13 Wood Block 6/8 *1 11 Club Dance 2 14 Wood Block 9/8 *1 *1 *1 12 Dancefloor 15 Wood Block 12/8 *1 13 Techno Party *1 16 Wood Block 5/4 *1 14 80s Dance 17 Wood Block 7/4 *1 15 Swing House 18 Wood Block 8/4 *1 16 Dirty Pop 17 Mallorca Party *1 *1 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on. *2 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on. 78 *1 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 4 Accompaniment The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments when rhythms are used. To use the accompaniment parts, you’ll need to make appropriate settings in the Rhythm Condition display. 1 Select the desired rhythm and press the same button on the panel again. The Rhythm Condition display appears. Rhythm Condition Display 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 4 Turn the desired parts on. Use the Page buttons to select Page 2 or Page 3, then make settings for each part. Pressing one of the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the desired accompaniment parts successively alternates between ON and OFF. Page 2 Page 3 Accompaniment parts Each rhythm consists of seven parts, and you can visually confirm the On/Off status for all parts in Page 2 and Page 3 of the Rhythm Condition display. These parts, with the exception of the Main Drum and Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts. The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding button. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 79 Chord 1/Chord 2 These are the rhythmic chord backing parts. Pad This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds, such as strings and organ. Phrase 1/Phrase 2 These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section. Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add Drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 3 80 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Press the [START] button to start the rhythm, and then play the Lower Keyboard. To adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment: Make settings in Page 1 of the Rhythm Condition display. 2 Select the desired rhythm and then press the same rhythm button on the panel again. The Rhythm Condition display appears. Reference Page Rhythm Condition display (page 74) Use the Page buttons to select Page 1. [Page 1] Rhythm Condition Display 4 1 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 Determine the reverb and volume settings. 1 Accompaniment Volume Determines the accompaniment volume. Press the [C] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 2 Accompaniment Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to accompaniment. When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Press the [D] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 Reference Page Accompaniment (page 79) Reference Page Reverb Depth (page 61) ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 81 Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass 5 Chord (A.B.C.) The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment patterns. You can select the desired mode in the A.B.C./M.O.C. display. To set the A.B.C. function: 1 4 Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button. The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. A.B.C./M.O.C. Display Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 2 Press the [A] button to select the “ABC MODE,” then select the desired mode by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. 1 OFF 2 SINGLE FINGER 3 FINGERED CHORD 4 CUSTOM ABC A.B.C. Mode You can select modes in sequence: OFF SINGLE FINGER FINGERED CHORD CUSTOM ABC by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order. When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, set Lower/ Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard or Pedalboard stops the rhythm. For details, see “Memory” on page 84. 82 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 1 Off Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function. 2 Single Finger NOTE You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. The chord produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower keyboard. When the A.B.C. function mode is set to Single Finger or Fingered Chord, the bass part will not sound even if you play the pedals of the Pedalboard. Key of C C Major chords: Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s name). Cm Minor chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it. C7 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Cm7 Minor 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white key to the left of it. Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. 3 Fingered Chord NOTE The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the basis of the previously played chord. When playing certain chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and m6), make sure that the lowest note you play is the root of the chord. Key of C C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7 Cm maj7 Caug Cdim Cdim7 Csus4 C7sus4 Cm7-5 C6 Cm6 Cadd9 Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. 4 Custom A.B.C. The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing notes on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 83 Memory The Memory function is a convenient performance tool in the A.B.C. features that makes playing with the accompaniment even smoother and more fluid. It is available separately for both the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. To use it, turn Memory on, start the rhythm and play chords and bass notes according to the selected A.B.C. mode. With Memory on, the accompaniment continues to play, even when you release your fingers (and foot). When you want to change to the next chord, simply play it and release it, and the auto accompaniment keeps playing with the new chord and bass note. This means that you can play a chord/bass note briefly, release it, and take your time before playing the next—you don’t have to hold a chord down to keep the accompaniment going. When A.B.C. is turned off (but Memory is on), the auto accompaniment of the rhythmic chords and bass pattern do not sound, but the sound of the Lower keyboard and/or Pedalboard continues until you play the next chord/bass note. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 2 1 Lower Memory When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm plays. Successive pressing of the [B] button alternates between ON and OFF. 2 Pedal Memory When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays. Successive pressing of the [C] button alternates between ON and OFF. (In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard. 84 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 6 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard—or from the chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment. To set the M.O.C. function: 1 Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button. The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. A.B.C./M.O.C. Display 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 4 Turn the M.O.C. on. Successive pressing of the [D] button alternates between ON and OFF. ON: Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played. OFF: Cancels the Melody On Chord function. Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voice. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 85 Rhythm Sequence Rhythm Sequence lets you create your own rhythm compositions, connecting together any of the Electone’s existing rhythms as well as original rhythms created on other Electones that have the Rhythm Sequence Program function (such as the ELS series). Although this Electone does not have the full Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can load four rhythm compositions to Sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons on the panel for future recall, using the steps below. When the rhythm sequence contains Registration Sequence data or Next Unit data, these data types also can be loaded and played on this Electone. While a rhythm is playing, sequence data in the Registration data cannot be loaded. 1 2 4 Insert the USB flash drive that contains the desired rhythm sequence data into the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button and select the desired Song which contains the Registration data you want to load back to Electone. For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion This is necessary because the rhythm sequence data is stored as part of the registration data in the Song (page 147). Reference Page What is a Song? (page 134) Reference Page Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 154) 3 Load back the desired registration. If the desired registration is in Unit 1, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button in the MDR section to load back the Unit 1 registrations. If the desired registration is in a Unit other than 1, specify the Unit number then load back the Unit. Now the rhythm sequence data has been loaded to Sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons. 86 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the desired sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons to turn them on (the respective lamps light). NOTE Sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons can be turned on at the same time. Press the [START] button in the Rhythm section to play back the rhythm sequence. Only those sequences set to on can be played. Two or more rhythm sequences can be played back in succession in numeric order. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is finished playing. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 87 7 Keyboard Percussion The Keyboard Percussion function provides many different drum and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish. Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion NOTE On/Off status of the Voices (page 31) 4 NOTE 1 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Two Keyboard Percussion sets, [1] and [2], can be played at the same time by setting both buttons to on. Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] button. Press the [1] button to play Percussion sounds on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and press the [2] button for the Pedalboard. The Keyboard Percussion (KBP) display appears. KBP Display Pressing the Keyboard Percussion [1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the Pedalboard. 3 88 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Select the desired percussion kit. You can select a kit from a total of 22 different kits. Press the [B] button to select “KIT,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the kit. 4 Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard. For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the “Preset Keyboard Percussion List” on page 90. Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb Reference Page Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion (page 104) NOTE The Keyboard Percussion volume and reverb settings made here are commonly applied to both Keyboard Percussion 1 and 2. 1 2 1 Volume Determines the Keyboard Percussion volume. Press the [C] button to select “VOLUME,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 2 Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion. When the Reverb depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Press the [D] button to select “REVERB,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 4 Reference Page Reverb Depth (page 61) ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 89 Preset Keyboard Percussion List Indicates the drum/percussion sounds and their key assignments. Preset 1 (UK) Bass Drum Gran Cassa Tom 2 Tom 1 Snare Snare Roll Hi-Hat Closed Cymbal Hi-Hat Open Tambourine Finger Snap Castanet Triangle Mute Wood Block L Triangle Open Wood Block H Hand Clap Jingle Bells Bell Tree Alarm Bell Train Horn 1 Horn 2 Siren CarEngn Ignition Car Crash Helicopter Starship Sheep Goat Oxen Whinny Horse Lion Dog Cat Hen Owl Insects Frog Tweet 1 Tweet 2 Cuckoo Clock Big Clock Bell Telephone Camera Gnaw Applause 4 Wonderland Kit Preset 1 (LK) Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Laser Beam Laser Shot Water Phone Bubble Puddle Thunder Shower Beach Stream Footstep Door Squeak Door Slam Bass Drum Gran Cassa Tom 2 Tom 1 Snare Snare Roll Hi-Hat Closed Cymbal Hi-Hat Open Tambourine Finger Snap Castanet Triangle Mute Wood Block L Triangle Open Wood Block H Hand Clap Jingle Bells Bell Tree Alarm Bell Train Horn 1 Horn 2 Siren CarEngn Ignition Car Crash Helicopter Starship Sheep Goat Oxen Whinny Horse Lion Dog Cat Hen Preset 2 (PK) Thunder Horse Bass Drum Footstep Snare Snare Roll Footstep Lion Footstep Oxen Footstep Door Slam Big Clock Footstep Starship Footstep Train Car Crash Footstep Puddle : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. 90 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Preset 1 (UK) EL Kit Preset 1 (LK) – – – Claves – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Synth Tom 3 Concert BD Synth Tom 2 Bass Drum Heavy Synth Tom 1 Bass Drum Light Snare Drum Heavy SD Brush Roll Snare Drum Heavy SD Brush Shot 1 SD Reverb 1 Snare Drum Light Tom 3 Snare Drum Rim 1 Tom 2 Hi-Hat Closed Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Ride Cymbal 1 Orch Snare Drum Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Roll Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Roll Triangle Mute Tambourine Triangle Open Castanet Cowbell 1 Timbale 1 Low Timbale 1 High Wood Block Low Conga Low Wood Block High Conga High Bongo Low Agogo Low Bongo High Agogo High Cuica Low Hand Claps Cuica High Shaker Preset 2 (PK) Bass Drum Heavy SD Brush Roll Snare Drum Heavy SD Brush Shot 1 SD Reverb 1 Snare Drum Light Tom 3 Snare Drum Rim 1 Tom 2 Hi-Hat Closed Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Ride Cymbal 1 Synth Tom 3 Crash Cymbal 1 Synth Tom 2 Orchestra Cymbal – Synth Tom 1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Standard Kit 1 Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Standard Kit 2 Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot H Kick Tight Kick Short Side Stick Light Snare Short Hand Clap Snare Tight H Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Short Side Stick Light Snare Short Hand Clap Snare Tight H Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Preset 1 (UK) : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 91 Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Hit Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Electro Sticks Kick Tight L Snare Pitched Kick Wet Kick Tight H Stick Ambient Snare Ambient Hand Clap Snare Tight 2 Hybrid Tom 1 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hybrid Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open 2 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Hybrid Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Light Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Tight H Stick Ambient Snare Ambient Hand Clap Snare Tight 2 Hybrid Tom 1 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hybrid Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open 2 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Hybrid Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Light Splash Cymbal : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. 92 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Room Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Snappy Hand Clap Snare Tight Snap Tom Room 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Room 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Room 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Room 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Side Stick Snare Snappy Hand Clap Snare Tight Snap Tom Room 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Room 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Room 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Room 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Rock Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Noisy Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick 2 Kick Gate Side Stick Snare Rock Hand Clap Snare Rock Tight Tom Rock 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Rock 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Rock 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Rock 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Gate Side Stick Snare Rock Hand Clap Snare Rock Tight Tom Rock 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Rock 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Rock 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Rock 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Electro Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll Hi Q 2 Snare Snap Elec Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Side Stick Snare Noisy 2 Hand Clap Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Gate Heavy Side Stick Snare Noisy 2 Hand Clap Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Preset 1 (UK) : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 93 Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Bongo H Bongo L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves 2 Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Analog Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Anlg Short Kick Analog Side Stick Anlg Snare Analog Hand Clap Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hat Close Analog Tom Analog 2 Hat Close Anlg 2 Tom Analog 3 Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Analog Side Stick Anlg Snare Analog Hand Clap Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hat Close Analog Tom Analog 2 Hat Close Anlg 2 Tom Analog 3 Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. 94 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves 2 Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4 Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Dance Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Dance 1 Scratch Dance 2 Finger Snap Click Noise Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Snare Analog 3 Vinyl Noise Snare Analog 4 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Dance 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Snare Dance 1 Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Anlg Snare Clap Dance Clap Snare Dry Tom Dance 1 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Tom Dance 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Tom Dance 3 Hi-Hat Open 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Crash Analog Tom Dance 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Anlg Splash Cymbal Cowbell Dance Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Analog Ride Analog – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Techno Side Stick Anlg Snare Clap Dance Clap Snare Dry Tom Dance 1 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Tom Dance 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Tom Dance 3 Hi-Hat Open 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Crash Analog Tom Dance 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Anlg Splash Cymbal – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Jazz Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Jazz H Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Snare Jazz L Hand Clap Snare Jazz M Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Snare Jazz L Hand Clap Snare Jazz M Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Brush Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Brush Slap 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Brush Slap 3 Hand Clap Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Brush 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Brush 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Brush Slap 3 Hand Clap Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Brush 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Brush 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Preset 1 (UK) : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 95 Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Symphony Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft 2 Open Rim Shot Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Side Stick Band Snare Hand Clap Band Snare 2 Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Hand Cymbal High Tom Hand Cymbal S Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Hand Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Hand Cymbal 2 S – Preset 2 (PK) Gran Cassa Mute Side Stick Band Snare Hand Clap Band Snare 2 Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Hand Cymbal High Tom Hand Cymbal S Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. 96 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – Live! Studio Kit Preset 1 (LK) – Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Studio 2 Sticks Kick Ambience H Open Rim Shot Kick Ambience L Kick Studio Side Stick Snare Studio M Hand Clap Snare Studio L Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Studio Side Stick Snare Studio M Hand Clap Snare Studio L Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal House Kit Preset 1 (LK) – – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Open 1 F Bongo L Open 3 F Conga H Tip Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Open 2 Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Slur 2 Vox Drum L Vox Drum H Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica H Cuica L Triangle Mute Triangle Open Analog Shaker Sleigh Bells Wind Chime Snare Break Roll Noise Burst Vox Bell Snare R&B 1 Vox Alk Udu High Filter Kick – – – – – W Kick Disco Fx WhiteNoiseDown 1 PinkNoise Down 1 WhiteNoiseDown 2 PinkNoise Down 2 White Noise Up 2 White Noise Up 1 Pink Noise Up WhiteNoiseUp Rel PinkNoise Up Rel Kick T9 4 Snare T8 Rim Snare T8 5 Hand Clap Snare Garg L Snare Roll Snare T9 3 Snare T8 1 Snare T9 5 Kick T9 1 Snare T9 Gate Kick T9 2 Kick T9 5 Snare T9 Rim Snare T9 1 Clap T9 Snare T9 2 Tom T9 1 Hi-Hat Closed T8 Tom T9 2 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 Tom T9 3 Hi-Hat Open T9 Tom T9 4 Tom T9 5 Crash Cymbal T9 Tom T9 6 Ride Cymbal T9 Crash Cymbal 4 RideCymbal Cup 2 Tambourine Hit Splash Cymbal 2 Cowbell 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Cowbell T8 Ride Cymbal 3 – Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (UK) Kick T9 5 Snare T9 Rim Snare T9 1 Clap T9 Snare T9 2 Tom T9 1 Hi-Hat Closed T8 Tom T9 2 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 Tom T9 3 Hi-Hat Open T9 Tom T9 4 Tom T9 5 Crash Cymbal T9 Tom T9 6 Ride Cymbal T9 Crash Cymbal 4 RideCymbal Cup 2 Tambourine Hit Splash Cymbal 2 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed – – – – – – – – – – Dog Horse Bird Tweet SFX Kit 1 Preset 1 (LK) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 – String Slap – – – – – – – – – – – – Flute Key Click – – – – – – – – Preset 2 (PK) Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 – String Slap – – – – – – – – – – – – Flute Key Click – – – 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Preset 1 (UK) – – – Ghost Maou – – – – – : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 97 Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Split Wind Chime Telephone Ring – – – – – – – – – CarEngn Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship – – – – – – – – – – – – – 4 SFX Kit 2 Preset 1 (LK) Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Burst Roller Coaster Submarine – – – – – Laugh Scream Punch Heart Beat Foot Steps – – – – – – – – – – – Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework – – – – – – – – – Preset 2 (PK) Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Split Wind Chime Telephone Ring – – – – – – – – – CarEngn Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. 98 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Noise Kit Preset 1 (LK) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – White Noise Pink Noise WhiteNoiseDown 1 PinkNoise Down 1 WhiteNoiseDown 2 PinkNoise Down 2 White Noise Up 2 White Noise Up 1 Pink Noise Up WhiteNoiseUp Rel PinkNoise Up Rel WhiteNoiseUp LFO PinkNoise Up LFO – – – – – – – – – – – – Preset 2 (PK) White Noise Pink Noise WhiteNoiseDown 1 PinkNoise Down 1 WhiteNoiseDown 2 PinkNoise Down 2 White Noise Up 2 White Noise Up 1 Pink Noise Up WhiteNoiseUp Rel PinkNoise Up Rel WhiteNoiseUp LFO PinkNoise Up LFO – – – – – – – Pop Latin Kit Preset 1 (LK) – – – – – – – – – – – – – Cowbell Top Cowbell 1 Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Guiro Short Guiro Long MetalGuiro Short Metal Guiro Long Tambourine Tambourim Open Tambourim Mute Tambourim Tip Maracas Shaker Cabasa Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cowbell High 1 Cowbell High 2 Shekere Shekere Tone Triangle Mute Triangle Open – Wind Chime – – – – – – – – – – – – Cajon Low Cajon Slap Cajon Tip Claves High Claves Low Hand Clap – Finger Snap Castanet Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L – – – – Paila L Timbale H – – – – Paila H – Preset 2 (PK) Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L – – – – Paila L Timbale H – Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Katem Tak Doff Tak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tik Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Roll Edge Tabla Flam Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 3 Tabel Tak Sagat 2 Rik Dom Rik Tak 2 Rik Finger 1 Rik Tak 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik BrassTremolo Rik Sak Rik Tik – – – – – – – – – – – – Arabic Kit Preset 1 (LK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Nakarazan Dom Cabasa Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Zagrouda H Zagrouda L Kick Soft Side Stick Snare Soft Arabic Hand Clap Snare Drum Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Duhulla Dom Tambourine Duhulla Tak Cowbell Duhulla Sak Claves Doff Dom – Preset 2 (PK) Kick Soft Side Stick Snare Soft Arabic Hand Clap Snare Drum Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Duhulla Dom Tambourine Duhulla Tak 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Preset 1 (UK) : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 99 Preset 1 (UK) China Kit Preset 1 (LK) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Ban Bangu Roll ChineseOperaVo 1 ChineseOperaVo 2 ChineseOperaVo 3 Yunluo F Yunluo F# Yunluo G Yunluo G# Yunluo A Yunluo A# Yunluo B Yunluo C Yunluo C# Yunluo D Yunluo D# Yunluo E Yunluo High F Yunluo High F# Yunluo High G Yunluo High G# Yunluo High A Yunluo High A# Yunluo High B Yunluo High C – – – – – – – – – – – – Da Cha 2 Da Gu mp Da Gu Rim Da Gu f Da Gu Hand Da Gu Roll Pai Gu 4 Pai Gu 4 High Pai Gu 3 Pai Gu 3 High Pai Gu 2 Pai Gu 2 High Pai Gu 1 Luo High 1 Gong Batter Jin Luo Luo High 2 Luo Mid-Low Luo Jin Luo Low Da Cha 1 Da Cha Effect Zhongcha Xiaocha Effect Xiaocha Mang Luo Low Mang Luo Mid Qing Finger Bell Luo Big Muyu Low Muyu Mid-Low Muyu Mid Muyu High Nanbangzi Roll Nanbangzi Bangu – Preset 2 (PK) Luo High 1 Gong Batter Jin Luo Luo High 2 Luo Mid-Low Luo Jin Luo Low Da Cha 1 Da Cha Effect Zhongcha Xiaocha Effect Xiaocha Mang Luo Low Mang Luo Mid Qing Finger Bell Luo Big Muyu Low Muyu Mid-Low Muyu Mid : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. 100 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Preset 1 (UK) – – – – – – – – – – – – Bongo H Stick Bongo L Stick Conga H Stick Conga L Stick Whip Rotating Tom 5 Tubular Bell L Rotating Tom 4 Tubular Bell M Rotating Tom 3 Tubular Bell H Rotating Tom 2 Rotating Tom 1 Temple Block H Temple Block L Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Anveil Triangle Roll Triangle Mute Triangle Open Bell Tree Sleigh Bells Wind Chime – – – – – – – – – – – – Orchestra Perc Preset 1 (LK) – Symphonic Gong 1 Symphonic Gong L Symphonic Gong 2 Timpani E Timpani F Timpani F# Timpani G Timpani G# Timpani A Timpani A# Timpani B Timpani C Timpani C# Timpani D Timpani D# Timpani High E Gran Cassa Hard Gran Cassa Soft Gran Cassa Hit Gran Cassa Cresc ConcertSnareDrum Snare Roll Snare Drum Light Snare Ensemble Sus Cym 1 Roll S Sus Cymbal 1 Sus Cym 2 Roll L Sus Cymbal 2 Concert Tom 5 OrchCymbal 1 ckd Concert Tom 4 Orch Cymbal 1 Concert Tom 3 Orch Cymbal 2 Concert Tom 2 Concert Tom 1 Finger Cymbal Gong Ride Cymbal Tip China Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Jingle Ring Castanet Roll Table Castanet – Preset 2 (PK) Snare Ensemble Sus Cym 1 Roll S Sus Cymbal 1 Sus Cym 2 Roll L Sus Cymbal 2 Concert Tom 5 OrchCymbal 1 ckd Concert Tom 4 Orch Cymbal 1 Concert Tom 3 Orch Cymbal 2 Concert Tom 2 Concert Tom 1 Finger Cymbal Gong Ride Cymbal Tip China Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 40. The User setting saved in the User memory location can be called up by using the Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] buttons. In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with Keyboard Percussion [1] button. 1 NOTE By default, the same data as the Preset 1 – 2 of the EL Kit is stored to User Keyboard Percussion 1 and 2. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the Keyboard Percussion [1] button. The KBP display appears. KBP Display 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 4 Select “User 1” here. Press the [A] button to select “User 1.” If another name is shown, select “User 1” with the DATA CONTROL dial. This step assigns “User 1” to the Keyboard Percussion [1] button. You can call up “User 1” the next time you press the [1] button. 3 Select the desired percussion kit. Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the kit. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 101 4 Use the Page buttons to select the ASSIGN Page. In this Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys. 1 2 3 4 1 Category This allows you to select the desired percussion category using the [A] buttons. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105. 2 Instrument Names The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be selected with the [B] button. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 3 Assign Assigns the selected instrument to the desired key. (See the following explanation in step 7.) 4 Clear This function is used to erase the User assignment for User 1. Clear works in two ways: either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all instruments. (See the following explanation on page 103.) 5 6 102 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Select the desired percussion group. Press the [A] button to select “CATEGORY,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the category. Select the desired instruments. Press the [B] button to select “INST.” (Instrument), then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired instrument. To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal. Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button [C] corresponding to “ASS.”(Assign) and press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The currently displayed instrument will be assigned to the key you press down as a part of User 1. 7-1. 7-2. While holding down [C] button... NOTE Though 40 User Keyboard Percussion setups can be created, they cannot be memorized to Registration Memory. Only on/off data and the Keyboard Percussion Menu are memorized to Registration Memory. If you want to save the User Keyboard Percussion setups with the Registration Memory, save the data to the USB flash drive (page 147). 40 User Keyboard Percussion setups will be saved to each Unit. 4 Press the key. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 7 When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is displayed at the bottom of the display. The assignments are saved to the User memory selected in step 2 (in this example, User 1). 8 Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your own User Keyboard Percussion set. To erase one instrument: Simultaneously hold down the [D] button corresponding to “CLR.”(Clear) in the display and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. (A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.) 1. 2. NOTICE The Keyboard Percussion on/off data and Menu is automatically saved to Registration Memory when another display is called up. Make sure to switch to another display before turning the power off. A “” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved, otherwise the data will be lost. While holding down [D] button... Press the key. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 103 To erase all instruments: You can clear all assignments in ASSIGN Page of the Keyboard Percussion display. 1 Press, then release the [D] “CLR.” (CLEAR) button in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding to “CANCEL.” 4 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Press the [C] “CLR.” (Clear) button to erase all data. When the [C] button is pressed, an “Assignments of User xx have been cleared” message momentarily appears on the display. Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion 1 2 104 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Press the Keyboard Percussion button. Select the desired User Keyboard percussion kit. Press the [A] button to select “MENU,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired User number. Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard. Kit Assign List CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cym Mute Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Roll Orch Cymbal Mute Cymbal March Cym Brush Shot Tam-Tam HI-HAT Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal 1 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Analog HH Open Analog HH Closed SNARE DRUM Snare Drum Light Snare Drum Heavy Snare Drum Rim 1 Snare Drum Rim 2 SD Accent 1 SD Accent 2 SD Reverb 1 SD Reverb 2 Synth Snare Drum Orch Snare Drum Snare Drum Roll Analog SD SNARE BRUSH SD Brush Shot 1 SD Brush Shot 2 SD Brush Roll TOM Tom 1 Tom 2 Tom 3 Tom 4 Tom Brush Shot 1 Tom Brush Shot 2 Tom Brush Shot 3 Tom Brush Shot 4 Synth Tom 1 Synth Tom 2 Synth Tom 3 BASS DRUM Bass Drum Light Bass Drum Heavy Bass Drum Attack Synth Bass Drum Bass Drum March Concert BD Analog BD Short Analog BD Long CONGA/BONGO Conga High Conga Low Conga Slap Conga Muff Conga Slide Bongo High Bongo Low Bongo Slap Bongo Mute CUICA/SURDO Cuica High Cuica Middle Cuica Low Tamborim Open Tamborim Mute Surdo Open Surdo Mute Surdo Rim Surdo Muff TIMBALES/COWBELL Timbale 1 High Timbale 1 Low Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 Low Timbale 3 High Timbale 3 Low Timbale 4 High Timbale 4 Low Cowbell 1 Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Cowbell 4 PERCUSSION 1 Cabasa Shaker Maracas High Maracas Low Guiro Short Guiro Long Wood Block High Wood Block Mid Wood Block Low Claves Castanet Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Agogo High Agogo Low Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wind Chime Down Wind Chime Up Tambourine Pandeiro Bells Hand Claps Finger Snap Scratch Noise Percussion PERCUSSION 3 Kotsuzumi 1 Kotsuzumi 2 Kotsuzumi 3 Kotsuzumi 4 Ohtsuzumi 1 Ohtsuzumi 2 Taiko 1 Taiko 2 Ohdaiko 1 Ohdaiko 2 Kakegoe 1 Kakegoe 2 Kakegoe 3 Standard Kit 1 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Snare Tight Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Standard Kit 2 CYMBAL 4 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion EL Kit SNARE DRUM Snare Short Snare Tight H Snare Soft 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot H Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Short Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 105 Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap TOM Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Room 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Room 6 SNARE DRUM Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 2 PERCUSSION 4 Tambourine Light Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Hit Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 TOM Hybrid Tom 1 Hybrid Tom 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Hybrid Tom 6 BASS DRUM Kick Tight H Kick Wet Kick Tight L PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open 106 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L TOM Tom Rock 1 Tom Rock 2 Tom Rock 3 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Rock 6 BASS DRUM Kick Gate Kick 2 Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 4 PERCUSSION 3 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 2 CYMBAL PERCUSSION 4 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell SNARE DRUM Rock Kit Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap Room Kit SNARE DRUM Snare Ambient Snare Tight 2 Snare Electro Snare Roll Stick Ambient Snare Pitched Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl BASS DRUM Snare Rock Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Snare Snappy Snare Tight Snap Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 PERCUSSION 4 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Hand Clap PERCUSSION 3 Vibraslap Analog PERCUSSION 4 Tambourine Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 2 PERCUSSION 4 Tambourine Anlg Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4 Snare Dance 1 Whip Slap Finger Snap Dance Clap Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Analog Kit SNARE DRUM Snare Noisy 2 Snare Noisy 3 Snare Snap Elec Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Electro 1 Tom Electro 2 Tom Electro 3 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Electro 6 BASS DRUM Kick Gate Heavy Kick Gate Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap CYMBAL Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hat Open Analog Hat Close Analog Hat Close Anlg 2 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Dance Kit TOM Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 6 BASS DRUM Kick Analog Kick Anlg Short Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Conga Analog H Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Analog Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 4 PERCUSSION 4 SNARE DRUM Snare Analog Snare Analog 2 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Roll Side Stick Anlg Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cymbal Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L CYMBAL Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch Dance 1 Scratch Dance 2 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Electro Kit Jazz Kit SNARE DRUM Snare Clap Snare Dry Snare Techno Reverse Dance 2 Side Stick Anlg Rim Gate Snare Analog 3 Snare Analog 4 Vinyl Noise Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Dance 1 Tom Dance 2 Tom Dance 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Tom Dance 6 BASS DRUM Kick Techno Kick Techno L Kick Techno Q PERCUSSION 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Conga Analog H Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Dance Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Jazz L Snare Jazz M Snare Jazz H Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 107 PERCUSSION 1 Brush Tap Swirl Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap TOM PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L 4 PERCUSSION 3 Tom Brush 1 Tom Brush 2 Tom Brush 3 Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Brush 6 BASS DRUM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap Live!StudioKit SNARE DRUM CYMBAL Band Snare Band Snare 2 Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion PERCUSSION 1 TOM Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom PERCUSSION 4 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 2 PERCUSSION 4 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap Brush Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal PERCUSSION 3 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Symphony Kit Brush Slap 3 Brush Tap 2 Brush Slap 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl ELB-02 Owner’s Manual CYMBAL Hand Cymbal Hand Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Hand Cymbal S Hand Cymbal 2 S Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open BASS DRUM Kick Studio Kick Ambience L Kick Ambience H PERCUSSION 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 3 PERCUSSION 2 PERCUSSION 4 SNARE DRUM SNARE DRUM Gran Cassa Mute Gran Cassa Kick Soft 2 BASS DRUM PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Studio M Snare Studio L Snare Studio 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 108 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell House Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal T9 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 4 Splash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal T9 Ride Cymbal 3 RideCymbal Cup 2 Hi-Hat Open T9 Hi-Hat Closed T8 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 SNARE DRUM Snare T9 1 Snare T9 2 Snare T9 3 Snare T9 5 Snare T9 Gate Snare T9 Rim Snare T8 1 Snare T8 5 Snare T8 Rim Snare Garg L Snare R&B 1 Snare Roll Snare Break Roll TOM Tom T9 1 Tom T9 2 Tom T9 3 Tom T9 4 Tom T9 5 Tom T9 6 BASS DRUM Kick T9 1 Kick T9 2 Kick T9 4 Kick T9 5 W Kick Filter Kick Timbale L Cowbell 1 Cowbell T8 Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Slur 2 PERCUSSION 2 Cuica H Cuica L Cabasa Agogo H Agogo L Analog Shaker Udu High NOISE Tambourine Hit Sleigh Bells Wind Chime Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Clap T9 Hand Clap Vox Drum H Vox Drum L Vox Alk Vox Bell White Noise WhiteNoiseDown 1 WhiteNoiseDown 2 White Noise Up 1 White Noise Up 2 WhiteNoiseUp Rel WhiteNoiseUp LFO Pink Noise PinkNoise Down 1 PinkNoise Down 2 Pink Noise Up PinkNoise Up Rel PinkNoise Up LFO SFX Kit 1 Wonderland Kit SFX SE Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Flute Key Click Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Ghost Maou Dog Horse Bird Tweet Laser Beam Laser Shot Water Phone Bubble Puddle SFX Kit 2 SFX 1 PinkNoise Down 1 PinkNoise Down 2 Pink Noise Up PinkNoise Up Rel WhiteNoiseDown 1 WhiteNoiseDown 2 White Noise Up 1 White Noise Up 2 WhiteNoiseUp Rel Noise Burst Disco Fx Phone Call Telephone Ring Wind Chime Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Split Laugh Scream Punch Heart Beat Foot Steps Conga H Open 2 Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Tip Bongo H Open 1 F Bongo L Open 3 F Timbale H Noise Kit PERCUSSION 3 NOISE PERCUSSION 1 Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework SFX 2 CarEngn Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash NATURE Thunder Shower Beach Stream DAILY Footstep Door Squeak Door Slam Alarm Bell Cuckoo Clock Big Clock Bell Telephone Camera Gnaw Applause VEHICLE Train Horn 1 Horn 2 Siren CarEngn Ignition Car Crash Helicopter Starship ANIMAL Sheep Goat Oxen Whinny Horse Lion Dog Cat Hen Owl Insects Frog Tweet 1 Tweet 2 PERCUSSION 1 Cymbal Snare Snare Roll Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Tom 1 Tom 2 Bass Drum Gran Cassa PERCUSSION 2 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Finger Snap Hand Clap 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Hand Clap Pop Latin Kit CONGA Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide BONGO Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap PERCUSSION 1 Timbale H Timbale L Paila H Paila L Cowbell Top Cowbell 1 Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Cowbell High 1 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 109 Cowbell High 2 Claves High Claves Low Guiro Long Guiro Short Metal Guiro Long MetalGuiro Short PERCUSSION 2 Maracas Cuica Open Cuica Mute Cabasa Shaker Tambourine Tambourim Tip Tambourim Open Tambourim Mute Castanet Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wind Chime PERCUSSION 3 Hand Clap Finger Snap Shekere Shekere Tone Cajon Low Cajon Slap Cajon Tip 4 CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Snare Soft Side Stick TOM/BASS DRUM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom Kick Soft PERCUSSION Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Cowbell Claves Cabasa Tambourine Yunluo D Yunluo D# Yunluo E Yunluo High F Yunluo High F# Yunluo High G Yunluo High G# Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Yunluo High A Yunluo High A# Yunluo High B Yunluo High C Timpani F Timpani F# Timpani G Timpani G# Timpani A Timpani A# Timpani B Timpani C Timpani C# Timpani D Timpani D# Timpani High E PERCUSSION PERCUSSION 1 Muyu Low Muyu Mid-Low Muyu Mid Muyu High Ban Bangu Bangu Roll Nanbangzi Nanbangzi Roll Qing Finger Bell ChineseOperaVo 1 ChineseOperaVo 2 ChineseOperaVo 3 Conga H Stick Conga L Stick Bongo H Stick Bongo L Stick Cowbell Claves Bell Tree Sleigh Bells Tubular Bell H Tubular Bell M Tubular Bell L Wind Chime Jingle Ring Tambourine Castanet Roll Table Castanet OrchestraPerc PERCUSSION 2 GONG 2 China Kit Arabic Kit CYMBAL CYMBAL ARABIC 1 Nakarazan Dom Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Zagrouda H Zagrouda L Arabic Hand Clap Duhulla Dom Duhulla Tak Duhulla Sak Doff Dom Doff Tak ARABIC 2 Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Tik Tabla Roll Edge Tabla Flam Tabel Dom Tabel Tak ARABIC 3 Sagat 1 Sagat 2 Sagat 3 Rik Dom Rik Tak 1 Rik Tak 2 Rik Sak Rik Tik Rik Finger 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik BrassTremolo 110 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Da Cha 1 Da Cha 2 Da Cha Effect Zhongcha Xiaocha Xiaocha Effect Gong Batter Luo Big Luo Luo Mid-Low Luo High 1 Luo High 2 Jin Luo Jin Luo Low Mang Luo Low Mang Luo Mid China Cymbal Finger Cymbal Orch Cymbal 1 OrchCymbal 1 ckd Orch Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Tip Ride Cymbal Cup Splash Cymbal Sus Cymbal 1 Sus Cym 1 Roll S Sus Cymbal 2 Sus Cym 2 Roll L SNARE DRUM ConcertSnareDrum Snare Drum Light Snare Ensemble Snare Roll DRUM TOM Da Gu f Da Gu mp Da Gu Rim Da Gu Roll Da Gu Hand Pai Gu 1 Pai Gu 2 High Pai Gu 2 Pai Gu 3 High Pai Gu 3 Pai Gu 4 High Pai Gu 4 Concert Tom 1 Concert Tom 2 Concert Tom 3 Concert Tom 4 Concert Tom 5 Rotating Tom 1 Rotating Tom 2 Rotating Tom 3 Rotating Tom 4 Rotating Tom 5 GONG 1 Yunluo F Yunluo F# Yunluo G Yunluo G# Yunluo A Yunluo A# Yunluo B Yunluo C Yunluo C# BASS DRUM Gran Cassa Hard Gran Cassa Soft Gran Cassa Hit Gran Cassa Cresc GONG Gong Symphonic Gong 1 Symphonic Gong 2 Symphonic Gong L TIMPANI Timpani E Triangle Open Triangle Mute Triangle Roll Wood Block H Wood Block L Temple Block H Temple Block L Anveil Whip 5 Registration Memory Registration Memory is a powerful performance tool that helps you sound like a professional player. It lets you store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, conveniently allowing you to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing—simply by pressing a single Registration Memory button. The buttons are conveniently located at the top right on the panel for easy access while playing. Just press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select. Moreover, for even greater convenience, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash drive. 1 Storing Registrations Newly created Registrations you’ve made can be stored to the Registration Memory panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash drive. 1 2 Reference Page • Selecting a Rhythm (page 68) Create your original Registration by making all desired panel settings. While holding down the [MEMORY] button in the Registration Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to save your Registration. • Selecting a Voice (page 33) • Voice Controls and Effects (page 52) NOTE By default, Bank A is called up to the panel Registration buttons. Thus, your registration is stored to Bank A. For details about Banks, refer to page 116. NOTICE 2-1. While holding down the [MEMORY] button... 2-2. Press the desired numbered button. When the Registration is stored, the LED of the numbered button flashes momentarily. When storing the Registration to the numbered button, a “” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved, otherwise the data will be lost. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 111 To store Registrations 9 – 16 Although this Electone has just eight Registration Memory buttons, up to sixteen Registrations can be stored by turning on the [9-16] button to make the numbered buttons function as 9 – 16. To restore to the 1-8, turn off the [9-16] button. Then, in both cases, all you have to do is simply press the desired numbered button while holding down the [MEMORY] button as described in step 2. Reference Page Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive (page 147) 5 Functions and settings that cannot be memorized: The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number. • Pitch (page 181) • LCD contrast • MIDI Control settings (page 190) • Wireless LAN settings • LCD related settings (page 27) Registration Memory The following settings are common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and cannot be stored individually for each number. • Transpose (page 181) • User rhythms (page 76) • Registration Shift (page 121) • Rhythm Sequences (page 86) • Auto Fill setting (page 72) • Disable setting (page 114) • Reverb type (page 62) • Disable mode (page 114) • Keyboard Percussion Kit/Assign 112 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 2 Selecting Registrations Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select. (The selected button’s LED lights.) To call up one of the Registrations 9 – 16, turn on the [9-16] button, then press the appropriate numbered button. Example: Calling up Registration Number 11 2. Press the appropriate button Registration Memory 1. Turn on the [9-16] button... 5 To call up the Registrations stored to another Bank If you’ve selected another Bank and stored Registrations to it, you will need to select the same Bank to recall the Registrations. Select the Bank in Page 3 of the VOICE display, then press the panel numbered button to recall the Registration. For details on how to select the Bank, refer to page 116. You can also recall Registrations in a pre-programmed order by using the right footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 121). ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 113 NOTE The Disable function is available even after changing the Bank. Using the [DISABLE] button: Keep in mind that rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns as well as the tempo also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. There may be times during your performance when you want to keep the same rhythm going, even when you make Registration Memory changes. Pressing the [DISABLE] button allows you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to. When the [DISABLE] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. • Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb • Rhythm reverb time • Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of Accompaniment parts • A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory • M.O.C. mode 5 Registration Memory The particular settings that do not change when the [DISABLE] button is on depend on the Disable mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see “Selecting Disable Mode” below. Selecting Disable mode: The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be disabled when the [DISABLE] button is on. There are two Disable modes: Normal (rhythm menu, tempo, etc. are disabled) and Tempo (only tempo is disabled). 1 Press the [UTILITY] button. The UTILITY display appears. 2 3 114 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the Page buttons to select Page 1. Press the [B] button to set DISABLE MODE to “NORMAL” or “TEMPO.” NORMAL When the Disable Mode is set to Normal and the [DISABLE] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. • Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb • Rhythm reverb time • Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of Accompaniment parts • A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory • M.O.C. mode TEMPO When the Disable Mode is set to Tempo and the [DISABLE] button is on, the rhythm tempo will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. 5 Registration Memory 2 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 115 3 Storing Registrations to Another Bank Registration Memory and Banks The ELB-02 series lets you create up to five Registration Banks A – E, each of which consists of 1 – 16 Registration Memories. Although preset various Registrations are stored to the Number buttons 1 – 16 of only Bank A by default, you can replace them with your original Registrations. Your original Registrations can be stored also to Banks B – E, up to a maximum of 80 Registrations. Executing the Initialize function (page 120) recalls the preset Registrations of Bank A, and then resets the created Registrations of Banks B – E to their original empty status. Bank E Bank D Bank C Bank B Registration Bank A 5 Registration Memory With the default initial settings and Bank A selected, you can store your original Registrations to Banks A and B. Bank C is available only after Registrations have been stored to Bank B. Likewise, other Banks (up to Bank E) will not be available until the Bank preceding it contains data. To select the Bank: 1 2 116 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Call up the VOICE Display, then select the Page 3. The currently selected Registration bank will be shown. Select the desired Bank by using the DATA CONTROL dial. You can select the Banks from A (at top) to an empty Bank next to the last Bank containing data. When Banks A and B contain Registration data, for example, you can select Banks A, B, and C (which is empty). The message shows whether the selected Bank contains data or not. When you select the Bank containing data, no message is shown, while a message “Registration is not recorded” is shown when you select an empty Bank. To store the Registration: NOTE 3 When you try to store Registrations after changing the Bank, a confirmation dialog appears. Confirm whether or not you want to set the current Bank as the destination. If you want to set the current Bank as the destination, press the [C] “OK” button, or press the [D] “CANCEL” button to cancel the operation. Create your original Registration, then store it to any of the Number buttons 1 – 16. (This corresponds to steps 1 – 2 on page 111.) 4 Deleting Banks Select the desired Bank to be deleted in Page 3 of the VOICE display, then press the [D] button corresponding to “DELETE” in the display. A message “Are you sure you want to delete the Bank xx” appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Press the [C] “DELETE” button if you want to delete the Bank, or [D] “CANCEL” button to cancel the operation. Bank A can only be deleted if data is stored to another bank (other than A). Registration Memory 5 Data of Banks that follow the deleted Bank will be moved up to the previous Bank respectively. For example, deleting the Bank A will move the data of Bank B to Bank A, Bank C to Bank B, Bank D to Bank C, and Bank E to Bank D. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 117 Saving the Registration Data to USB 5 Flash Drive Reference Page What is a Song? (page 134) Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) The Registration data stored to the Number buttons can be saved to a USB flash drive connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. For details about the save operation, see Chapter 6, Music Data Recorder (MDR). The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash drive. Make sure to use one of the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/ Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132. 1 5 2 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button. The MDR display appears. Registration Memory 3 4 118 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Confirm the SONG Page is shown. Confirm “SONG” is shown at the top right of the display. If another page is shown, select the “SONG” Page by simultaneously pressing both Page buttons. Select the Song to which you want to save the Registration data. Press the [B] button corresponding to the “ ” in the display to call up the Song/Folder list, in which you can find “new song” (blank Song) at the bottom of the list. Select “new song” by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial. 5 6 Press the [D] “UNIT” button. The UNIT EDIT display appears. Press the [B] “SAVE” button. A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved. When the operation is completed, the message closes and the Song name and the Unit number will be shown in the display. The Registration data stored to Banks A – E is now saved as a Unit to the USB flash drive. Song name Registration Memory 5 Unit number 7 Reference Page Press the [D] “EXIT” button. The display returns to MDR display. Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 154) Reference Page Changing the Song/Folder Name (page 144) About Banks and Units The Registration Memory data (16 x up to 5 Banks) stored to internal memory of the instrument will be handled as a “Unit.” If you want to create more than 80 (=16 x 5 Banks) Registrations, create another Unit to create more additional Registrations. The Unit can be edited in the MDR function. See page 147. Song Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Bank E Bank D Bank C Bank B Registration Memory Bank A ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 119 6 Initializing Registration Memory NOTE Deleting Banks (page 117) Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration Memory and restores the original factory-programmed Registration Memory presets. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data. In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to a USB flash drive. If you want to delete a specific Bank, see “Deleting Banks” on page 117. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Page 1 of the UTILITY display. If another page is shown, select Page 1 by using the Page buttons. 5 Registration Memory Reference Page Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) (page 27) 120 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 2 Press the [D] “INITIALIZE” button. The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. Press [C] “INITIALIZE” button to actually initialize the data. When the operation is complete, the Electone will be restarted. 7 Registration Shift The Registration Shift function conveniently allows you to change Registrations without needing to take your hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify. Registration Shift has four modes: Off, Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the VOICE Display. Right Footswitch Expression Pedal Select the Bank containing the Registration you want to use. 2 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button. 3 5 Registration Memory 1 Use the Page buttons to select Page 1. The REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display appears. REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) Display ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 121 4 Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display by successive pressing of the [A] button. Select each in order (Off Shift Jump User). 1 OFF 2 SHIFT 3 JUMP 4 USER 1 Off Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When Off is selected, Registrations cannot be changed by using the Right Footswitch. 2 Shift In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The LEDs of numbered buttons 1 – 16 light up as they are selected. Keep in mind that the [9-16] button lights up in addition to the selected numbered button if Registrations 9 – 16 are selected. 5 Registration Memory You can confirm the actual Registration Shift in Page 2. NOTE In the Shift mode, the Right Footswitch cannot call up another Registration Bank. 122 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Bank Current Registration Next Registration 3 Jump NOTE Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration. Press the [B] button to select the Jump destination. In the Jump mode, the Right Footswitch cannot call up another Registration Bank. You can confirm the actual Registration Shift in Page 2. Bank Current Registration Registration number of the destination 5 Registration Memory 4 User In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. You can also specify an end point for the Registration Shift function. User Shift can be set in Page 2, and Shift End can be set in Page 1 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display. To set the User Registration order: Before proceeding, set the mode to 4 User. 1 Select the Bank containing the Registration you want to use. For details about how to select Banks, refer to page 116. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 123 2 Call up Page 2 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display. [Page 2] REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) Display Enter the Registration Number NOTE To select the Registration from another Bank, select desired Bank in the Page 3 of the VOICE display (page 116). To go back to the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display, press the [FOOT SWITCH] button. 3 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section. If you want to use 9 – 16 Registrations, turn on the [9-16] button, then press the desired numbered button. 5 Registration Memory 4 Press the [A] “INS.” (Insert) button. Highlighted cursor indicates the data entry position. NOTE No Bank indication will be shown as long as same Registration Bank will be used. 5 The Bank indication and Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is entered. Bank 124 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 6 7 Repeat steps 1 through 4 above to set additional numbers in the Registration order. Up to 400 steps with 80 Registrations (16 Registrations x 5 Banks) can be memorized. After settings, move the cursor to the top position with DATA CONTROL dial, then press the Right Footswitch as you play the Electone. Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. If you’ve inadvertently advanced the shift setting in the middle of your performance, use DATA CONTROL dial to move the cursor back to the correct position. Move the cursor to the desired point with the [C] and [D] buttons or DATA CONTROL dial, then insert or delete the desired number by using the [A] and [B] buttons. NOTICE The Registration Shift setting will be automatically saved to the Registration data when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, a “” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the save operation is in progress, or without switching to another display, otherwise the data will be lost. NOTE Registration data cannot be added or deleted when the cursor position is at the “TOP” (found at the lower left of the screen) after inputting the number. Add or delete the data after moving the cursor by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. 5 NOTE Data Entry Position: Highlighted cursor indicates the current data entry position. If you want to move the cursor to the left, press the [C] button or turn the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise. If you want to move the cursor to the right, press the [D] button or turn the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Registration Memory Move the cursor position Up to five Registration numbers can be displayed at once in the LCD; however, screen scrolling is enabled when four or more Registration numbers are input. Turn the DATA CONTROL dial counterclockwise to scroll back toward the beginning. Insert: Use the [A] button. This is for initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row. To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button, then press the [A] “INS.” button. The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row. After using [A] “INS.” button to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers. Insert can also be used to insert a Registration number just before the current cursor position. To perform the operation, first move the data entry position to a numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button, and press the [A] “INS.” button. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers. Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of 400. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, “INS.” in the display will changed to “---” and the operation cannot be executed. Delete: Use the [B] button. To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press the [B] “DEL.” button. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 125 Shift End: Determines the end point for the Registration Shift function. Press the Page buttons to select Page 1. Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. 1 STOP 2 TOP 3 NEXT UNIT 1 Stop Selects the last Registration and quits the operation. 5 2 Top After the last preset is reached, “Top” is called up, returning operation to the beginning. To select the first preset, press the Right Footswitch. Registration Memory Reference Page Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations in one performance) (page 153) NOTE • When you play the Song using Next Unit function, always press the [PLAY/ PAUSE] button to start the Song with CUSTOM PLAY function (page 156) is set to off since CUSTOM PLAY function will not activate the Next Unit function. • When you use the Next Unit function during Rhythm playback, Rhythm Sequence and User Rhythm cannot be loaded. 126 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 3 Next Unit After the last preset is reached, the next Unit in the Song on the MDR is called up. This function is available only when two or more Units are saved in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a Song with more than 80 Registrations. The Shift End mark ( : Top, : Next) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you entered when Top or Next Unit is selected as the Shift End. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) The Music Data Recorder (MDR) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash drive. Moreover, the MDR allows you to perform various other operations to your Song data (such as copy, delete and convert). Compatible USB flash drives Please make sure to use one of the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/ Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132. Copy Song data USB flash drive Delete Convert 1 Calling Up the MDR Display Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the MDR display. All operations related to the MDR, such as recording and playing your performances, can be done from the MDR display. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) MDR Display Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the MDR display is open exits from the MDR display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the [MDR] button again to recall the MDR display. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 127 2 Using the MDR Display The MDR display consists of seven display Pages. Each Page is devoted to a specific function, and you can call up the desired function or operation by selecting the appropriate Page. For example, first select the SONG Page to select a target Song, then select TOOLS1 Page to copy/convert/delete the Song, or TEMPO Page to set the Repeat playback setting for the Song. To select the desired Page, use Page buttons at the top right of the display on the panel. The TEMPO Page and PART Page below will be shown when you press the [C] “SET.” (Setting) button in the SONG Page while the Song is selected. Page construction SONG Page TOOLS1 Page • Select target Song TOOLS2 Page • Copy/Delete/Convert Song * You can copy folder or USB flash drive. • Create Folder • Format USB flash drive 6 • Change Song/Folder name • Confirm information of Song/USB flash drive Press the [C] “SET.” button while the Song is selected. Music Data Recorder (MDR) Press the [D] “FINISH” button. TEMPO Page • Song tempo, Repeat playback settings • Custom Play PART 1 Page Part settings for Song PART 2 Page Part settings for Song PART 3 Page Part settings for XG Song NOTE Keep in mind that the functions shown in the TOOLS1 and TOOLS2 Pages depend on the target selected in the SONG Page. 128 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual SONG Page: 7 1 6 4 5 2 3 1 Current USB Flash Drive/Folder Displays the currently selected USB flash drive or folder. The contents included in 1 are listed as 2 below. 2 USB Flash Drive/Folder/Song List Displays the USB flash drive, folders or Songs. 3 Scroll bar If the USB flash drive/folder/Song list contains more than 5 USB flash drive/folders/ Songs, you can scroll through the display with the DATA CONTROL dial. 4 UP Selects the higher layer folder or USB flash drive by pressing the [A] button. 5 IN Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or USB flash drive by pressing the [B] button. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 6 Page Selects the Page of the display if the display contains two or more Pages. 7 Unit Show the Unit name last used (shown as blank unless the UNIT is used). If USB flash drive cannot be found: Press the [A] “ ” button several times until the indication changes to “ .” The USB flash drive list will be displayed. If there are more than three media selections, scroll through the display with the DATA CONTROL dial to display and select the desired USB flash drive. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 129 If Songs cannot be found: 1 2 Check the current USB flash drive/ folder (page 129 1). If the desired Song is stored in the currently displayed folder, use the DATA CONTROL dial to display and select the Song. If the desired Song is stored in a different folder, use the DATA CONTROL dial and the [A] “ ” and [B] “ ” buttons to select the folder in which the desired Song is stored. Song icons These icons are shown when you select a USB flash drive, folder, and Song. Indicates a USB flash drive. This icon is displayed in the USB flash drive/ folder list. Indicates a folder. Indicates that performance data is contained in the Song. 6 Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 163 for details. Music Data Recorder (MDR) Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 163 for details. Indicates an XG-compatible Song. 130 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Media (USB flash drive) Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files Folders: A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple Songs in groups. If you've saved hundreds of Songs to a USB flash drive, it may be difficult to find the desired Song quickly. Organizing your Songs in folders, with similar Songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the Songs you want. Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 Song 4 Song 5 Song 6 Song 1 2 Folder 001 Creating folders Song Song 3 Song 4 5 6 Folder 002 Song USB flash drive USB flash drive Songs: A Song is a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single Song can contain both the recorded performance and Registrations. A blank Song containing no data is displayed as a “new song.” When a Song containing the performance data is selected, a note icon ( ) appears in the display. Files: A file is an element of data in a Song. For example, a single Song consists of various files, such as Registration files and performance files. The file types listed below are created with the MDR (The extension will not appear in the Electone display. They will, however, be displayed on a computer.) Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 Files in the Song File Explanation Extension Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the keyboards and pedals of the Electone. .mid Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices, User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences. .b00 XG-converted data This file contains XG Song data, for which Electone performance data is converted to XG-compatible format. .mid In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone display. NOTE Audio files cannot be saved to a Song, even if created with the Audio Recording features (page 169). ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 131 Connecting a USB Device You can connect a USB flash drive (sold separately) or a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. You can save data you’ve created on the instrument to the USB flash drive (pages 118, 147), or you can connect the instrument to a smart device such as iPad via wireless LAN (page 192). Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time to a terminal, you should use a self-powered USB hub. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. • When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters. • Do not connect an extension cable. NOTE For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. Using USB Flash Drives Compatible USB devices • USB flash drive • USB hub • USB wireless LAN adaptor By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://download.yamaha.com/ Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading from the USB device may differ depending on the type of data or the status of the instrument. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) NOTE The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/ 500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself. Connecting USB devices When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. NOTICE • When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key cover (if you use the separately sold key cover). If the key cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB device may be damaged. • Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device during playback/recording and file management operations (such as Save, Copy, Delete and Format), or when accessing the USB device. Failure to observe this may result in “freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the USB device and the data. • When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two operations. 132 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Maximum number of USB flash drives allowed Up to two USB flash drives can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB flash drives that can be recognized simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of four.) Formatting a USB Flash Drive You should format the USB flash drive only with this instrument (page 133). A USB flash drive formatted on another device may not operate properly. NOTICE The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash drive. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect. Turning off the instrument When turning off the instrument, make sure that the instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by playback/recording or file management (such as during Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data. 3 Formatting a USB Flash Drive If you find that you are unable to use a new, blank USB flash drive or an old one that has been used with other devices, you may need to format it. Formatting erases all the data in the USB flash drive and makes it ready to record. The data erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the USB flash drive contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash drives. 1 2 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminals. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the MDR display. 3 4 Select the desired USB flash drive you want to format. If a single USB flash drive is connected, only USB 01 will be displayed. After that, if you connect another USB flash drive, the latter one will be displayed as USB 02. If the desired USB flash drive is not selected, use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired one. Press the Page buttons at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS1 Page. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 Reference Page If USB flash drive cannot be found: (page 129) NOTE If two (or more) USB flash drives are connected, which of them is labeled USB 01 or USB 02 may change when you turn on the power to the instrument. Currently selected USB flash drive name ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 133 5 NOTICE Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during formatting. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data. 6 Press the [D] “FORMAT” button in the display. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. Press the [C] “FORMAT” button to format the USB flash drive. When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to SONG Page. 4 Selecting a Song Reference Page USB flash drive (Media) Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files (page 131) 6 NOTICE Music Data Recorder (MDR) While the instrument is accessing data, do NOT remove the USB flash drive. (Some USB flash drives are equipped with an LED. The LED will flash while the USB flash drive is being accessed.) Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) In order to record your performance to the USB flash drive or to load Registrations in the USB flash drive back to the Electone, you will need to select a Song, as described below. What is a Song? You can think of a song as a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single song can contain both the recorded performance and Registrations. 1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then press the [MDR] button. MDR Display [SONG Page] Currently selected USB flash drive name The SONG Page of the MDR display appears. In the SONG Page, you can select a blank Song for recording your performance or saving the Registration settings, or you can select a desired Song for playback. 134 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 2 Select the desired USB flash drive. Reference Page If USB flash drive cannot be found: (page 129) NOTE If two (or more) USB flash drives are connected, which of them is labeled USB 01 or USB 02 may change when you turn on the power to the instrument. If a single USB flash drive is connected, only USB 01 will be displayed. After that, if you connect another USB flash drive, the latter one will be displayed as USB 02. If the desired USB flash drive is not selected, use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired one. Select a Song. Press the [B] “ ” button to call up the Song/folder list contained in the USB flash drive, then select the desired Song by using the DATA CONTROL dial. NOTE The “new song” file is a blank Song automatically created in the USB flash drive/folder, if the number of the Songs in the USB flash drive/folder is less than 100. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 Reference Page • Changing the Song/Folder Name (page 144) • Song Icons (page 130) Select “new song” at the bottom of the list if you want to make a new recording or save data. To simply play an existing Song, select the desired Song (containing data), referring to the Song name and icons. The selected Song is highlighted. Song containing data Blank Song (containing no data) For details about how to select songs in a folder, see “Selecting a Song in a Folder” on page 136. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 135 Reference Page Playback Settings • Playing Back the Selected Part(s) (page 157) Pressing the [C] “SET.” button in the SONG Page of the MDR display while the Song is selected calls up a display of the currently selected Song, letting you confirm the tempo/ repeat settings (TEMPO Page) or parts that are played when playing the Song (PART Pages). These Pages can be switched by pressing the Page buttons in the order: TEMPO PART 1 PART 2 PART 3. • Changing the Tempo (page 158) When playing back the Song (by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel), only those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the display actually play at the indicated tempo (over a range of 50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the Song contains no performance data, all parts are set to “OFF.” Selecting the Song in the Folder: Keep in mind that the Song in the folder will not be shown in the display unless you open the folder which contains the Song. The illustrations below shows you how to use the display to access a specific Song in a folder of a USB flash drive (in this case, calling up the Song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star”). NOTE The new Song is a blank Song which is automatically created in the USB flash drive/folder, if the number of the Songs in the USB flash drive/folder is less than 100. 6 USB flash drive (USB 01) Music Data Recorder (MDR) FOLDER_001 FOLDER_002 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star new song SONG 001 new song The illustration below shows the levels of folders and Songs in the USB flash drive. Follow the dark arrows and the accompanying instruction steps to select the desired Song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” First level (root directory) USB flash drive (USB 01) 1. Press the [B] button Second level in the root directory 2. Use the DATA CONTROL dial FOLDER_001 FOLDER_002 3. Press the [B] button Third level in the root directory SONG 001 new song 4. Use the DATA CONTROL dial Twinkle Twinkle Little Star new song Songs or folders in the same level can be selected in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. 136 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Here is the actual procedure again, in linear form: 1 Press the [B] button corresponding to the “ ” in the display to call up the folder/Songs list in the selected USB flash drive. FOLDER_001, FOLDER_002 and SONG_001 are displayed. 2 Select FOLDER_002 by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. 3 Press the [B] button to call up the song in the FOLDER_002. 6 4 Music Data Recorder (MDR) In this case, already “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star” is selected. Select the desired Song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star,” by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 137 5 Recording MDR Recording This lets you record your performance as a Song to a USB flash drive. A Song is comprised of your keyboard performance information and is not a recording of the actual sound itself. The performance information refers to which keys are played, at what timing, and at what strength — just as in a musical score. Based on the recorded performance information, the tone generator of the Electone outputs the corresponding sound. MDR also records Registrations such as Voice selection, effect settings and so on for future recall. In addition, this method enables you to record parts individually and rerecord a specific part. Keep in mind that the Song recorded on the Electone using the MDR function is intended for playing back only on the Electone, so you cannot transfer the Song to other devices such as a portable music player for playing the Song on such devices. If you want to do so, record your performance as an audio file in the method described in Chapter 7 “Audio” on page 169. Recording Before recording, set up the Electone just as you’ll need it for the entire recording. Set the desired Registrations you’ll use throughout the performance/recording in Registration Memory and make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at the beginning of the Song. 6 Reference Page Music Data Recorder (MDR) Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) NOTE When you record the Song using the Next Unit function, make sure to press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button before pressing the [RECORD] button. For details, see page 154. 1 2 3 138 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, then select the blank Song “new song” for recording your performance. For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Press the [RECORD] button in the Music Data Recorder section on the panel. The lamp of the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the Electone is ready to record. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [STOP] button. 4 5 6 7 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the top left on the panel to start the recording. The lamp of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button lights up and a small indicator flashes across from left to right at the bottom left of the LCD display. This indicates that Registration data is currently being saved as a Unit to the Song. Reference Page Unit (page 119) After “00:00” appears at the bottom left of the LCD display, begin playing. When you finish playing, press the [STOP] button. Recording stops and your performance is written to the Song. The Song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named like “SONG_001.” You can change the Song name as desired. (For details, see page 144.) NOTICE Do not remove the USB flash drive from the instrument during recording. To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. Playback will begin after a couple of seconds, as the Electone reads the Registration. For more information on playback and other playback-related functions, see page 155. NOTE Outline of MDR Operation Basically, the MDR independently records the following three types of data: 6 Saving Registrations (page 147) Music Data Recorder (MDR) Registration data (including Bulk data) All registrations stored to the Registration Memory numbered buttons as well as the registration currently set to the panel, are recorded at the beginning of a Song, before the actual recording of your performance. Bulk data is also saved to the Song with the Registration data. Bulk data includes: Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Pattern (User rhythms) and Rhythm Sequence data, and User voices. Performance data The MDR records your performance on the keyboards and pedalboard of the Electone exactly as you play it, even recording the strength at which you play the keys and how hard you press them down while playing. The various types of performance data – Upper, Lower, Pedal and Lead – are recorded to independent “tracks,” so that you can change any one of them without affecting the others. Control data All changes you make on the Electone during your performance are recorded in real time. These include registration changes, the use of the expression pedals and footswitches. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 139 Re-recording (Retry) NOTE After exiting from the recording mode, you can rerecord your performance using the same Registration. 1 Select the Song you want to re-record. After selecting the Song, select the TOOL1 Page with the Page buttons, then press the [B] “DELETE” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Press the [C] “PERF. ONLY” (Performance Only) button to delete only the performance data. 2 Load the Unit of the Song to the Electone (page 154). If you make a mistake during recording, you can simply re-record the song from the beginning. 1 2 3 Press the [RECORD] button while the Song is still running. This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the Song. The lamp of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button starts flashing, indicating that you can re-record the Song. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Re-recording starts from the beginning of the Song and replaces the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded performance. Press the [STOP] button. 3 Start recording in the normal way (and not in the way described in “Re-recording” here. Recording Each Part Separately Reference Page 6 Control data (page 139) Music Data Recorder (MDR) You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the Song. Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 can be recorded separately. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the Song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper Keyboard. 1 2 140 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 138 to call up the Rec Standby display. Select the Page PART 1 or PART 2 with the Page buttons. 3 Select the parts for recording. In this case, set the Lower Keyboard (LOWER) and Pedalboard (PEDAL) to “RECORD,” while other parts to “OFF.” PART 1 Page PART 2 Page Each press of the [A] – [C] button corresponding to the desired part in the display toggles the status among PLAY, OFF and RECORD. Turn off the parts you don’t want to record, and make sure “PLAY” is selected for the parts you want to play and “RECORD” for the part you want to record. NOTE You should also set the CONTROL to “REC,” in order to record Registration changes and expression pedal operation. NOTE When you record the Keyboard Percussion, make sure that the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button is set to on. PLAY: Playback of parts that have been recorded. OFF: Recording or playback is not active. RECORD: Recording of the part. If you set the UPPER part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard (including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting LEAD to “REC,” however, records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to “REC” at the same time; neither can the LOWER and KBP (Keyboard Percussion) parts be recorded at the same time. 5 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. After “00:00” appears at the bottom left of the LCD display, begin playing. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 6 Press the [STOP] button when you are finished with your performance to stop recording. Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance. Setting up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case. 6 7 Press the [RECORD] button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. To overwrite, press the [C] “OVERWRITE” button. Select the PART Page with the Page buttons, then select the parts for recording. Set the parts you want to record next (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.” Also set the part already recorded (in this case, the Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,” so that you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 141 If you want to change the part tempo for ease in recording, perform steps 8 and 9; otherwise, skip to step 10. 8 9 Select the TEMPO Page with the Page buttons. Change the playback tempo, if desired. The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50% to 200% of the original. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo. Use the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the tempo. 10 Press the [C] button repeatedly, if necessary, to set “CUSTOM PLAY” to ON to start recording of the new part or parts. 6 11 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel to start recording, Music Data Recorder (MDR) then begin playing. Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The CUSTOM PLAY function is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback. While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the Upper Keyboard. When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. 12 To stop the recording, press the [STOP] button. 142 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Punch-in Recording This lets you re-record over a specific phrase or section—either that of a specific part(s) or all parts. 1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. NOTE This function is best used when the phrase to be rerecorded has definite beginning and end points, with slight pauses before and after. Reference Page 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song which contains the phrase you want to change. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the Song. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the point you want to execute punch-in recording. The current Song is stopped momentarily. Press the [RECORD] button. The lamp of the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the MDR is ready to record. Set the parts which you want to change to “RECORD” status and other parts to “PLAY.” Part settings can be set in Pages PART 1 and PART 2. You can cancel the record standby mode at this point by pressing the [STOP] button. 6 Reference Page Recording Each Part Separately (page 140) Music Data Recorder (MDR) 2 Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start punch-in recording. Play the new phrase, as you want it to be changed. Press the [STOP] button to quit punch-in recording as soon as you reach the end of the phrase. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 143 6 Changing the Song/Folder Name NOTE However, Song names of ELseries Electones, such as the EL-900, cannot be changed. Reference Page Even though the Electone automatically assigns a generic name to each recorded Song, it’s best to give each Song a “meaningful” name, such as an original title or even a date indicating when it was recorded. 1 Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) 2 3 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song/folder whose name you want to change. For details on selecting a Song or a folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS2 Page. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) NOTE A blank Song cannot be named. Once a Song contains data, it can be named. 4 Press the [D] “CHANGE NAME” button. The CHANGE NAME display appears. Cursor 144 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 5 Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [A] buttons. Pressing the [A] button moves the cursor one step to the right, and holding moves the cursor to the right continuously. When the cursor reaches to the end of the name, it will return to the beginning of the name. Cursor Change the character at the cursor position. Replace the current character at the cursor by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Turn it clockwise to select the characters in order, and counter-clockwise for reverse order. Blank NOTE A – Z (capital) If “ENGLISH” is selected as the Language in the Utility display (page 27), Japanese katakana characters are unavailable. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 a – z (lower case) Japanese katakana Marks Number 0 – 9 To delete a character: Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the [C] button. When the character is deleted, all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved one step to the left. To insert a character: Move the cursor one step right to the position at which you want to enter the character, press the [B] button then use the DATA CONTROL dial. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 145 NOTE An XG Song name can contain up to 46 characters. 7 8 9 Repeat steps 5 through step 6 above to finish entering the Song name. Up to 50 characters can be entered. After finishing, press the [D] “EXIT” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. To actually enter the change, press the [C] “CHANGE” button. The renamed Song/folder is displayed. An error message (“This name is not available”) may appear when pressing the [C] “CHANGE” button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you’ll need to enter a different name. The following names cannot be used. (The letters “xx” indicate numbers.) 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 146 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual MDR_xx.EVT ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.TMP TMP MDR_xx.MID MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.TMP TMP.E02 MDR_xx.Bxx REG_xxx.B00 ELS_SONG.TMP MDR_xx.Vxx SONG_xxx.C02 SONG.NAM 7 Saving Registrations You can also record Registration Memory data and other created data, separate from performance recording, as listed below. The data will be saved to a Unit of the selected Song. Data saved to a Unit NOTE Registration Memory 16 x 5 Banks Registration Shift settings Reverb Type, Disable mode, [DISABLE] button on/off status User Keyboard Percussion When loading Registration data containing the following data created on the ELS series,) User Rhythm data, Rhythm Sequence data, User Voice data, Voice Link data Even if you’ve only created a couple of Registrations yourself, 16 separate Registration Memory settings are always stored when saving to a Song—the factory preset Registrations being stored if no new settings have been made to the numbers. NOTE Units can be saved to Songs created on the ELS or ELB series, but not to Songs created on the EL series such as EL-900. Song Unit 3 Unit 2 Reference Page Unit 1 Bank and Unit (page 119) Bank E Bank D Bank C Bank B Reference Page Functions and settings that cannot be memorized (page 112) 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Registration Memory Bank A There are two ways to save Registrations. Method 1 1 2 3 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) First make all the desired Electone settings to create your original Registration. Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination (blank Song). Select “new song.” For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 147 4 5 Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display. “NEW UNIT” (blank Unit) is selected. Press the [B] “SAVE” button. A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. After the message disappears, the Unit to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “UNIT 1,” and “SONG XXX” (XXX: number) is assigned as Song name to the destination Song. Song name 6 Unit number Music Data Recorder (MDR) Reference Page Changing the Song/Folder Name (page 144) 6 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display. Method 2 1 2 148 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual First make all the desired settings you want to save, then select the destination (blank Song) as you did in steps 1 and 3 above. Press the [RECORD] button on the panel to enable recording on the MDR. 3 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to record the Registrations, then press the [STOP] button before the “00:00” indication is shown at the bottom left of the display. This is the same procedure as the one shown when you start recording. The “00:00” at the bottom left of the display indicates that the MDR is recording the Registrations and being set up for normal recording; pressing the [STOP] button interrupts this process. Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song Song Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 NOTE Although a maximum of 50 Units can be saved to a single Song, the actual amount may differ since the total number of Banks that can be saved to 5 Units is limited to 50. For example, saving 5 Banks to one Unit results in a maximum of 10 Units that can be saved to a Song. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) When you want to use various Registrations exceeding five Registration Banks (one Unit), you should save additional Registration Units to a Song. Bank E Bank D Bank C Bank B Registration Memory Bank A 1 2 3 First make all the desired settings you want to save. Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination Song which includes Registration data. For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 149 4 Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display. In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as “UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.” Reference Page Files (page 131) 5 6 NOTE 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) When playing back an EL Song (created on the EL series, such as EL-900) which uses the Next Song function, the Unit data in the next Song will be loaded. 150 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 7 Select the blank Registration bank “NEW UNIT” to which you want to save the additional Registration bank, located at the bottom of the list, by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Press the [B] “SAVE” button. The Registration Unit will be added and follows previously contained Units. Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display. To play this Song, first press the [D] “EXIT” button to returns to the SONG Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Keep in mind that when you play back this Song, the “UNIT 1” will be loaded to the Electone, but the next Unit will not be loaded unless you make the Next Unit settings of Registration Shift (page 153). Overwriting Registration data to a Unit This operation lets you replace just the Registration Unit without changing the performance data in already recorded Song data. 1 2 3 4 First make all the desired settings you want to save to the new Registration. Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, and then select the desired Song containing the Registration you wish to replace. When a Song contains performance data, a note icon ( ) will appear at the left of the Song name. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Reference Page Song icons (page 130) Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as “UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.” 5 6 Select the Registration Unit number you wish to overwrite by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Press the [B] “SAVE” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. 7 Press the [C] “OVERWRITE” button to overwrite (replace). 8 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 151 Deleting Registrations This function lets you delete the Registration Unit saved to a Song. 1 2 3 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song containing the Registrations you wish to delete. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display. In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as “UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.” 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 5 NOTE if you delete all the Units from a Song, that song will be deleted. 152 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Select the Registration Unit number you want to delete by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Press the [C] “DEL.” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. 6 Press the [C] “DELETE” button. 7 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display. Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations in one performance) You’ve learned in an earlier section that by using 5 Bank of 16 Registrations, you can program a maximum of 400 settings to be recalled in a specified order, with the Regist Shift function described on page 123. When playing back a Song which uses more than 80 Registration numbers, you can have two or more Registration Units saved to a single Song and recall them one by one as you play the Song. This function that makes this possible is called Next Unit. 1 2 3 Set the User Registration order. Set the Registration Shift mode to USER, and select Next UNIT as the Shift End in Page 1 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display, then set the Use Registration order in Page 2. For details, see “To set the User Registration order” on page 123. Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination Song. For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. 6 Call up the UNIT EDIT display, then save the User Registration to “NEW UNIT” (blank Unit). Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 5 6 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display. Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to save the Registration Units in the order you want to recall them in the same Song. For details, see “Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song” on page 149. NOTE When repeating steps 2 – 5 and making new Registration Shift settings, delete the previous settings, then continue. Once the Next Unit function has been turned on and set, you can use the function, following the steps below. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 153 7 8 NOTICE When you record a Song using the Next Unit function, make sure to load the top Registration Unit (UNIT 1) to the Electone by pressing the [PLAY/ PAUSE] button after selecting the desired song. If you begin the recording procedure instead by pressing the [RECORD] button, even as another Unit (UNIT 2, etc.) is loading, a message “The data currently loaded in the instrument is that of Unit xx. Are you sure you want to save the data to Unit 1?” will be shown. If you select “OK,” Unit 1 will be overwritten by the current Unit and will be lost. 6 9 Press the [MDR] button, and select the Song for which the Next Unit function has been set. See steps 2 and 3 on page 135 for instructions on selecting Songs. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. If the Song contains more than two Registration Units, the first one will be loaded. You can check the Registration order in Page 2 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display. As you play the Electone, press the Right Footswitch. Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. After finishing the play back of the first Unit, the next Unit begins loading automatically, and can be selected by pressing the Right Footswitch. Right Footswitch Expression Pedal NOTE Music Data Recorder (MDR) While a rhythm is playing, sequence data and User rhythm in the Registration data created on the Electone such as ELS series cannot be loaded. 8 Recalling Recorded Registrations Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to the Song can be easily loaded back to the Electone. Use this function if you want to recall a specific Registration Unit (other than UNIT 1) from a Song which contains more than two Registration Units. Loading Registrations Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) 1 2 154 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button and select the Song containing the Registrations you want to load back to the Electone. For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. 3 Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display. In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as “UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.” 5 6 7 Select the Registration Unit number you want to load by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Press the [A] “LOAD” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. Press the [C] “LOAD” button. A message appears, indicating the selected Unit including the 16 Registrations x 5 banks is currently being loaded. After the Registration data is loaded, the LCD returns to the UNIT EDIT display. This section describes how to play back a Song recorded with the MDR and the commercially available Song data which can be played back with the MDR. This operation lets you automatically load the Registration data saved to a Song when playing back your recorded performances. Thus, you can use the loaded Registrations for your performance. 2 6 Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display. 9 Playing Back a Song 1 NOTE If you load a Registration while a rhythm is playing, User rhythms and sequence data created on the ELS series in the Registration data cannot be loaded. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the Song to be played back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. NOTICE Since playing back a Song containing a Registration data will load the Registration data (Unit 1) in the Song to the Electone, the Registration data memorized on the Electone will be overwritten and erased. Save your important Registration data on the Electone to the USB flash drive, referring to “Saving Registrations.” Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired Song for playback. For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. NOTE Audio files will not be shown in the MDR Display even when the USB flash drive contains audio files. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 155 Reference Page Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations in one performance) (page 153) 3 NOTE Registration data is generally not included in most Song data, such as commercially available XG Songs created on instruments other than the Electone. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. A “-----” mark appears at the bottom left of the display, indicating the Registration data is currently being loaded when the Song contains the Registration data. When the Song contains more than two Registration Units, the first one will be loaded. Depending on the Song, no note icon is shown by the file name, indicating that only Registration data is included and there is no performance data. Starting playback of such a Song will load only Registration data, produce no sound, and return operation to the SONG Page. 4 When a Song contains performance data, playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data. (No sound will be produced if no performance data is included). The elapsed time will be showed on the display, and Song playback starts (if the Song contains performance data). In general, all parts recorded to the Song are played back; however, you can mute specific parts and play back only selected parts (page 157). When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the Song by pressing the [STOP] button. Although this Electone can play Songs created on other Electones, such as the ELS series, the sound or tempo of the Song may differ from the original. 6 Reference Page Playback Settings (page 136) Custom Play Music Data Recorder (MDR) If you want to play back the Song without resetting the Registrations, use the Custom Play function. Turn the CUSTOM PLAY to ON in the TEMPO Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel. This displays the Song time and starts playback immediately. When you play a Song using the Next Unit function, make sure to turn CUSTOM PLAY to OFF in the TEMPO Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start the Song. 156 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Playing Back Selected Parts You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts. To play back the selected part(s): Before or during playback, use the [A] – [C] buttons to turn the parts you want to play back to “PLAY” and the parts you want to mute to “OFF.” Pressing the corresponding button toggles the part setting between PLAY and OFF. The XG part setting can be set in the PART 3 Page. Reference Page Playback Settings (page 136) Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 Rewind and Fast Forward: During audio playback (or when paused), press the [REW] (Rewind) button or [FF] (Fast forward) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To resume playback from the point you’ve reversed to or advanced, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Pause: If you want to temporarily stop playback of the Song or Songs, press the [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. To resume playback from the point at which the Song was paused, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 157 Changing the Tempo You can change the tempo of the Song as the Song is playing in the MDR display, either while the Song is stopped or while it is playing. Since the procedure for changing the tempo is differ depends on whether the Song has an icon or not, confirm if the desired Song has an icon or not. icon is included: You can change the tempo in the following procedure. icon is not included: You can change the tempo by re-recording the tempo saved in the Registration data of the Song. Copy the Song for which you want to change the tempo, then play the edit (copied) Song to load the Registration data to the Electone for editing. Recall the desired Registration for editing by pressing the Registration numbered button, and change the tempo with the TEMPO button on the panel, then record the changed tempo to the Registration numbered button. Repeat these steps for all numbered buttons you want to change the tempo. After finishing the settings, save (overwrite) the Registration data to the edit Song. 1 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 2 3 158 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song with played back. For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. icon to be Press the [C] “SET.” button to call up the TEMPO Page. Change the Tempo in the TEMPO Page. Press the [A] button to select “TEMPO,” then press the same button successively or use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo, while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo. Repeat Playback This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all Songs on a folder or only one specific Song. 2 3 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song you wish to repeatedly play back. If you wish to play back all Songs on a folder, select the first Song that will be played back. For details on selecting a Song or folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Press the [C] “SET.” button, then press the Page buttons to select the TEMPO Page. Select the repeat mode. Press the [B] button to select “REPEAT,” then press the same button successively or use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 1 OFF 2 SINGLE 3 ALL 4 RANDOM 1 Off Cancels repeat playback. 2 Single Repeats the currently selected Song indefinitely. 3 All Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder in order. 4 Random Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder randomly. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 159 4 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to begin playback. To cancel the repeat setting, select “OFF” for the repeat mode. Playing Back XG Songs Reference Page Converting to XG format (page 166) The Electone allows you to playback XG Song data, created on the computer or converted from Electone Song format to XG format. Naturally, you can use the fast forward, rewind and pause controls, just as with Songs (performances) recorded on the Electone. 1 2 Reference Page Playback Settings (page 136) 3 Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the XG song data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired Song for playback. For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Press the [C] “SET.” Button, then press the Page buttons to select the PART Page. You can set the volume or mute settings for each part. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 2 3 1 Part Select the desired channel “CH1” through “CH16” or “ALL” to specify the part to mute/ play or to change the volume. Press the [A] button to select “XG PART CH,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. 2 Playback/Off Sets the selected part for playback or mute (off). Select “PLAY” for the part you want to play back and select “OFF” for the part you want to mute. Press the [B] button to select “XG,” then press the same button successively to select the setting. 3 Volume You can adjust the volume for the selected part within a range of 0 – 100. Press the [C] button to select “XG VOLUME,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. When the selected Song contains an XG part, you can adjust the XG part on/off setting and volume from Page 3, in the same way as you did with the XG Songs. 160 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 10 Other Operations — Copy, Delete, etc. The TOOLS Pages in the MDR display has many functions, such as Song copy, Song delete, confirming the Song size, etc., as well as creating or deleting folders. Copy This function lets you copy a folder/Song, or even a USB flash drive. You can copy and exchange the data even between two different USB flash drives. (For Songs created on EL-series instruments, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination drive in advance. If memory space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 Songs, Copy is not available. 1 2 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. If you want to copy a Song between two different drives, you will need to insert the destination USB flash drive. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) Press the [MDR] button, then select the folder/Song/USB flash drive to be copied. For details on selecting folder/Song/USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS1 Page. 4 Press the [A] “COPY” button to call up the COPY TO Display. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 6 Copy Destination ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 161 5 Reference Page About Protected Songs (page 163) NOTE • If the USB flash drive copy operation is executed, the folder name “#MEDIA” will be created in the destination folder. About Copying Protected Songs Protected Original Songs or Protected Edit Songs can be copied as long as you select the same folder that contains the source Protected Song as the destination. If you select another folder/drive, the message “Song xx will be moved.” will be displayed. If you select “OK,” the currently selected Protected Original Song and Protected Edit Song created from a Protected Original Song are all moved to another folder/drive you have specified. In this case, the data is not copied, but moved. 6 • If a “Path name is too long” message is displayed, change the hierarchy or rename the folder name to make it shorter. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) • The copy operation will automatically be stopped if an unrecognizable file is detected in the folder. NOTICE Never attempt to remove the USB flash drive or turn the power off during copying (or moving a Protected Song). Data may be lost. As necessary, select the destination (highlighted). Select folder or USB flash drive as the copy destination. You can even select the destination from another USB flash drive. For details on selecting folder/ USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. If you want to copy the Song/folder to the same place which contains the source Song/folder, press the [A] “ ” button when the COPY TO display appears to make the folder/drive which contains source Songs/folders as the destination. 7 Press the [C] “EXE.” button to execute the copy. When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the SONG Page. The folder/Song name in the destination is the same as the one of the source Song/folder. If you copy a folder/ Song to a folder that contains a Song whose name is the same as the source Song, the copied name will be “source Song name_XXX” (XXX indicates Song number). If you copy an XG-compatible Song to another folder or USB flash drive that contains a Song with the same name as the source Song, a message appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the Song. Selecting “OVERWRITE” overwrites the XG-compatible Song in the destination. Selecting “CANCEL” cancel the operation. If you want to change the folder/Song name, see page 144. When copying the folder or USB flash drive, the approximate time of copying appears on the display; keep in mind that the actual time necessary may differ. Proceed by following the message in the display. Press the [D] button to cancel, or [C] button to execute the operation. If you want to cancel the copy operation while the copy operation is in progress, press the [D] “INTERRUPT” button. Keep in mind, however, that cancelling the operation may take a long time, since the operation is stopped only after all files in the current folder are copied. If you cancel the operation, make sure to check which files have been properly copied and which have not. 162 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual About Protected Songs If you buy or download Song data, it may be protected from being deleted (to prevent accidental erasure) or from being copied (to protect copyright ownership). These are called “Protected Songs.” A Protected Song can be played back in the same way as Songs you’ve created, but it cannot be converted to XG format. Registration data in the Protected Song cannot be edited, nor can the performance data be overwritten. If you want to edit a Protected Song, first copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copied Song (called “Protected Edit Song”) is available only when the original Song (called “Protected Original Song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the Protected Original song. Folder Protected Original Song Protected Edit Song Copy This Song cannot be edited This Song can be edited, but only when it is in the folder that contains a Protected Original Song. NOTICE If you move or copy the protected Song data on the computer without the Musicsoft Downloader application, the Song cannot be played back. Always use Musicsoft Downloader when moving or copying protected Songs on the computer. Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address: http://download.yamaha.com/ 6 NOTICE Music Data Recorder (MDR) When you want to edit a protected Song, turn the power to the instrument off and back on again, then select the Song to be edited. (The Registration data of the previous protected Song will be initialized.) Otherwise the edited protected Song may not be saved. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 163 NOTICE If the folder you are deleting contains audio files, deleting the folder deletes all the audio files as well as Songs in the folder. Use of separate USB flash drives — one for Songs, one for audio files — is highly recommended for data protection. However, at very least, you should use separate folders. Song Delete/Folder Delete These operations let you delete Songs and folders. (Only Songs created with the ELseries, such as the EL-900, cannot be deleted.) Before proceeding, make sure to confirm from the AUDIO display that no audio files exist in the folder you are deleting, since the MDR display will not show any audio files, even when the folder contains audio files. 1 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) 2 3 Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song/folder you want to delete. For details on selecting a Song/folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS1 Page. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 5 164 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Press the [B] “DELETE” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. Press the appropriate [A] – [D] button corresponding to the specific data you want to delete: “DELETE” or “PERF. ONLY.” Selecting “DELETE” deletes the entire Song, and selecting “PERF. ONLY” deletes only performance data in the Song. When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the SONG Page. Creating folders 2 Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, then select the media/folder within which you want to create the new folder. For details on selecting a Song/folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. 3 Press the [B] button to open the media/folder. 4 Call up the TOOLS1 Page with the Page buttons. 5 6 Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) 6 Press the [D] “CREATE FOLDER” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 Press the [C] “OK” button. The newly created folder is automatically named “FOLDER_001,” or similar. Up to 120 folders can be created. For instructions on changing the folder name, see page 144. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 165 Converting to XG format This function allows you to convert ELB-02 Song data to XG format data. You can play back the data using XG devices. The converted XG Song data may not sound the same as the original data. Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available. Protected Songs cannot be converted to XG format. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) 1 2 3 Connect the USB flash drive containing the Song you want to convert to XG format to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song to be converted to XG format. Select the desired Song (having the icon at left of its name). For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Call up the TOOLS1 Page with the Page buttons. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 5 166 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Press the [C] “CONVERT” button. A display for selecting conversion type appears. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. Press the [C] “CNV. XG” button. 7 8 After the CONVERT TO display is called up for selecting the convert destination, select the destination of the converted data. Select the USB flash drive or folder as the destination. See steps 2 and 3 on page 135 for instructions on selecting the destination. NOTE Press the [C] “EXE.” button to start conversion. A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted data, and the converted Song is played back. The song converted to XG format is automatically named such as “XGSONG001.” For instructions on changing the Song name, see page 144. For details on XG Songs, refer to “Playing Back XG Songs” on page 160. Do not play the keyboard or press any of the panel controls during the confirmation of the conversion, since these actions will be recorded to the converted XGcompatible Song. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 167 Checking the Remaining Memory When a USB flash drive is selected on the TOOLS2 Page, pressing the [INFORMATION] button calls up a display indicating the remaining memory in the USB flash drive. When a Song is selected on the TOOLS2 page, pressing the [INFORMATION] button calls up a display indicating the data size, amount of Registration Banks, Song title, composer of the Song, etc. The indicated items differ depending on what is selected. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 127) 1 2 Connect the USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [MDR] button, then select a Song or USB flash drive. For details on selecting a Song or USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135. 3 Call up the TOOLS2 Page with the Page buttons. 4 Press the [C] “INFORMATION” button to call up the information. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) When a USB flash drive is selected: REMAIN: Remaining memory in the USB flash drive ID: Displays “Found” or “Missing” to indicate if the USB flash drive can handle the Protected Song for ELB series or ELS series or not. “Found” indicates the USB flash drive can handle the data, while “Missing” indicates that it cannot. When a Song is selected: SIZE: Song data size BANK: Amount of Registration Banks 168 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 7 Audio The convenient [AUDIO] button allows you to play back audio files (.WAV) saved to a USB flash drive. Moreover, since you can record your performances and recordings as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive, it is possible to play back the files on computer, share them with your friends, and record your own CDs to enjoy as well. Audio file Audio file USB flash drive Audio file Computer External audio device Compatible USB flash drives Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/ Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to data, follow the notices below. • Yamaha recommends that you format a USB flash drive (page 133), after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any important data, and to use it only for audio recording/playback. Using MDR Songs and audio data together in the same drive may cause severe fragmentation of the USB flash drive, and may stop audio recording/playback altogether. • Insert the USB flash drive firmly and take care that the USB flash drive does not loosen from the connection from sudden shaking while performing, etc. during audio recording/playback. If the USB flash drive is disconnected while recording, it may result in data corruption in the USB flash drive. 1 Recording Your Performance as Audio NOTE Audio Recording With this method, recorded performances are saved to a USB flash drive as an audio file. An Audio file is a recording of the performed sound itself. Since it is saved in stereo WAV format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and played on portable music players by using a computer. You can also record the sound of an external device since all the sounds produced via your keyboard performance and the sound input from the [AUX IN] jack will be recorded. Keep in mind, however, that Audio recording cannot be used to save Registrations. If you want to save Registrations, perform the “Recording” operation described on page 138 in chapter 6. When recording audio that is input from the [AUX IN] jack to the USB flash drive, the output volume of the external audio device connected to this instrument cannot be controlled by the Electone. Adjust the volume level from the control on the external audio device. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 169 Try recording your performance as an audio file to a USB flash drive. Maximum amount of recording time is 60 minutes per recording, though this may be less depending on the capacity of the particular USB flash drive. NOTE The file extension does not appear in the Electone display. However, it can be viewed on a computer. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 169) NOTE Songs you've created on the Electone will not be shown in the AUDIO Display even when the USB flash drive contains Songs. NOTE The “new audio” file is a blank audio file automatically created in the USB flash drive/folder, if the number of the audio files in the USB flash drive/folder is less than 120. 7 File format that can be recorded .wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo 1 2 3 Audio ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Press the [AUDIO] button located at the top right on the panel to call up the AUDIO display. AUDIO Display 4 170 Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Select the blank audio file “new audio” for recording your performance. To find “new audio,” press the [B] “ ” button in the display of step 2 to open the USB flash drive, then select “new audio” by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer to steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Press the [C] “REC.” button to engage the Record Standby status. 5 Start recording by pressing the [C] “RECORD” button, and then start your performance. When recording begins, the elapsed recording time is shown in the lower left of the AUDIO RECORD display. Once the elapsed recording time is shown, you can load the Registration or play the Song with the MDR. NOTICE Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during recording. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data or the recording data. Elapsed recording time 6 7 When you finish playing, press the [D] “FINISH” button. Recording stops and the audio file to which your performance is recorded is automatically named and selected in the AUDIO display. To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [C] “PLAY” button twice. Reference Page Deleting files/Renaming files (page 176) AUDIO PLAY Display [PLAY Page] Audio 7 Recording the Song playback as audio file Once you've recorded your performance as a Song using MDR function, you can record the playback of the Song as an audio file. 1 2 3 4 Connect two compatible USB flash drives, one containing the Song, and another for recording audio files, to the USB TO DEVICE terminals. Start audio recording (perform steps 2 – 5 above.) Select the Song on the MDR Display, then start playback of the Song. Playback the Song to the end of the Song. Stop the audio recording (perform steps 6 and 7 above). ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 171 2 Playing Back Audio Files NOTE This instrument cannot play back DRM protected files. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 169) NOTE Songs you've recorded using the MDR function on this Electone and Protected Songs will not be shown in the AUDIO Display, even when the USB flash drive contains Songs. NOTE The “new audio” file is a blank audio file automatically created in the USB flash drive/folder, if the number of the audio files in the USB flash drive/folder is less than 120. 7 Audio 172 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Try playing back audio files from a USB flash drive connected to this instrument. File format that can be played back .wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo 1 2 Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the audio file to be played back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [AUDIO] button located at the top right on the panel to call up the AUDIO display. AUDIO Display 3 Select the desired audio file for playback. To simply play an existing audio file, select the desired audio file (containing data), referring to the audio file name and icon “ .” Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer to steps 2 and 3 on page 135. 4 Press the [C] “PLAY” button to call up the PLAY Page of the AUDIO PLAY display. Select the PLAY Page with the page buttons if another page is shown. AUDIO PLAY Display [PLAY Page] 5 6 NOTE AUDIO PLAY display consists of two different pages: “PLAY” or “SET.” (Setting). Use the Page buttons to select the appropriate page. Press the [C] “PLAY” button to start playback. When playback begins, the elapsed time is shown in the lower left of the display. Press the [D] “FINISH” button to stop playback. The display returns to the AUDIO display. NOTICE Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during playback. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data. Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause Audio 7 Rewind and Fast Forward: During audio playback (or when paused), press the [A] “REW” (Rewind) button or [B] “FF” (Fast forward) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To resume playback from the point you’ve reversed or advanced to, press the [C] “PLAY” button. Pause: If you want to temporarily stop playback of the audio file press the [C] “PAUSE” button. To resume playback from the point at which the audio file was paused, press the [C] “PLAY” button again. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 173 Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch You can change the volume, tempo and pitch of the audio file as the file is playing. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 169) 1 2 3 4 Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [AUDIO] button. Select the desired audio file for playback. Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer to steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Press the [C] “PLAY” button to call up the AUDIO PLAY display. Select the PLAY Page with the page buttons if another page is shown. AUDIO PLAY Display [PLAY Page] 7 Audio 5 Press the Page buttons to select the “SET.” (Setting) Page. 1 2 3 In this Page, you can make other audio playback settings. 174 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 1 To adjust the Volume: Press the [A] button to select “VOLUME,” then adjust the value by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [A] button. Range: 0 – 127 2 To Change the Tempo: NOTE Press the [B] button to select “TEMPO,” then adjust the value by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [B] button. The value can be adjusted from 75% to 125% and the default value is 100%. Higher values result in a faster tempo. If you select another audio file, this setting will be restored to the default value. Changing the playback tempo or pitch of an audio file may change its tonal characteristics. 3 To Change the Pitch: Press the [C] button to select “PITCH,” then adjust the value by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button. This let you shift the pitch of an audio file in semitone steps (from -12 to 12). If you select another audio file, this setting will be restored to the default value (0). 7 After setting, go back to the PLAY Page with the Page buttons, and then play the audio file to hear and check the changes you’ve made in the SET. Page. If you are satisfied with the sound, press the [D] “FINISH” button. Audio playback is stopped (if the file is being played back) and the display returns to the AUDIO display. 7 Audio 6 NOTE Volume, tempo and pitch changes are temporary; these values revert to their defaults when the power is turned off and then back on again. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 175 Deleting the File / Changing the File Name You can delete the file or change the file name. Reference Page Compatible USB flash drives (page 169) 1 2 3 4 Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the audio files to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [AUDIO] button. Select the desired audio file. Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer to steps 2 and 3 on page 135. Press the [D] “TOOL” button to call up the AUDIO TOOLS Page. In this Page, you can delete or rename the audio file. AUDIO TOOLS Display 1 2 7 1 To delete the file: Audio Press the [B] “DELETE” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. If you want to delete the file, press the [C] “DELETE” button. The audio file will be deleted and the display returns to the AUDIO display. Reference Page Changing the Song/Folder Name (page 144) 2 To rename the file: Press the [C] “CHANGE NAME” button to call up the rename display. For details on how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the characters, press the [D] “FINISH” button to call up a message prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. To finalize the name, press the [C] “CHANGE” button. The audio file will be renamed and the display returns to the AUDIO display. To exit from the AUDIO TOOLS Page, press the [D] “FINISH” button. 176 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 8 Footswitches These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch the effects on/off, without needing to take your hands from the keyboard. The Electone has two Footswitches on the expression pedal. Left Footswitch Right Footswitch Expression Pedal 1 Right Footswitch The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. For details on the Registration Shift function and Right Footswitch, see “Registration Shift” on page 121. 2 Left Footswitch The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of three functions: Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary Speaker. Instructions for setting the Left Footswitch (in the FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) Page) are given here. 1 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button. NOTE Pressing the [FOOT SWITCH] button calls up one of two different displays: REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) or FOOT SWITCH (LEFT). Use the Page buttons to select the appropriate display. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 177 2 Call up the FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) display. Use the page buttons to select page 3. FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) Display 1 OFF 2 RHYTHM 3 GLIDE 4 ROTARY SPEAKER Reference Page Rhythm Structure (page 70) In this page, you can assign which function the Left Footswitch will control: Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary Speaker. Each press of the [A] button selects the functions in sequence: Off Rhythm Glide Rotary Speaker. When Off is selected here, the Left Footswitch is inactive. 1 Off Control with the Left Footswitch is disabled. 2 Rhythm When this is selected, one of the control settings appears below. Press the [B] button as necessary to select the desired control setting. 2 -1 STOP 2 -2 BREAK 2 -3 MAIN A – MAIN D 8 2 -4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3 Footswitches 2 -5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3 2 -6 OFF 2 - 1 Stop Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Left Footswitch. 2 - 2 Break This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. When you press the Left Footswitch, the Break section is played. 178 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 2 - 3 Main A – Main D These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel. For example, when “MAIN A” is selected in this display and you press the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A. 2 - 4 Intro 1 – Intro 3 These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when “INTRO1” is selected in this display and you press the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1. 2 - 5 Ending 1 – Ending 3 These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when “ENDING1” is selected in this display and you press the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops. 2 - 6 Off Control with the Left Footswitch is disabled. 3 Glide This lets you control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. Pressing the Left Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. When the Glide setting is chosen, two separate Glide pages are available, with the current page number shown at the top right side of the display. You can select the pages by using the Page buttons. FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) Display [Glide Page 3] 3-1 3-2 8 Footswitches [Glide Page 4] 3 - 1 Time Determines the speed of the Glide function, or how gradually the pitch returns to normal when the Left Footswitch is released. Higher settings produce slower pitch changes. Range: 1 – 5 3 - 2 Lead 1/2, Upper1/2, Lower 1/2 Turn on the desired Voice section(s) for which the Glide function is to be applied by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] buttons. Each press of the corresponding button toggles between on and off. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 179 Reference Page Rotary Speaker (page 60) 8 Footswitches 180 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 4 Rotary Speaker You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch. When the “ROTARY SPEAKER” is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to the “Speed Control” in the Rotary Speaker display. To use this function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section. For details, see page 60. 9 Transpose and Pitch Controls There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. 1 2 Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. Select Page 2 of the Utility display by pressing the Page buttons. 1 2 In this page, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings. Press the [A] button to change the Transpose setting, or press [B] button to change the Pitch setting. NOTE 1 Transpose Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half steps (semitones). Range: -6 – +6 2 Pitch Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch setting is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3). Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice Condition display. (See page 58 for details.) These are overall pitch controls; the actual pitch of a Voice section will be affected accordingly and may differ if that Voice section’s pitch has been changed. For example, if the Transpose value is set to “+1” here and the Transpose value for Upper Keyboard Voice 1 is set to “+1” in the Voice Condition display, the overall pitch of the instrument becomes “+1,” but the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 pitch setting becomes “+2.” NOTE The Transpose setting here does not affect XG Songs (page 160). ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 181 10 Connections On the underside and right side of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are described below. 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone. For details on connecting to external devices, see page 184. 1 Reference Page Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in speakers of the Electone (page 184) Reference Page Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System (page 184) Reference Page Using Headphones (page 19) 182 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 2 3 1 [AUX IN] (stereo mini) jack For connection to an external device. The signal from the connected external device sounds from the Electone’s built-in speakers. 2 AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] (standard phone) jacks This pair of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker system. The output level can be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME dial. 3 [PHONES] jack For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing you to play without disturbing others. 4 4 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal For connecting a USB flash drive. You can save data you’ve created on the instrument to the USB flash drive. You can also use this to connect a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately) for connecting the instrument to an iPhone/iPad via wireless LAN. 5 6 Reference Page • Connecting a USB Device (page 132) • Connecting to an iPhone/ iPad (page 192) 7 Front (keyboard side) 5 MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface. 6 [USB TO HOST] terminal For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer. Reference Page • Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone (page 185) • Controlling the Electone from an External Device (page 185) • What is MIDI (page 187) • Connection with Computer (page 186) 7 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal Same as “4 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.” Connections 10 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 183 CAUTION Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. NOTICE To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Connection Examples — External 2 Devices Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can connect your Electone to external speakers. If you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack (standard phone). NOTICE Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the [AUX IN] jack. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jack is output from the AUX OUT jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage both pieces of equipment. AUX OUT [L/L+R] Speaker (Left) [R] Speaker (Right) By connecting the Electone to an external audio device instead of speakers, you can record your Electone performance to that device. NOTE Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in speakers of the Electone NOTICE To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the instrument. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument, then to the external device. 10 By connecting a cable from the external audio device to the [AUX IN] jack, you can play back the sound of the external device via the speakers of the Electone. External audio device NOTE Connections Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. [AUX IN] Stereo mini plug Stereo mini plug Playback sound 184 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit channels on your Electone.) The Electone transmits a variety of performance messages along with note information as digital data, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device. NOTE When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be transmitted. Tone generator MIDI [OUT] MIDI IN MIDI cable MIDI messages MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is used. MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected. Controlling the Electone from an External Device You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your Electone.) NOTE When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be transmitted. MIDI keyboard or synthesizer MIDI [IN] MIDI OUT 10 Connections MIDI cable MIDI messages MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is used. MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 185 3 Connection with Computer NOTE When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be transferred to/from the computer. By using the [USB TO HOST] terminal or MIDI terminals, you can connect the Electone and computer enabling the MIDI communication between both. Install the USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then make the MIDI connection between the Electone and computer. Regarding the USB-MIDI driver, you can download the latest version from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/ Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for example, by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your Electone. Using the [USB TO HOST] terminal Using the Electone’s [USB TO HOST] terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the Electone and the computer. Computer [USB TO HOST] USB cable MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is used. MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected. Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. NOTICE • Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. • Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, disable any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/ unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. 10 Connections - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. 186 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 4 MIDI This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your Electone. What is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production Internal amp L Tone generator Internal amp (Electric circuit) R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Example of Keyboard Information 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) & Note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) 10 Connections Voice number (with what Voice) As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice selection are handled as MIDI events. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 187 MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. MIDI Messages of the Electone MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several MIDI devices to communicate with each other. Channel Messages Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating which keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard. Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60. Note Off: Generated when a key is released. Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127. NOTE Yamaha website address is on page 9 in this Owner’s Manual. For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document, downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9). Program Change Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone. For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document, downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9). Control Change Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through specific Control Change numbers. For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the Electone, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document, downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9). 10 System Messages Connections System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration data. 188 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual MIDI Channels MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather Report 2 NEWS 1 NEWS 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard, channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 191 for more information. Connections 10 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 189 5 MIDI Control When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or how the Electone is controlled. To select the MIDI page: 1 2 Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. The MIDI Pages are found on Pages 4 – 5. Use the PAGE buttons to select Pages 4 – 5. Internal/External Display 1 2 3 Internal/External Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (Internal) or the connected device (External). 1 Lead1 Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voice 1. Successive presses of the [A] button alternates between Internal and External. Internal: Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper Keyboard of the Electone. (If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower Keyboard.) External: Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI channel 4. 2 Synchro Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization purposes. Successive presses of the [B] button alternates between Internal and External. 10 Connections Internal: Pressing the Rhythm [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button on the panel enables control of and synchronization to any connected devices (e.g., sequencer, etc.). External: Starting the rhythm of a connected rhythm machine also starts the rhythm of the Electone. 190 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 3 Expression Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this control is set to Auto. Successive presses of the [C] button alternate among Auto, Internal and External. Auto: Internal and External is automatically switched. Internal: You can manually control the expression pedal even during MDR. playback. External: While playing the MDR or receiving MIDI messages, the expression pedal has no effect. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a USB flash drive or received MIDI data.) MIDI Out Channel Display 1 2 3 4 For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper Keyboard, the Lower Keyboard and the Pedalboard. The MIDI messages on each keyboard will be sent over the channels set here. You must set the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device. 1 Upper Keyboard You can select the channel for the Upper Keyboard. Press the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. 2 Lower Keyboard You can select the channel for the Lower Keyboard. Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. 3 Pedalboard You can select the channel for the Pedalboard. Press the [C] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. 4 Rhythm Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the Electone. Rhythm start/stop messages can be filtered on the Electone. Successive presses of the [D] button alternate between being transmitted (FILTER OFF) and not transmitted (FILTER ON). Connections 10 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 191 6 Connecting to an iPhone/iPad NOTE Yamaha website address is on page 9 in this Owner’s Manual. You can connect a smart device such as an iPhone or iPad to the instrument. By using an application tool on your smart device, you can take advantage of convenient functions and get more enjoyment out of this instrument. For details on connections, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website (page 9). For information about compatible smart devices and application tools, access the following page: http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/ NOTE MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected. Reference Page Wireless LAN settings • Initialize the settings in the wireless LAN settings (page 200) Start wireless connection according to the instructions in the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website, then make sure to make appropriate setups from the following instructions: “Display the Networks and connecting to the access point,” “Automatic Setup by WPS,” “Manual Setup” or “Connecting by the Adhoc Mode.” Refer to pages 192 – 196 in this Owner’s Manual, then set up as required. If there is no access point, follow the instructions in “Connecting by the Adhoc Mode” (page 196). NOTICE NOTICE Connections Do not place your iPhone/ iPad in an unstable position. Doing so may cause the device to fall and result in damage. NOTE Before using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, be sure to read “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 132. 192 The USB wireless LAN adaptor lets you connect the Electone to an iPhone/iPad wirelessly. For details about the USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately), contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the distributor listed at the end (or beginning) of this manual. Or you can access the following website and contact Yamaha support at your location. http://www.yamaha.com/contact/ To connect the Electone to an iPhone/iPad wirelessly, follow the instructions in the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website, and also refer back to the Owner’s Manual (this book) for the specific Wireless LAN settings (below) which you’ll need to make for wireless connection. • Wireless LAN Detailed Settings (page 198) When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication. 10 Connection with a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately): ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Automatic Setup by WPS 1 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE,” if necessary. Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197. 2 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless LAN display. Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6. WIRELESS LAN Display 3 4 Press the [B] “WPS” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. Press the [C] “OK” button to start WPS setup, then press the WPS button on your access point within two minutes. Appears when connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully. After connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.” 10 Connections 5 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 193 Displaying available networks in the wireless LAN and connecting to a network 1 2 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE.” Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197. Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless LAN display. Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6. WIRELESS LAN Display Network list 3 4 Press the [A] “UPDATE” button to call up the network list. For a network with a lock icon ( ), you need to enter the proper password. Connect the instrument to the desired network. 4-1 4-2 Select the desired network by using the DATA CONTROL dial, then press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button. The name of the selected network will be fully shown in the display, letting you confirm this is the network you want to use. Press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button. • For a network without a lock icon: Connecting starts. • For a network with a lock icon ( ): You need to enter the proper password. For details on how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the password, press the [D] button to finalize the setting. This operation starts connecting automatically. 10 Connections Appears when connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully. 194 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 5 After connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.” Manual Setup 1 2 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE.” Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197. Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless LAN display. Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6. WIRELESS LAN Display Network list Select “OTHER” at the bottom of the network list by using the DATA CONTROL dial, then press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button. The OTHER display will be shown. The OTHER display consists of two different pages that can be switched by using the Page buttons. 10 1 2 3 Connections 3 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 195 4 Set the SSID, Security and Password to the same as the settings on the access point. 1 SSID Press the [A] button on page 1 to call up the display for SSID input, then enter the SSID. For details on how to enter the characters, refer to “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. Up to 32 characters (half size), alphanumeric characters, marks can be entered. After entering the SSID, press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting. 2 Security Press the [A] button on page 2 to call up the Security list, then select the desired setting by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Press the [C] “CHANGE” button to finalize the setting. NOTE 3 Password The password cannot be set when you select “NONE” for the security setting. Press the [B] button on page 2 to call up the display for Password input, then set the password in the same way as SSID. Press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting. 5 Press the [C] “CNCT.” button to start connection. Appears when connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully. 6 After connection between the instrument and the access point is done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.” Connecting by the Adhoc Mode 1 Reference Page Wireless LAN Detailed Settings (page 198) 10 Connections 196 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 2 Set the Wireless LAN mode to “ADHOC.” Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197. The settings for the instrument are complete if you do not need to change the SSID and so on. Connect the iPhone/iPad to the instrument by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.” You can change the SSID, Security, etc. from the ADHOC display pages. Wireless LAN Mode 1 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless LAN option display. Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 7. The currently selected Mode name is shown. Mode Set the Wireless LAN mode. You can set between two modes: INFRASTRUCTURE and ADHOC. Press the [B] “MODE CHANGE” button to call up a message prompting confirmation of the operation, then press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation. 10 Connections 2 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 197 Wireless LAN Detailed Settings Reference Page Wireless LAN Mode (page 197) You can set the detailed settings for each mode: INFRASTRUCTURE and ADHOC. No need to change or set the settings if you’ve done the connection between iPhone/ iPad and instrument. 1 Set the Wireless LAN mode, then call up the display for detailed settings by pressing the [D] button in the Wireless LAN settings display (Page 6) or the Wireless LAN option display (Page 7) Wireless LAN settings display (Page 6) INFRASTRUCTURE mode ADHOC mode INFRASTRUCTURE mode/ ADHOC mode DETAIL display Page 1 ADHOC display Page 1 DETAIL display DETAIL display Page 2 ADHOC display Page 2 10 ADHOC display Page 3 Connections 198 Wireless LAN option display (Page 7) ELB-02 Owner’s Manual As necessary, set the detailed settings. Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to “CHANGE” or “SHOW” in the display to call up the display for Setting/Input. Wireless LAN mode INFRASTRUCTURE mode Display DETAIL display Page 1 DETAIL display Page 2 ADHOC mode ADHOC display Page 1 Item Default setting Setting/Input ON Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP, select “ON (set DNS automatically)” here. Select on or off by using the DATA CONTROL dial then press the [C] “CHANGE” button. IP Address 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0.0 DNS Server 1 0.0.0.0 DNS Server 2 0.0.0.0 Set the wireless LAN detailed settings. IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS Server1, DNS Server2 can be set when DHCP is set to Off but cannot be set when DHCP set to On. For details on confirmation and changes in the setting of the access point on the router side, refer to the owner’s manual for the product you are using. For details on how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. The setting range is 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255. DHCP SSID Channel 11 ADHOC display Page 2 Security – Password – ADHOC display Page 3 DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask INFRASTRUCTURE mode / ADHOC mode DETAIL display HOST NAME MAC address STATUS 3 ap-ELB-02-(last 6 characters of MAC address in lowercase); or simply “ap-ELB-02,” if MAC address cannot be used. To find the specific MAC address, see “MAC address” below. • SSID, Security and Password can be set in the same way as those described in the section “Manual Setup” on page 195. The last 6 characters of the MAC address must be entered in lowercase. • Channel can be selected by the DATA CONTROL dial and set by pressing the button corresponding to “CHANGE.” • DHCP and IP Address can be set in the same way as those of “INFRASTRUCTURE mode” in this table. • Subnet Mask can be selected in the list. ON 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 ELB-02-(last 6 characters of MAC address in lowercase); or simply “ELB-02,” if MAC address cannot be used. – 00000000 To find the specific MAC address, see “MAC address” below. Set the Host name. Up to 57 characters (half size) including alphanumeric characters, the “_” (underscore) and “-” (hyphen) character. For details on how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the characters, press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting. The last 6 characters of the MAC address must be entered in lowercase. Shows the MAC address of the USB wireless LAN adaptor. You cannot change the MAC address here. Shows the error code of network function. 10 Connections 2 Save the settings. Press the [D] “EXIT” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation when there is a change in the setting. Press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation, or press the [D] button to cancel. When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the previous display. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 199 Initialize the wireless LAN settings Factory Set (page 27) does not affect the settings of the wireless LAN settings, which can be initialized by the following procedure. Be careful when executing initialize, since it erases all the wireless LAN settings and replaces them with the factory defaults. 1 2 10 Connections 200 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the UTILITY display, then select Page 7 by using the Page buttons. Initialize the wireless LAN setting. Press the [C] button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation, or the [D] button to cancel. Glossary of Terms Access point A device which acts as a base station when transmitting data by wireless LAN. Some access points are combined with modem functions. Ad Hoc mode Communication method for performing data communication with the terminal and other devices directly without using a relay device, such as an access point of a wireless LAN. DHCP A standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time the computer and the instrument connect to the Internet. DNS SERVER A server that maps names to actual IP addresses of devices connected to a network. GATEWAY A Gateway is a link between two computer programs or systems. Infrastructure mode Communication method for performing data communication with each terminal via a relay device, such as an access point of the wireless LAN. IP ADDRESS A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network that indicate the device’s location on the network. LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable. router A device that allows multiple devices (e.g., computers, your Yamaha instrument) to share the same Internet connection. Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site. SSID A name used to identify a particular access point, or the wireless networks set as the access point. The structure for dividing a large-scale network. Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cablefree connection. WPS A structure to easily make a setting of wireless LAN by pushing only the WPS buttons of an access point and the wireless LAN device. 10 Connections SUBNET MASK ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 201 11 Appendix Assembly Instructions CAUTION • Assemble the unit on a hard and flat floor with ample space. • Be careful not to confuse or misplace the parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence described here. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. 1 2 Open the package, take out the two styrofoam pads from the both sides of the package, and carefully place the main unit on top of the pads as shown. Take out all parts from the package. Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. When you take out the Speaker Unit, always hold the bottom of the Speaker Unit, not holding the Grill Net. Music Rest Dust Cover Main Unit Styrofoam pads Take out the styrofoam pads, and place the Main Unit on top of the pads. Grill Net Attached to the Speaker Unit Bundled pedal cord inside. Speaker Unit Bench Bench Board Sideboard (Left) Pedalboard Unit Assembly parts Power cord A 5 x 16 mm x4 Cord holders x 4 B Legs: 4 pcs. 202 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 5 x 12 mm x8 Screw caps x 4 Sideboard (Right) 3 Mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard unit. 4-3 Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left Sideboards. 3-1 3-2 3-3 Untie (at three points) and straighten out the bundled pedal cord. Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration below. While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker unit, fasten the four screws (B) from the rear, to secure the Speaker unit to the Sideboards. Cover the four screw holes on the rear side with the corresponding screw caps. Push the Sideboard toward the Speaker unit Push the Sideboard toward the Speaker unit Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard and Sideboards as shown in the illustration and mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using four screws (B; two screws on each Sideboard). Screw caps B B Screw caps Push the Sideboard toward the Pedalboard B 4 4-1 4-2 Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws. Make sure to place the connector of the power cord at the front side, and the plug of the power cord at the back side. Mount the Speaker Unit onto the Sideboards. Clamp the holder shut after inserting the cord. Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit. 6 With the help of another person, hold the Speaker unit horizontally, and slide it from the rear into place along the brackets. Affix the two cord holders to the top surface of the Speaker unit, then insert the Power cord in the holders as shown in the illustration. 6-1 Mount the Main Unit. As shown in the illustration, hold the Main Unit horizontally (with two people), and mount the Main Unit. Be sure to place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of the main unit when positioning it. 11 15 cm or further in CAUTION Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard. CAUTION Appendix 3-4 5 Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 203 6-2 Use the four screws (A) to fasten the Main unit to the Sideboards as shown in the illustration. 8 Plug the power cord into the AC IN jack on the bottom surface of the main Unit. A 9 Connect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker cord to the Main Unit. Remove the protective film applied to each connector of the cords. Make sure that the latches on each connector of the cords face toward you, and connect them to each socket securely until the latch is set. Once connected securely, the connector cannot be accidentally disconnected, even if you pull the connector gently downward. (If disconnected, the pedals will not function properly.) A 7 Fit the Grill Net onto the Speaker. First, align the net with the bottom line, then secure it to the speaker assembly. Speaker cord Pedalboard cord To disconnect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker cord: Press the bottom of the latch to unlatch, then disconnect. 10 Affix the two cord holders to the inside of the side board, then insert the Pedalboard cord in the holders as shown in the illustration. Clamp the holder shut after inserting the cord. Fasten the Grill Net by inserting the knobs into the holes. 11 Appendix 204 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 11 Place the music rest on the Electone. After completing the assembly, please check the following items. • Are there any parts left over? → Review all assembly procedures. • Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable fixtures? → Move the Electone to an appropriate location. • Does the Electone make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Can the Electone be turned on? → Confirm that the power cord plug is securely connected to an appropriate power outlet. • Does the Electone produce sounds? → How to produce sounds is described in “Quick Introductory Guide.” Confirm that the Speaker cord connector and the Pedalboard cord connector are securely connected to each socket on the Main unit. 12 Turn on the Electone’s [P](Standby/On) switch and confirm that the Electone can be played, and that the assembly is successful. When moving the instrument CAUTION When moving the instrument, always hold the bottom of the main unit. Do not hold the top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Do not hold here. BENCH ASSEMBLY Turn the bench board over and put the legs in place, one by one, at the corners of the bench board, then tighten each nut using the included wrench. Be sure to put the washer between each leg and nut as shown. Hold here. Leg Washer 11 Nut CAUTION If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Appendix Bench board • Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the instrument along with other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled), or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you first took it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument. 205 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution GENERAL OPERATION The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after turning the power on. This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal. A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem. Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with an application on an iPhone/iPad. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication. The sound of the Electone causes surrounding objects to resonate. Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume. The sound is too small even when the volume is set to its maximum. • The MASTER VOLUME dial may be set around The minimum position. Turn it clockwise (page 17). • The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe (page 17). • The speaker cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the speaker cord to the Main Unit (page 204). The Pedal Voices do not sound, and the expression pedal does not work. The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the pedal cord plug to the Main Unit (page 204). The “Connection interrupted; problem occurred in USB device.” message is shown and the USB device does not respond. Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of a problem. Disconnect the device from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. The Electone panel does not function normally or the content of the memorized data has changed. This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/ or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set operation to reset the Electone. VOICES/RHYTHMS 11 Appendix 206 When a key is pressed, two or more Voices sound. Perhaps the Voice of the Voice section 2 sounds as for the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard. Turn off the Voice of the Voice section 2 in the Voice display, or set the volume setting to minimum after switching to the Voice section 2 (page 36). As for the Upper Keyboard, the Lead Voice may sound in addition to the Voice of the Voice section 2. Turn off the Lead Voice in the Voice display. The pitch may sound excessively high on the Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards. This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano. Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges. Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy sounds. You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Problem Possible Cause and Solution When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes sound. Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards) is 10 notes. Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played. For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the volume is properly set. • The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off the mode in the display (page 82). • TO LOWER button in the Pedal Voice section is turned on. Turn the function off (page 38). When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments are also heard. The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the function, be sure to turn it off (page 88). Even though a User button’s rhythm has been selected and started, the pattern does not sound. Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern has not been saved to the selected User button. EFFECTS The Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato function do not operate. • Adjust the Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato settings in the Voice Condition display (page 55). • Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato are not applied to the Pedal Voices on the Pedalboard. The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice sections, even when the REVERB button setting on the panel is increased. Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in the Voice Condition Display (page 54). The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even when the “Speed Control” in the Rotary Speaker display is on. Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display (page 57). ACCOMPANIMENT The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change, even when pressing different keys of the keyboard. Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch. While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound, even when the keys are played. Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro/Ending pattern. The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the rhythm has been started. • The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 81). The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function cannot be heard. The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices. • All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on (page 79). REGISTRATION MEMORY Certain functions have not been memorized to Registration Memory. Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 112. MUSIC DATA RECORDER 11 Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website: http://download.yamaha.com/ Appendix The instrument does not recognize the connected USB flash drive. ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 207 Problem Recording or playback cannot be performed. Possible Cause and Solution • The part may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY in the PART 1 and PART 2 Pages. • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. • The USB flash drive is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect. Recording is stopped before the performance is finished. • The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit. Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs. • When you overwrite the Song, the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the previously recorded Song, then record again (page 164). • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. An error message appears while entering a folder name or song name. • The Song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 characters. • The Song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 146. • The path name is too long. Reduce the layer or shorten the Song/folder name to shorten the path (page 144). The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a recording, or stops in the middle of the performance. The MDR is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time indicator appears in the display (page 138). The USB flash drive cannot be formatted when you want to format an unformatted drive. Recognizing an unformatted drive takes a few seconds after it is inserted. Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again. An error message is shown when you edit the Protected Edit Song. Registrations from another Protected Song have been called up on the Electone. Initialize the Registration (page 120) then select the Song you want to edit. The Song you've edited becones a Protected Song. Registrations from Protected Song has been called up on the Electone. Initialize the Registration (page 120) then start the operations you want such as Registration edit/saving or Song recording. Audio Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The USB flash drive is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect. A “Data could not be saved” message is shown and the recording is stopped. The message will be shown when using the USB flash drive to which frequently recording/deleting operations have been applied. Format the USB flash drive (page 133), after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any important data, then try to use again. 11 Appendix 208 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual • The file format may not be compatible with the instrument. The only compatible format is WAV. Specifications DIGITAL ORGAN PRODUCT NAME AWM TONE GENERATION Upper: 49 keys (C – C), Lower: 49 keys (C – C), Pedal: 20 keys (C – G) KEYBOARD BASIC (FSB) Initial Touch Upper, Lower After Touch Upper, Lower 601 Registration Menu Registration Memory Shift, Jump, User (1 Unit: 400 steps), Next Unit Registration Shift VOICE Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2 Voice Sections Voice Buttons Upper/Lower VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1), SOLO (Lead 2) Pedal CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER 540 Rotary Speaker Control RHYTHMS Types Hall 1 – 3, M, L, XG Hall 1 – 2, Room 1 – 4, S, M, L, XG Room 1 – 3, Stage 1 – 2, XG Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2, XG Plate, GM Plate, White Room, Atmosphere Hall, Acoustic Room, Drums Room, Percussion Room, Tunnel, Canyon, Basement Depth Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2, Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion, Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion Voice Section Effects Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan, Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Distortion+, Amp Simulator, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Pitch Change, Miscellaneous, Thru Rhythm Buttons MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD, ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2 Preset Rhythm Patterns Parts Sections ACCOMPANIMENT 2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2 Sustain Reverb STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN, PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2 Lead Preset Voices EFFECT/ CONDITION 1 Unit 16 x 5 MEMORY, 1 – 16, DISABLE Accompaniment Parts 368 (including the metronome) Main Drum, Add Drum INTRO 1 – 3, ENDING 1 – 3, MAIN/FILL IN A – D, BREAK, Auto Fill 11 Chord 1 – 2, Pad, Phrase 1 – 2 Auto Bass Chord OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C. Memory: Lower, Pedal Melody On Chord Yes ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Appendix REGISTRATIONS Keyboard Type 209 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION 1 Unit Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 40 Settings Wonderland Kit, EL Kit, Standard Kit 1, Standard Kit 2, Hit Kit, Room Kit, Rock Kit, Electro Kit, Analog Kit, Dance Kit, Jazz Kit, Brush Kit, Symphony Kit, Live! Studio Kit, House Kit, SFX Kit 1, SFX Kit 2, Noise Kit, Pop Latin Kit, Arabic Kit, China Kit, Orchestra Percussion Kits Yes Assign CONTROLS Footswitch Left Right -6 – +6 Transpose A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz, Default value: A = 440 Hz Pitch MIDI Control Yes MASTER VOLUME Yes MDR Song Select: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Record, Custom Play, Setting (Tempo/Part), Unit Edit Tools: Create Folder, Change Song Name, Copy, Delete, Conversion (XG format), Format, Information Audio Recording/Playback Play: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Volume, Tempo, Pitch Record: Stop, Record Tools: Change Name, Delete File Format: .wav (44.1kHz,16bit, stereo) Utility Language (English/Japanese), Disable Mode (Normal/Tempo), LCD Contrast, Initialize Display Select VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, AUDIO Full Dot LCD (128 x 64 dots), Monochrome Display Sound System Power Amplifiers (20W + 10W) x 2 Speakers (16cm + 5cm) x 2 USB flash drive Storage PHONES AUX OUT (VARIABLE, Standard phone): L/L+R, R AUX IN (stereo mini phone) MIDI IN/OUT USB TO HOST USB TO DEVICE x 2 Connectors Dimensions (Width x Depth x Height), Weight Bench Supplied Accessories 11 1113mm x 493mm x 924mm (Depth and Height with music rest: 509mm x 1103mm), 50 kg 596mm x 296mm x 580mm, 6.2 kg Owner’s Manual (this book), Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook, Online Member Product Registration, Music Rest, Dust Cover, Power Cord, Bench * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendix 210 Registration Shift Yes Expression Pedal OTHERS Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3 Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Glide Time Rotary Speaker ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Index Numerics [DISABLE] button ............................... 114 J 1 – 16 (Registration Memory) .............111 Disable mode ..................................... 114 Jacks and Controls ............................ 182 9 – 16 (Registration Memory) .............112 display .................................................. 25 Jump .................................................. 123 Display Language ................................ 27 A [A] – [D] button .....................................25 A.B.C. (Auto Bass Chord) ....................82 Accompaniment ............................68, 79 Add Drum .............................................80 Adhoc Mode .......................................196 AEM ......................................................42 Display Page ........................................ 26 Display Select ...................................... 15 DISTORTION ................................. 57, 65 DISTORTION+ .............................. 57, 65 DYNAMIC ...................................... 57, 67 E After Touch ...........................................55 Effect ............................................. 52, 57 AMP SIMULATOR ..........................57, 66 Effect List ............................................. 64 Articulation ............................................59 ENDING ............................................... 70 Assembly Instructions ........................202 Assign .................................................102 EQ/ENHANCER ............................. 57, 67 ER/KARAOKE ................................ 57, 64 Audio ..................................................169 Expression pedal ........................ 17, 177 Audio Recording ................................169 External .............................................. 190 Auto Articulation ............................42, 59 Automatic Accompaniment ...........68, 82 F AUX IN ................................................182 Fast Forward (audio) .......................... 173 AUX OUT ............................................182 Fast Forward (Song) .......................... 157 B Files .................................................... 131 Bank ..........................................113, 116 FILL IN .................................................. 70 Bass Chord ...........................................82 Fingered Chord .................................... 83 Feet ...................................................... 54 BREAK ..................................................70 Brilliance ...............................................55 C Channel Messages .............................188 character ............................................145 Chord 1/Chord 2 ...................................80 CHORUS .......................................57, 64 Computer ............................................186 Connections .......................................182 Contrast of the Display .........................18 Controls ................................................52 Convert to XG .....................................166 Copy ...................................................161 Creating folders ..................................165 Custom A.B.C. ......................................83 Custom Play .......................................156 FLANGER ...................................... 57, 64 Folders ...................................... 131, 165 K Keyboard ............................................. 29 Keyboard Percussion ................... 68, 88 Kit Assign List .................................... 105 L language .............................................. 27 LCD ...................................................... 25 Lead Voice ........................................... 29 Left Footswitch ................................... 177 Lower Keyboard .................................. 30 Lower Keyboard Voice ........................ 30 M M.O.C. (Melody On Chord) ................. 85 MAIN .................................................... 70 Main Drum ........................................... 80 Manual Setup ..................................... 195 MDR ................................................... 127 MDR Display ............................. 127, 128 MDR Recording ................................. 138 Melody On Chord ................................ 85 Memory ................................................ 84 Metronome .................................... 75, 78 Footswitches ...................................... 177 MIDI .......................................... 183, 187 Format .................................................... 7 MISCELLANEOUS ........................ 57, 67 Formatting a USB Flash Drive ............ 133 Functions and settings that cannot be memorized ....................................... 112 G Glide ................................................... 179 GM ......................................................... 7 GS .......................................................... 7 H Mode (Rotary Speaker) ....................... 60 Music Data Recorder ......................... 127 N Name ................................................. 144 Name (audio) ..................................... 176 networks ............................................ 194 Next Unit ................................... 126, 153 Numbered buttons (Registration Memory) ........................................................ 111 Headphones ........................................ 19 I O On/Off status of the Voices .................. 31 ID ........................................................ 168 DATA CONTROL dial ...........................25 DELAY ...........................................57, 64 Delay (Vibrato) ......................................56 Delete (Song/Folder) ..........................164 Deleting the File ..................................176 Depth (Reverb) .....................................62 Depth (Vibrato) .....................................56 INFRASTRUCTURE ............................ 197 Initial Touch .......................................... 55 Initialize the wireless LAN settings ..... 200 Initializing Registration Memory ......... 120 Initializing the Electone ........................ 27 Internal ............................................... 190 INTRO .................................................. 70 P Pad ...................................................... 80 11 Page construction (MDR Display) ..... 128 Panning ................................................ 54 Part (Rhythm) ....................................... 79 Pause (audio) .................................... 173 Appendix D Pause (Song) ..................................... 157 Pedal Voice .......................................... 30 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual 211 Pedalboard ...........................................30 PHASER .........................................57, 65 S PHONES .............................................182 Scroll bar .............................................. 25 Phrase 1/Phrase 2 ................................80 Selecting a Song ................................ 134 Version ................................................. 28 Shift .................................................... 122 Vibrato ................................................. 56 Pitch (overall) ......................................181 Shift End ............................................. 126 Voice buttons ....................................... 33 Pitch (Voice section) .............................58 Single Finger ........................................ 83 Voice Condition ................................... 53 Slide ..................................................... 59 Voice Display ....................................... 31 Playback (audio) ................................172 Solo function ........................................ 39 Voice List ............................................. 42 Playback (Song Parts) ........................157 Song ................................................... 155 Voice section 1 .................................... 33 Playback (Song) .................................155 Song (selection) ................................. 134 Voice section 2 .................................... 36 Power Supply .......................................16 Song data size ................................... 168 [VOICE SECTION 2] button .......... 33, 36 PRESET ................................................57 Song icons ......................................... 130 Voice sections ..................................... 29 Preset (Vibrato) .....................................56 SONG Page ....................................... 129 Voices .................................................. 29 Preset Keyboard Percussion ................88 Speed (Rotary Speaker) ...................... 60 Volume ................................................. 17 Preset Keyboard Percussion List .........90 Speed (Vibrato) .................................... 56 Priority ...................................................59 Speed Control ...................................... 60 Volume (Accompaniment part of the Rhythm) ............................................. 81 Protected Edit Song ...........................163 START (Rhythm) ................................... 71 Protected Original Song .....................163 Stop (Shift End) .................................. 126 Protected Songs .................................162 Super Articulation ................................. 42 Punch-in Recording ............................143 Sustain ................................................. 63 Synchro (MIDI) ................................... 190 R SYNCHRO START ................................ 71 Random ..............................................159 System Messages .............................. 188 Recording (audio) ..............................169 Recording (MDR) ...............................138 T Recording Each Part Separately ........140 Tempo (audio) .................................... 174 Registration Memory ..........................111 Tempo (MDR) ..................................... 158 Registration Menu ................................20 Tempo (Rhythm) .................................. 73 Registration Menu List ..........................22 THRU ............................................. 57, 67 Registration Shift ................................121 Time (Reverb) ...................................... 62 Registrations (load from a USB flash drive) ..........................................................154 To Lower function ................................. 38 Registrations (memorize) ...................111 Registrations (recall) ..........................113 Registrations (save to a USB flash drive) ................................................118, 147 Remaining Memory ............................168 Repeat Playback ................................159 Appendix 212 V Pitch (audio) .......................................174 PITCH CHANGE ............................57, 67 11 Utility .................................................... 18 Save (Registration Memory) ............... 118 Top (Shift End) ................................... 126 Touch Vibrato ....................................... 55 Transpose (overall) ............................ 181 Transpose (Voice section) ................... 58 TREMOLO/AUTO PAN .................. 57, 65 Tune ..................................................... 58 REVERB .........................................57, 64 Type (Reverb) ...................................... 62 Reverb (Accompaniment part of the Rhythm) ..............................................81 U Reverb (Keyboard Percussion) ............89 Unit ..................................................... 147 Reverb (Overall) ...................................61 Units ................................................... 119 Reverb (Percussion part of the Rhythm) ...........................................................74 Upper Keyboard .................................. 29 Reverb (Voice) ......................................54 USB Device ........................................ 132 Upper Keyboard Voice ........................ 29 Rewind (audio) ...................................173 USB Flash Drives ............................... 132 Rewind (Song) ....................................157 USB TO DEVICE ................................ 183 Rhythm .................................................68 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal ................ 132 Rhythm buttons ....................................68 USB TO HOST .................................... 183 Rhythm Condition ..........................74, 79 USB wireless LAN adaptor ................ 192 Rhythm List ...........................................77 User (Registration Shift) ..................... 123 Rhythm Sequence ................................86 User (Vibrato) ....................................... 56 Right Footswitch .................................177 User buttons (Rhythm) ......................... 75 ROTARY SPEAKER .......................57, 65 User buttons (Voice) ............................ 39 Rotary Speaker .....................................60 User Keyboard Percussion ................ 101 Rotary Speaker (Footswitch) ..............180 User rhythm .......................................... 76 ELB-02 Owner’s Manual Volume (audio) .................................. 174 Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ........... 89 Volume (Percussion part of the Rhythm) ................................................... 69, 74 Volume (Voice) ............................. 34, 54 W WAH .............................................. 57, 66 Wireless LAN Mode ........................... 197 Wireless LAN settings ........................ 192 WPS ................................................... 192 X XG .......................................................... 7 XG Songs ........................................... 160 About Using BSD-Licensed Software The software used by this product includes components that comply with the BSD license. The restrictions placed on users of software released under a typical BSD license are that if they redistribute such software in any form, with or without modification, they must include in the redistribution (1) a disclaimer of liability, (2) the original copyright notice and (3) a list of licensing provisions. The following contents are displayed based on the licensing conditions described above, and do not govern your use of the product. XySSL Copyright © 2006-2008, Christophe Devine. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * Neither the name of XySSL nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. WPA Supplicant Copyright © 2003-2009, Jouni Malinen <[email protected]> and contributors All Rights Reserved. This program is dual-licensed under both the GPL version 2 and BSD license. Either license may be used at your option. License Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. MALTA NORTH AMERICA Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686260 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 VENEZUELA Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A. AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza, Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela Tel: +58-212-943-1877 DENMARK Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Antaksentie 4 FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland Tel: +358 (0)96185111 Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama, P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama Tel: +507-269-5311 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 ICELAND Hljodfaerahusid Ehf. Sidumula 20 IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: +354-525-5050 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 CROATIA Euro Unit D.O.O. Slakovec 73 40305 Nedelisce Tel: +38540829400 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen, Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 AFRICA POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: +359-2-978-20-25 Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: +39-02-93577-1 BRAZIL BULGARIA FRANCE Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd. Nikis Ave 2k 1086 Nicosia Tel: + 357-22-511080 Major Music Center 21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus Tel: (392) 227 9213 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 ITALY Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900 Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 CYPRUS Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist. New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, VIC 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: +64-9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com DMI14 Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan (For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrase 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2016 Yamaha Corporation ZS53040 Published 04/2016 MWZC*.*- **C0 Printed in Indonesia ZS53040-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
-
203
-
204
-
205
-
206
-
207
-
208
-
209
-
210
-
211
-
212
-
213
-
214
-
215
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha ELB-02 Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha ELB-02 Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha ELB-02 Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha ELB-02 Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha ELB-02 Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha ELB-02 de handleiding
- português: Yamaha ELB-02 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha ELB-02 Brugervejledning
- polski: Yamaha ELB-02 Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha ELB-02 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha ELB-02 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha ELB-02 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha ELB-02 Manualul proprietarului
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha ELB-02 Guía del usuario
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Otros documentos
-
Roland RP401R El manual del propietario
-
The Singing Machine SMI-1460 Manual de usuario
-
Ibanez MIMX series El manual del propietario
-
Roland PK-9 Manual de usuario
-
-
Alesis BASSFIRE 60 Manual de usuario
-
Laney IRT-SLS Ironheart Tube Hybrid Guitar Amplifier Manual de usuario